HANDBOOK

Access to the Handbook

MOBILE APPLICATION ONLINE

Install the Scan MyCitroën application (content Visit the CITROËN website and select the ‘MyCitroën’
available offline). section to view or download the handbook or go to the
following address:
[Link]
Scan this QR Code for direct access.

Then select:
–  the vehicle, Select:
–  the issue period corresponding to the date of 1st –  the language,
registration of the vehicle. –  the vehicle and body style,
–  the issue period of the handbook corresponding to
the date of 1st registration of the vehicle.

This symbol indicates the latest

information available.
Welcome Key
Safety warning
Thank you for choosing a Citroën Jumpy / Dispatch/ë-Jumpy / ë-Dispatch
or a Citroën SpaceTourer/ë-SpaceTourer. Additional information
This document presents the key information and recommendations required
for you to be able to explore your vehicle in complete safety. We strongly
recommend familiarising yourself with this document and the Maintenance Environmental protection feature
and Warranty Guide.
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in this Left-hand drive vehicle
document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the
country in which it was sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are for guidance only. Right-hand drive vehicle
Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right to modify the technical specifications,
equipment and accessories without having to update this document. Location of equipment/button indicated using a
If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this Handbook is black area
passed on to the new owner.

Identification
This allows you to identify the special features of the vehicle:

Van

Crew cab with manual child lock

Crew cab with electric child lock

Combi, Business, Feel, Shine, Business Lounge

 Contents

Overview  ■ Front seats  49 Interior ambient lighting  93

Overview  4 2-seat front bench seat  51 Wiper control stalk  94
Labels  6 Steering wheel adjustment  53 Automatic wipers  95
Mirrors  53 Changing a wiper blade  96
Moduwork  54
Eco-driving  ■
 5
Precautions for the seats and bench seats  57
Fixed one-piece bench seat  58 Safety

 1 Fixed rear seat and bench seat  60 General safety recommendations  98

Instruments Rear seat and bench seat on rails  62 Hazard warning lamps  98
Instrument Panel  10 Individual rear seat(s) on rails  64 Emergency or assistance  99
Warning and indicator lamps  12 Crew cab, fixed  66 Horn  100
Indicators  18 Crew cab, folding  68 Pedestrian horn (Electric)  101
Distance recorders  23 Interior fittings  69 Electronic stability control (ESC)  101
Lighting dimmer  23 Loading area fittings  72 Advanced Grip Control  103
Trip computer  24 Seating area fittings  73 Seat belts  104
Touch screen  25 Panoramic sunroof  75 Airbags  107
Remotely operable functions (Electric)  27 Retractable sliding table  75 Child seats  110
Setting the date and time  27 Heating and Ventilation  79 Deactivating the front passenger airbag  112
Heating  80 ISOFIX and i-Size child seats  120

Access  2 Manual air conditioning 

Dual-zone automatic air conditioning 
80
80
Manual child lock 
Electric child lock 
134
135
Electronic key with remote control function and Front demisting - defrosting  82 Child lock on rear windows  135
built-in key,  29 Rear screen and/or door mirror
Unlocking/Complete or selective unlocking  31
Back-up procedures  35
demisting/de-icing 
Rear heating - air conditioning 
83
83 Driving  6
Central locking  38 Additional heating/ventilation system  84 Driving recommendations  136
Electric sliding side door(s)  39 A/C preconditioning (Electric)  86 Starting/switching off the engine  138
General recommendations for the sliding Courtesy lamp(s)  87 Manual parking brake  141
side doors  40 Electric parking brake  142
Hands-free sliding side door(s)  43 Hill start assist  144
Side-hinged rear doors 
Tailgate 
44
45
 4
Lighting and visibility 6-speed manual gearbox  145
Lighting control stalk  89 Gear shift indicator  145
Tailgate rear screen  45 Direction indicators  90 Automatic gearbox  146
Alarm  46 Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps  90 Drive selector (Electric)  149
Electric windows  48 Automatic illumination of headlamps  90 Driving modes (Electric)  150
Guide-me-home and welcome lighting  91 Stop & Start  150

Ease of use and comfort  3 Cornering lighting 

Automatic headlamp dipping 
92
92
Tyre under-inflation detection 
Driving and manoeuvring aids - General
152

Correct driving position  49 Headlamp beam height adjustment  93 recommendations  154

2
 Contents

Head-up display  155 Temporary puncture repair kit  205 CITROËN Connect Nav  12
Memorising speeds  156 Spare wheel  208 First steps  262
Speed Limit Recognition and Recommendation  157 Changing a bulb  212 Steering mounted controls  263
Speed limiter  159 Changing a fuse  217 Menus  263
Cruise control - particular recommendations  161 12 V battery / Accessory battery  219 Voice commands  265
Cruise control  161 Towing  223 Navigation  268
Adaptive Cruise Control  163 Connected navigation  271

 9
Active Safety Brake with Collision Risk Alert and Applications  273
Intelligent emergency braking assistance  166 Technical data Radio  276
Lane departure warning system  169 Engine technical data and towed loads  225 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio  277
Distraction detection  170 Diesel engines  226 Media  277
Blind Spot Monitoring  171 Electric motor  231 Telephone  279
Parking sensors  172 Dimensions  233 Settings  281
Top Rear Vision  174 Identification markings  236 Frequently asked questions  283

Practical information 7 Bluetooth® audio system  10 Alphabetical index  ■

Compatibility of fuels  178 First steps  237
Refuelling  178 Steering mounted controls  238
Diesel misfuel prevention  179 Menus  238
Charging system (Electric)  180 Radio  239
Charging the traction battery (Electric)  186 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio  240
Energy economy mode  189 Media  241
Snow chains  190 Telephone  243
Towing device  190 Frequently asked questions  246
Roof bars/Roof rack  191
Bonnet 
Engine compartment 
192
192 CITROËN Connect Radio  11
Checking levels  193 First steps  249
Access to additional videos
Checks  195 Steering mounted controls  250
AdBlue® (BlueHDi)  197 Menus  251
Free-wheeling  199 Applications  252
Advice on care and maintenance  201 Radio  252
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio  254
Media  254
In the event of a breakdown  8 Telephone  256
Warning triangle  203 Settings  259
Running out of fuel (Diesel)  203 Frequently asked questions  260 [Link]/helpPSA
Tool box  204

3
 Overview

Presentation 13. "START/STOP" button

14. Gearbox or drive selector
Instruments and controls Choice of driving mode
15. Monochrome screen with audio system
These illustrations and descriptions are Touch screen with CITROËN Connect Radio
intended as a guide. The presence and or CITROËN Connect Nav
location of some components varies 16. Bonnet release
according to the version, trim level and 17. Dashboard fuses
country of sale. 18. Head-up display
19. Electric parking brake

1. Glove box Depending on the vehicle's equipment,

Deactivation of the front passenger airbag the storage compartments may be open
2. 12 V (120 W) accessory sockets or closed. This configuration is shown as an
3. USB socket example.
4. JACK socket
5. Instrument panel
6. Storage Steering-mounted controls
Cup/can holder
7. Storage compartment
8. Upper storage compartment
9. 220 V (150 W) accessory socket 
10. Horn
11. Courtesy lamp
Warning lamps display for seat belts and
front passenger airbag
Interior rear view mirror
Monitoring mirror
Emergency and assistance call buttons
12. Heating/Air conditioning 1. Exterior lighting/Direction indicators control
Front demisting – de-icing stalks
Rear screen demisting – de-icing 2. Wiper controls/Screenwash/Trip computer

4
 Overview

3. Audio system setting controls Side control bar Electric motor

4. Controls for Cruise control/Speed limiter/
Adaptive Cruise Control
5. Instrument panel display mode selection
wheel
6. Voice synthesis control
Volume adjustment
7. Audio system setting controls

Central control bar

1. Advanced Grip Control
2. Head-up display
3. Parking sensors
4. Additional heating/ventilation system (Diesel) 1. Charging connectors
5. Alarm 2. Traction battery
6. Headlamp beam height adjustment 3. Accessory battery
7. Lane departure warning system 4. On-board charger
1. Locking/unlocking from the inside 8. Blind spot monitoring system 5. Electric motor
2. Left-hand electric sliding side door 9. Automatic headlamp dipping 6. Charging cable
3. Electric child lock
4. Right-hand electric sliding side door The charging connectors 1 enable 3 types of
5. Cab/loading area selectivity charging:
6. Hazard warning lamps –  Domestic charging in mode 2 using a
7. DSC/ASR system domestic socket and associated charging cable
8. Tyre under-inflation detection 6.
9. Stop & Start (Diesel) –  Accelerated charging in mode 3 using an
accelerated charging unit (Wallbox).
–  Superfast charging in mode 4 using a fast
public charger.
The 400 V traction battery 2 uses Lithium-Ion
technology. It stores and supplies the energy
required for the operation of the electric motor,

5
 Overview

air conditioning and heating. Its charge level is

represented by an indicator and a reserve power
warning lamp on the instrument panel.
The 12 V accessory battery 3 powers the
vehicle’s conventional electrical system. It is
recharged automatically by the traction battery
via the on-board charger.
The on-board charger 4 provides domestic
charging (mode 2) and accelerated charging
(mode 3) of the traction battery as well as
recharging of the 12 V accessory battery.
The electric motor 5 provides propulsion in
accordance with the selected driving mode and
driving conditions. It recovers energy during
vehicle braking and deceleration phases.

Labels Precautions for seats and bench seats

section.

Moduwork section.

Retractable sliding table section.

Side-hinged rear doors section. Rear seat and bench seat on rails section.

Additional heating/ventilation section.

6
 Overview

Checking levels section.

24V

Deactivating the front passenger airbag 12V

section.
12 V battery/Accessory battery section.

Charging system (Electric) section.

Temporary puncture repair kit, Spare wheel
ISOFIX child seats section. and Identification markings section.

Charging the traction battery (Electric)

section.

Manual child lock section.

Bonnet section.
Electric parking brake section.

7
 Eco-driving

Eco-driving Control the use of electrical equipment rack, bicycle carrier, trailer). Preferably, use a
roof box.
Before moving off, if the passenger compartment
Eco-driving refers to a range of everyday Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows
practices that allow the motorist to optimise At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit
and air vents before using the air conditioning.
the vehicle's energy consumption (fuel and/or summer tyres.
At speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the
electricity) and CO2 emissions.
windows and leave the air vents open. Comply with the servicing instructions
Optimise your use of the gearbox Consider using equipment that can help keep Check tyre pressures regularly, with the tyres
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and the temperature in the passenger compartment cold, referring to the label in the door aperture on
change up promptly. While accelerating, change down (e.g. sunroof blind, window blinds). the driver's side.
up early. Unless automatically regulated, switch off the air Carry out this check in particular:
With an automatic gearbox, favour automatic conditioning as soon as the desired temperature –  before a long journey.
mode. Do not depress the accelerator pedal has been reached. –  at each change of season.
heavily or suddenly. Switch off the demisting and defrosting functions, –  after a long period out of use.
The gear shift indicator prompts you to engage if they are not managed automatically. Do not forget the spare wheel and, where
the most suitable gear. Whenever this indication Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible. applicable, the tyres on your trailer or caravan.
is displayed on the instrument panel, follow it Adapt the use of headlamps and/or foglamps Have your vehicle serviced regularly (e.g. engine
straight away. depending on visibility conditions. oil, oil filter, air filter, passenger compartment
With an automatic gearbox, this indicator Avoid running the engine before moving off, filter, etc.). Observe the schedule of operations in
appears only in manual mode. particularly in winter (other than in severe wintry the manufacturer's service schedule.
Drive smoothly conditions: temperature below -23°C). The With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system
vehicle will warm up much faster while driving. is faulty, your vehicle will emit pollution. Visit
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use
As a passenger, avoid connecting your a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
engine braking rather than the brake pedal and
multimedia devices (e.g. film, music, video as soon as possible to restore your vehicle's
press the accelerator gradually. These practices
game) to help reduce the consumption of energy. nitrogen oxide emissions to legal levels.
help to save on energy consumption, reduce
Disconnect all portable devices before leaving When filling the fuel tank, do not continue after
CO2 emissions and decrease general traffic
the vehicle. the third cut-out of the nozzle, to avoid overflow.
noise.
When the traffic is flowing smoothly, select the Limit the causes of excess consumption You will only see the fuel consumption of your
cruise control. Spread loads throughout the vehicle. Place the new vehicle settle down to a consistent average
heaviest items in the boot as close as possible to after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres).
the rear seats.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and
minimise wind resistance (e.g. roof bars, roof

8
 Eco-driving

Optimising the driving range (Electric)

The vehicle’s electrical consumption depends
heavily on the route, the vehicle speed and your
driving style.
Try to remain in the "ECO" zone on the power
indicator, by driving smoothly and maintaining a
steady speed.
Anticipate the need to slow down, and brake
smoothly, whenever possible using engine
braking with the regenerative braking function,
which will move the power indicator into the
"CHARGE" zone.

9
 Instruments

Instrument panel 1. Thermal comfort consumption indicator With matrix display

2. Charge level indicator
Speedometer With LCD display

Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h).

Indicators and displays

With matrix display (Electric)

With LCD text or matrix display

With LCD text display

1. Fuel gauge
2. Engine coolant temperature indicator

With matrix display (Electric)

When travelling abroad, you may need to

change the distance unit: the speed must
be displayed in the country’s official unit (mph
or km/h). The unit is changed via the screen's
configuration menu, with the vehicle
stationary.

10
 Instruments

1. Cruise control or speed limiter settings

Display of speed limit signs
Control buttons B. General lighting dimmer.
Depending on version: browse a menu or list,
1
2. Gear shift indicator (Diesel) or change a value.
Gear with an automatic gearbox (Diesel) or C. Resetting the trip distance recorder.
Drive selector position (Electric) Depending on version: enter the configuration
3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) with LCD With LCD display menu (long press), confirm a choice (short
and LCD text instrument panel (Diesel) press).
Display area with matrix instrument panel: D. Reminder of servicing information or driving
alert or function status message, trip range with the SCR system and the AdBlue®.
computer, digital speedometer (mph or km/h), Resetting the selected function (service
power flow/vehicle charge state (Electric), With LCD text display indicator or trip distance recorder).
etc. Depending on version: enter the configuration
4. Service indicator, then total distance recorder menu (long press), confirm a choice (short
(miles or km) press).
Trip distance recorder (miles or km) (Diesel)
With matrix display With the touch screen, it is also possible
Remaining range/Driving mode selected
to adjust the lighting dimmer.
(Electric)
Display area with LCD text instrument Rev counter
panel: alert or function status message, trip
computer, etc.
With matrix display (Electric)
5. Engine coolant temperature indicator
6. Engine oil level indicator
7. Fuel gauge Rev counter (x 1000 rpm).

A. Resetting the service indicator.

Power indicator (Electric)
Temporary reminder of servicing information.
Reminder of driving range with the AdBlue®
system.
Depending on version: go back up a level or Power indicator CHARGE, ECO, POWER or
cancel the current operation. NEUTRAL.

11
 Instruments

For more information on the Indicators, Persistent warning lamp Maximum engine coolant temperature
please refer to the corresponding or  Fixed (warning lamp or LED),
If a red or orange warning lamp comes on, there
section. with the needle in the red zone
may be fault which needs further investigation.
(depending on version).
If a lamp remains lit The temperature of the cooling system is too
Warning and indicator The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning high.
and indicator lamp description indicate whether Carry out (1), then wait until the engine has
lamps you should contact a qualified professional in cooled down before topping up the level, if
Displayed as symbols, the warning and indicator addition to the immediate recommended actions. necessary (Diesel). If the problem persists, carry
lamps inform the driver of the occurrence of a (1): You must stop the vehicle. out (2).
malfunction (warning lamps) or of the operating Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off Engine oil pressure
status of a system (operation or deactivation the ignition. Fixed.
indicator lamps). Certain lamps light up in two (2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified There is a fault with the engine lubrication
ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in several colours. workshop. system.
(3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Carry out (1) and then (2).
Associated warnings
workshop.
The illumination of a lamp may be accompanied System malfunction (Electric)
by an audible signal and/or a message displayed List of warning and Fixed.
in a screen. A fault involving the electric motor or
Relating the type of alert to the operating status
indicator lamps traction battery has been detected.
of the vehicle allows you to determine whether Red warning/indicator lamps Carry out (1) and then (2).
the situation is normal or whether a fault has Cable connected (Electric)
occurred: refer to the description of each lamp
STOP
Fixed when the ignition is switched on.
Fixed, associated with another warning
for further information. The charging cable is connected to the
lamp, accompanied by the display of a
When the ignition is switched on vehicle's connector.
message and an audible signal.
Fixed when the ignition is switched on,
Certain red or orange warning lamps come on A serious fault with the engine, braking system,
accompanied by a message.
for a few seconds when the ignition is switched power steering or automatic gearbox or a major
It is not possible to start the vehicle while the
on. These warning lamps should go off as soon electrical fault has been detected.
charging cable is connected to the vehicle’s
as the engine is started. Carry out (1) and then (2).
connector.
For more information on a system or a function,
Disconnect the charging cable and close the
refer to the corresponding section.
flap.

12
 Instruments

Battery charge
Fixed.
With an automatic gearbox or drive selector,
select mode P.
Fixed, accompanied by the display of a
message. 1
The battery charging circuit has a fault Switch off the ignition and carry out (2). One or more major faults, for which there is/are
(dirty or loose terminals, slack or cut alternator Manual parking brake no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected.
belt, etc.). Fixed. Identify the cause of the fault using the message
Clean and retighten the terminals. If the warning The parking brake is applied or not displayed on the instrument panel, then carry
lamp does not go off when the engine is started, properly released. out (3).
carry out (2). Fixed, accompanied by the message
Braking
Seat belts not fastened/unfastened "Parking brake fault".
Fixed.
Fixed or flashing, accompanied by Automatic release of the electric parking brake is
The brake fluid level in the braking circuit
an increasing audible signal. unavailable.
has dropped significantly.
A seat belt has not been fastened or has been Carry out (2).
Carry out (1), then top up with fluid that complies
unfastened (depending on version). Service warning lamp fixed and
with the manufacturer's recommendations. If the
service spanner flashing then
Door open problem persists, carry out (2).
fixed.
Fixed, associated with a message Fixed.
The servicing interval has been exceeded.
identifying the access. The electronic brake force
The vehicle must be serviced as soon as
An audible signal supplements the alert if the distribution (EBFD) system is faulty.
possible.
speed is higher than 6 mph (10 km/h). Carry out (1) and then (2).
Only with BlueHDi Diesel engines.
A door, the boot, the tailgate or the tailgate Orange warning/indicator lamps
screen is still open (depending on version). Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
Close the access. Service Fixed.
If your vehicle is equipped with a right-hand Temporarily on, accompanied by the The anti-lock braking system has a fault.
hinged door, its opening will not be indicated by display of a message. The vehicle retains conventional braking.
this warning lamp. One or more minor faults, for which there is/are Drive carefully at reduced speed, then carry out
no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected. (3).
Electric parking brake
Identify the cause of the fault using the message AdBlue® (Euro 6.1)
Fixed.
displayed on the instrument panel. Fixed, on switching on the ignition,
The electric parking brake is applied.
You may be able to deal with some faults accompanied by an audible signal and a
Flashing.
yourself, such as changing the battery in the message indicating the driving range.
Application/release is faulty.
remote control. The driving range is between 1,500 and 370
Carry out (1): park on flat ground (on a level
For other faults, such as with the tyre under- miles (2,400 and 600 km).
surface).
inflation detection system, carry out (3).
With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.

13
 Instruments

You must quickly top up the AdBlue®, or carry Promptly top up the AdBlue®, or carry out (3). accompanied by an audible signal and a
out (3). Flashing, accompanied by an audible message indicating the driving range.
AdBlue® warning lamp flashing and signal and a message indicating the Depending on the message displayed, it may be
Service warning lamp fixed, driving range. possible to drive for up to 685 miles (1,100 km)
accompanied by an audible signal and a The driving range is less than 62 miles (100 km). before the engine immobiliser is triggered.
message indicating the driving range. You must top up the AdBlue® to avoid engine Carry out (3) without delay, to avoid starting
The driving range is less than 375 miles starting being prevented, or carry out (3). being prevented.
(600 km). Flashing, accompanied by an audible Flashing AdBlue® warning
You must top up the AdBlue® to avoid a signal and a message indicating that lamp on switching on the
breakdown, or carry out (3). starting is prevented. ignition, with the Service and Engine self-
AdBlue® warning lamp flashing and The AdBlue® tank is empty: the legally required diagnostics warning lamps on fixed,
Service warning lamp fixed, engine immobiliser system prevents the engine accompanied by an audible signal and a
accompanied by an audible signal and a from starting. message indicating that starting is prevented.
message indicating that starting is prevented. To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue® or carry The engine immobiliser prevents the engine
The AdBlue® tank is empty: the legally required out (2). from restarting (over the authorised driving limit
engine immobiliser system prevents the engine It is essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue® after confirmation of an emissions control system
from starting. to the tank. malfunction).
To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue®, or SCR emissions control system (BlueHDi) To start the engine, carry out (2).
carry out (2). Fixed when the ignition is Engine self-diagnosis system
You must add at least 5 litres of AdBlue® to its switched on, accompanied Flashing.
tank. by an audible signal and a message. The engine management system has a
AdBlue® (Euro 6.2/6.3) A malfunction involving the SCR emissions fault.
On for around 30 seconds when starting control system has been detected. There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be
the vehicle, accompanied by a message This alert disappears once the exhaust destroyed.
indicating the driving range. emissions return to normal levels. Carry out (2) without fail.
The driving range is between 1,500 and 500 Flashing AdBlue® warning Fixed.
miles (2,400 and 800 km). lamp on switching on the The emission control system has a fault.
Top up the AdBlue®. ignition, with the Service and Engine self- The warning lamp should go off when the engine
Fixed, on switching on the ignition, diagnostics warning lamps on fixed, is started.
accompanied by an audible signal and a Carry out (3) quickly.
message indicating the driving range. Fixed.
The driving range is between 500 and 62 miles A minor engine fault has been
(800 and 100 km). detected.

14
 Instruments

Carry out (3).

Fixed.
If manual application and release commands are
not working, the electric parking brake control
Collision Risk Alert/Active Safety Brake
Flashing. 1
A major engine fault has been lever is faulty. The system activates and brakes the
detected. The automatic functions must be used at all vehicle momentarily to reduce the speed of
Carry out (1) and then (2). times and are automatically re-enabled in the collision with the vehicle in front.
Deactivation of the automatic functions event of a control lever fault. Fixed, accompanied by a message and
(with electric parking brake) Carry out (2). an audible signal.
Fixed. Fixed, accompanied by the The system has a fault.
The "automatic application" (on switching message "Parking brake Carry out (3).
off the engine) and "automatic release" (on fault". Fixed, accompanied by the display of a
acceleration) functions are deactivated. The parking brake is faulty: manual and message.
If automatic application/release is no longer automatic functions may not be working. The system has been deactivated via the vehicle
possible: When stationary, to immobilise the vehicle: configuration menu.
►  Start the engine. ►  Pull and hold the control lever for Dynamic stability control (DSC) and anti-
►  Use the control lever to apply the parking approximately 7 to 15 seconds, until the indicator slip regulation (ASR)
brake. lamp comes on on the instrument panel. Flashing.
►  Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. If this procedure does not work, secure the The DSC/ASR adjustment is activated if
►  Hold the control lever pressed in the release vehicle: there is a loss of grip or trajectory.
direction for between 10 and 15 seconds. ►  Park on a level surface. Fixed.
►  Release the control lever. ►  With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. The DSC/ASR system has a fault.
►  Depress and hold the brake pedal. ►  With an automatic gearbox or drive selector, Carry out (3).
►  Hold the control lever in the “Application” select P, then place the supplied chock against
Emergency brake malfunction (with
direction for 2 seconds. one of the wheels.
electric parking brake)
►  Release the control lever and the brake Then carry out (2).
Fixed, accompanied by the
pedal. Braking message "Parking brake fault".
Malfunction (with electric parking brake) Fixed. Emergency braking does not deliver optimal
Fixed, accompanied by the A minor fault with the braking system has performance.
message "Parking brake fault". been detected. If automatic release is not available, use manual
The vehicle cannot be immobilised with the Drive carefully. release or carry out (3).
engine running. Carry out (3).

15
 Instruments

Hill start assist Engine pre-heating (Diesel) Airbags

Fixed, accompanied by the Temporarily on Fixed.
message "Anti roll-back system (up to approximately 30 seconds in One of the airbags or seat belt
fault". severe weather conditions). pyrotechnic pretensioners is faulty.
The system has a fault. When switching on the ignition, if the weather Carry out (3).
Carry out (3). conditions and the engine temperature make it Low fuel level
Dynamic stability control (DSC)/Anti-slip necessary. or  Fixed (warning lamp or LED)
regulation (ASR) Wait until the warning lamp goes off before and needle in the red zone
Fixed. starting. (depending on version), accompanied by an
The system is deactivated. When the warning lamp goes off, starting will audible signal and a message.
The DSC/ASR system is reactivated occur immediately if you press and hold: The audible signal and the message are
automatically when the vehicle is started, and –  the clutch pedal with a manual gearbox. repeated with increasing frequency as the level
from around 31 mph (50 km/h). –  the brake pedal with an automatic gearbox. drops towards zero.
Below 31 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate it If the engine does not start, make the engine When it first comes on, there remains less than
manually. starting request again, while keeping your foot 8 litres of fuel in the tank.
on the pedal. Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel.
Under-inflation
Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal Front passenger airbag (ON) Never drive until completely empty, as
and a message. Fixed. this could damage the emissions control and
The pressure in one or more tyres is too low. The front passenger airbag is activated. injection systems.
Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as The control is in the "ON" position. Low traction battery level (Electric)
possible. In this case, do NOT install a "rearward 100

Fixed LED and needle in the red zone,

Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting facing" child seat on the front passenger seat 0% accompanied by an audible signal and a
the pressure. - Risk of serious injury! message.
Under-inflation warning lamp Front passenger airbag(OFF) The state of charge of the traction battery is low.
flashing then fixed and Service Fixed. View the remaining range.
warning lamp fixed. The front passenger airbag is deactivated. Put the vehicle on charge as soon as possible.
The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty. The control is in the "OFF" position. Tortoise mode with limited driving range
Under-inflation detection is no longer monitored. You can install a "rearward facing" child seat, (Electric)
Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible unless there is a fault with the airbags (airbag Fixed.
and carry out (3). warning lamp on). The state of charge of the traction battery
is critical.
The engine power gradually decreases.

16
 Instruments

You must put the vehicle on charge.

If the warning lamp remains lit, carry out (2).
Rear foglamp
Fixed.
Flashing temporarily.
STOP mode is momentarily unavailable 1
Pedestrian horn (Electric) The rear foglamp is lit. or START mode is automatically triggered.
Fixed. Foot on the brake Vehicle ready to drive (Electric)
Horn fault detected. Fixed. Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal
Carry out (3). Insufficient or no pressure on the brake when it comes on.
Presence of water in Diesel filter pedal. The vehicle is ready to drive and the thermal
Fixed (with LCD instrument panel). With the automatic gearbox or the drive selector, comfort systems are available.
The Diesel filter contains water. it may be necessary to depress the brake pedal The indicator lamp goes out upon reaching a
Risk of damage to the injection system: carry out to unlock the gearbox from mode N. speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) and
(2) without delay. Foot on the clutch lights up again when the vehicle stops moving.
Fixed. The lamp will go out when you turn off the
Particle filter (Diesel)
Stop & Start: the change to START mode engine and exit the vehicle.
Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal
and a message about the risk of particle is rejected because the clutch pedal is not fully Blind spot monitoring
filter blockage. depressed. Fixed.
This indicates that the particle filter is beginning Fully depress the clutch pedal. The function has been activated.
to saturate. Green warning/indicator lamps Lane departure warning system
As soon as the traffic conditions permit, Flashing, accompanied by an audible
Automatic wiping
regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at signal.
Fixed.
least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp A line is being crossed, right-hand side (or left-
Automatic windscreen wiping is activated.
goes off. hand side).
Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal Automatic headlamp dipping Turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction
and a message signalling that the additive Fixed. to return to the correct trajectory.
level in the particle filter is too low. The function has been activated
Direction indicators
This indicates that the level in the additive tank via the vehicle’s configuration menu.
Flashing with audible signal.
is low. The lighting control stalk is in the "AUTO"
The direction indicators are on.
Carry out (3). position.
Sidelamps
Power steering Stop & Start
Fixed.
Fixed. Fixed.
The lamps are on.
The power steering has a fault. When the vehicle stops, the Stop & Start
Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry puts the engine into STOP mode.
out (3).

17
 Instruments

Dipped beam headlamps –  an alert message indicates the distance ►  Press and hold this button.
Fixed. remaining, as well as the period before the next ►  Switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
The lamps are on. service is due or how long it is overdue. display begins a countdown.
Front foglamps Service spanner ►  Release the button when =0 is displayed; the
Fixed. On temporarily when the ignition is spanner disappears.
The front foglamps are on. switched on. If you have to disconnect the battery
Blue warning/indicator lamps Between 620 and 1,860 miles (1,000 and 3,000 following this operation, lock the vehicle
km) remain before the next service is due. and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to be
Main beam headlamps Fixed, when the ignition is switched on. registered.
Fixed. The next service is due in less than 620
The lamps are on. miles (1,000 km).
Retrieving the service information
Black/white warning lamps Have your vehicle serviced very soon.
Service spanner flashing The service information can be accessed at any
Foot on the brake time.
Fixed. Flashing then fixed, when the
ignition is switched on. ►  Press this button.
Insufficient or no pressure on the brake The service information is displayed for a few
pedal. (With BlueHDi Diesel engines, combined with the
Service warning lamp.) seconds, then disappears.
With an automatic gearbox, with the engine
running, before releasing the parking brake, to The servicing interval has been exceeded. The distance indicated (in miles or
move out of position P. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. kilometres) is calculated according to the
distance covered and the time elapsed since
Resetting the service indicator
Indicators The service indicator must be reset after each
the last service.
The alert may be triggered close to a due
service. date.
Service indicator ►  Switch off the ignition.
The service indicator is displayed on the
instrument panel. Depending on the vehicle
version:
–  the distance recorder display line indicates
the distance remaining before the next service
is due, or the distance travelled since it was due
preceded by the sign “-”.

18
 Instruments

Coolant temperature
indicator (Diesel)
Checking
After driving for a few minutes, the temperature
Oil level correct
1
and pressure in the cooling system increase.
To top up the level:
►  wait at least one hour for the engine to cool,
►  unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the
pressure to drop, This is indicated by a message on the instrument
►  when the pressure has dropped, remove the panel.
cap, Low oil level
►  top up the level to the "MAX" mark.
For more information on Checking levels, refer
to the corresponding section.

Be aware of the risk of scalding when

With the engine running: topping up the coolant. Do not fill above
the maximum level (indicated on the This is indicated by a message on the instrument
–  In zone A, the temperature is correct.
reservoir). panel.
–  In zone B, the temperature is too high.
If a low oil level is confirmed by a check using
The associated warning lamp and the
the dipstick, the level must be topped up to avoid
STOP warning lamp light up in red on the Engine oil level indicator damage to the engine.
instrument panel, accompanied by the display of
(Depending on version) For more information on Checking levels, refer
a message and an audible signal.
On versions fitted with an electric gauge, the to the corresponding section.
You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is
engine oil level status is displayed on the Oil gauge malfunction
safe to do so.
instrument panel for a few seconds when the
Wait a few minutes before switching off the
ignition is switched on, at the same time as the
engine.
servicing information.
After switching off the ignition, carefully
The level read will only be correct if the
open the bonnet and check the coolant
vehicle is on level ground and the engine
level. This is indicated by the display of a message on
has been off for more than 30 minutes.
the instrument panel.
For more information on Checking Consult a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
levels, refer to the corresponding workshop.
section.

19
 Instruments

In the event of a malfunction of the Manual display of the range With BlueHDi (Euro 6.1) engines
electric gauge, the oil level is no longer While the driving range is greater than
monitored. 1,500 miles (2,400 km), it is not displayed Warning/ Action Remaining
If the system is faulty, you must check the automatically. indicator range
engine oil level using the manual dipstick lamps on
located in the engine compartment. Top up as Between
For more information on Checking levels, soon as 1,500 miles
refer to the corresponding section. possible. and 375
miles (2,400
AdBlue® range indicators km and 600
km)
(BlueHDi)
A top-up is Between
The Diesel BlueHDi engines are equipped with
►  Press this button to temporarily display the vital, there is 375 miles
a system that associates the SCR (Selective
driving range. a risk that the and 0 miles
Catalytic Reduction) emissions control system
With touch screen engine will (600 km and
and the Diesel particle filter (DPF) for the
You can view the range information in the be prevented 0 km)
treatment of exhaust gases. They cannot
"Driving/Vehicle" menu. from starting.
function without AdBlue® fluid.
When the level of AdBlue® falls below the To be able 0 miles (km)
Actions required related to a lack of
reserve level (between 1,500 and 0 miles (2,400 to restart the
and 0 km)), a warning lamp lights up when
AdBlue® engine, add at
the ignition is switched on and an estimate The following warning lamps light up when the least 5 litres of
of the distance that can be travelled before quantity of AdBlue® is below the reserve level: AdBlue® to the
engine starting is prevented is displayed in the driving range of 1,500 miles (2,400 km). tank.
instrument panel. Together with the warning lamps, messages
regularly remind you of the need to top up to
The engine starting prevention system avoid engine starting being prevented. Refer to
required by regulations is activated the Warning and indicator lamps section for
automatically once the AdBlue® tank is empty. details of the messages displayed.
It is then no longer possible to start the
engine until the minimum level of AdBlue® has For more information on AdBlue®
been topped up. (BlueHDi) and in particular on topping
up, refer to the corresponding section.

20
 Instruments

With BlueHDi (Euro 6.2/6.3) engines

Warning/ Action Remaining

Malfunction of the SCR emissions
control system
While driving, the message is displayed every 30
seconds. The alert is repeated when switching 1
on the ignition.
Malfunction detection
indicator range You can continue driving for up to 685 miles
lamps on If a malfunction is detected, (1,100 km) before the engine starting
Top up. Between these warning lamps come prevention system is triggered.
1,500 miles on, accompanied by an Have the system checked by a
and 500 audible signal and an CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
miles (2,400 "Emissions fault” or “NO as soon as possible.
km and 800 START IN” message.
km) Starting prevented
The alert is triggered while driving, when the
Top up as Between Whenever the ignition is switched on, the
fault is detected for the first time, and thereafter
soon as 500 miles "Emissions fault: Starting prevented" or "NO
when switching on the ignition for subsequent
possible. and 62 START IN" message is displayed.
journeys, while the cause of the fault persists.
miles (800
To be able to restart the engine, contact
km and If the fault is temporary, the alert
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
100 km) disappears during the next journey, after
workshop.
self-diagnostic checks of the SCR emissions
A top-up is Between 62
control system.
vital, there is miles and 0
a risk that the miles (100
Malfunction confirmed during the
engine will km and 0
permitted driving phase (between 685
be prevented km)
miles and 0 miles (1,100 km and 0 km))
from starting.
If the fault indication is still displayed
To be able 0 miles (km)
permanently after 31 miles (50 km) of driving, the
to restart the
fault in the SCR system is confirmed.
engine, add at
The AdBlue warning lamp flashes, and an
least 5 litres of
"Emissions fault: Starting prevented in X
AdBlue® to the
miles" or "NO START IN X miles" message is
tank.
displayed, indicating the driving range in miles or
kilometres.

21
 Instruments

Power indicator (Electric) Charge level indicator ►  Put the vehicle on charge as soon as
possible.
(Electric) 2nd level: Critical
The state of charge of the traction battery
is critical.
Fixed, together with the reserve LED,
accompanied by an audible signal.
►  You must put the vehicle on charge.

The remaining range is no longer

calculated. The drive train power
gradually decreases.
The heating and air conditioning are switched
off (even if the needle indicating their
consumption is not at the "ECO" position).
CHARGE
The traction battery charge status and remaining
Traction battery charging during deceleration
and braking.
range are displayed continuously when the Thermal comfort
vehicle is started.
ECO consumption indicator
With the ignition off, opening the driver's
Moderate energy consumption and optimised
driving range. door activates the indicator.
(Electric)
POWER
Energy consumption by the drive train during
Associated warning lamps
acceleration.
NEUTRAL Two successive alert levels indicate that the
On switching on the ignition, your vehicle’s energy available has dropped to a low level:
electric drive train neither consumes nor 1st level: Reserve
The state of charge of the traction battery
100

generates energy: after sweeping over the

indicator, the needle returns to its "neutral" 0% is low.
position. Fixed LED and needle in the red zone,
accompanied by an audible signal.
With the ignition off, opening the driver's ►  View the remaining range on the instrument
door activates the indicator, which moves panel.
to the "neutral" position.

22
 Instruments

The gauge shows the consumption of the

traction battery's electrical energy by the thermal
when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked. 1
comfort devices in the passenger compartment.
The devices in question are the heating and air Total distance recorder
conditioning systems.
This equipment can be used: ►  With the ignition on, press the button until
–  If the vehicle is not plugged in, when the zeros appear.
READY lamp is lit.
–  If the vehicle is plugged in, when the ignition is Lighting dimmer
switched on ("Lounge" mode).
This system allows the brightness of the
Selecting ECO mode limits the performance
instruments and controls to be adjusted to suit
of some of this equipment. The needle on the
the ambient light level.
thermal comfort consumption indicator then
moves into the "ECO" zone.
This recorder measures the total distance
With buttons
To quickly heat or cool the passenger
travelled by the vehicle since its initial
compartment, feel free to temporarily
registration.
select the maximum heating or cooling
setting. Trip distance recorder (Diesel)
Excessive use of thermal comfort equipment,
particularly at low speed, can significantly
decrease the vehicle's range.
Remember to optimise equipment settings
upon achieving the desired level of comfort,
and adjust them if necessary whenever you With the lamps on, press button A to increase
start the vehicle. the brightness of the lighting, or button B to
After an extended period without using the decrease it.
heating, you may notice a slight odour during Release the button when the desired brightness
the first few minutes of use. is reached.

This measures the distance travelled since it was

Distance recorders last reset by the driver.
The total and trip distances are displayed for Resetting the trip recorder
thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,

23
 Instruments

With touch screen –  Current consumption.

–  Stop & Start time counter (Diesel).
–  Trip "1" followed by (depending on version)
trip "2" including average speed, average
consumption and distance travelled for each trip.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
is identical.
For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
figures and trip "2" for monthly figures.
►  Press the button located on the end of the
wiper control stalk.
Trip reset
The reset is performed when the trip counter is
►  In the Settings menu, select "Brightness" With steering-mounted controls
displayed.
or "OPTIONS", "Screen configuration" then
"Brightness".
►  Adjust the brightness by pressing the arrows
or moving the slider.

The brightness can be set differently for ►  Press the knob on the steering wheel.
day mode and night mode.
On the instrument panel

Trip computer
Displays information related to the current trip ►  Press the button on the end of the wiper
(range, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.). control stalk for more than two seconds.

Information display
To display the various trip computer tabs in turn:

►  Press this button.

►  Press the thumbwheel on the steering wheel
The following current information is shown in
for more than two seconds.
turn:
–  Driving range (Diesel).

24
 Instruments

Current consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Touch screen
This system gives access to the following
1
(miles/kWh or kWh/100 km or km/kWh) (Electric)
elements:
/ Calculated during the last few
–  Permanent display of the time and outside
seconds.
temperature (a blue warning lamp appears if
This function is only displayed at speeds above
there is a risk of ice).
19 mph (30 km/h) (Diesel).
–  Vehicle functions and equipment setting
Average consumption menus.
–  Audio system and telephone controls and
►  Press this button for more than 2 seconds. (mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
display of related information.
(miles/kWh or kWh/100 km or km/kWh) (Electric)
Definitions / Calculated since the last trip
–  Display of visual manoeuvring aid functions
–  Internet services and display of related
computer reset.
information.
Range
Average speed –  Navigation system controls and
(miles or km)
display of related information (depending on
Distance that can still be travelled with the (mph or km/h)
version).
fuel remaining in the tank (based on the Calculated since the last trip computer
average fuel consumption over the last few miles reset. For safety reasons, always stop the
(kilometres) travelled). vehicle before performing operations
This value may vary following a change in driving Distance travelled that require sustained attention.
style or terrain, leading to a significant change in (miles or km) Some functions are not accessible while
current fuel consumption. Calculated since the last trip computer driving.
When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km), reset.
dashes are displayed.
After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range Stop & Start time counter Recommendations
is recalculated and is displayed if it exceeds 62 (minutes/seconds or hours/minutes) This screen is of the capacitive type.
miles (100 km). –  Do not use pointed objects on the touch
If dashes instead of figures continue to be If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time screen.
displayed while driving, contact a CITROËN counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode –  Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands.
dealer or a qualified workshop. during a journey. –  Use a soft, clean cloth to clean the touch
The time counter is reset each time the ignition is screen.
switched on.

25
 Instruments

Principles For more information about the menus, –  Time and outside temperature (a blue warning
refer to the sections describing the audio lamp appears if there is a risk of ice).
►  Use the buttons on each side of the touch
and telematics systems. –  Reminder of information from the
screen to access the menus, then press the
RadioMedia and Telephone menus and
buttons that appear on the touch screen. Radio/Media navigation instructions (depending on
Some menus may display across two pages:
equipment).
press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Navigation (Depending on equipment) –  Notifications.
second page.
–  Access to the Settings.
After a few moments with no action on Driving or Vehicle (Depending on
the second page, the first page is equipment)
displayed automatically. Activation, deactivation and settings for certain Energy menu
functions.
Depending on version, this is accessible either:
To deactivate/activate a function, select "OFF" The functions are organised in 2 tabs: "Driving
–  directly, by pressing the button near the
or "ON". functions" and "Vehicle settings".
touch screen.
Configuring a function Telephone
–  via the Applications menu.

Access to additional information on the Applications

function Display of available connected services. Flow
Confirm Energy
The page displays a real-time representation of
Access the specific Electric functions
the electric drive train’s operation.
Return to the previous page or confirm (energy flow, consumption statistics, deferred
charge) organised in the corresponding 3 tabs.
or
Menus Settings
Main settings for the audio system and
touch screen.
Audio system on/off.
Volume adjustment/mute.

Upper bar 1. Active driving mode

Certain information is displayed permanently in 2. Electric motor
Press the touch screen with three fingers the upper bar of the touch screen: 3. Traction battery charge level
to show all of the menu buttons. 4. Energy flows

26
 Instruments

The energy flows have a specific colour for each

type of driving:
For more information on Charging the traction
battery (Electric), refer to the corresponding
vehicle is located in an area covered by the
mobile network. 1
A. Blue: energy consumption section. A lack of network coverage may prevent
B. Green: energy recovery communication with the vehicle (for example,

Remotely-operable if it is in an underground car park). In such

cases, the application will display a message
Statistics
This page shows electrical energy consumption
functions (Electric) indicating that the connection with the vehicle
could not be established.
statistics.

In addition to all the functions

of the MyCitroën application
Setting the date and time
that you can access from a
smartphone, you can access the Without audio system
following functions:
–  Blue bar chart: directly consumed energy
–  Battery charge management (Deferred
supplied by the traction battery.
charging).
–  Green bar chart: energy recovered during
–  Temperature pre-conditioning management.
deceleration and braking, used to recharge the
–  Consultation of the state of charge and range
battery.
of the vehicle.
The average result for the current trip is stated in
kWh/100 km. Installation procedure
►  You can change the displayed time scale by ►  Download the MyCitroën app from the
pressing the - or + buttons. appropriate online store for your smartphone.
►  Create an account.
A current trip is any trip of more than 20
►  Enter the vehicle’s V.I.N. (code beginning
minutes without switching off the ignition.
with "VF" on the vehicle registration document).
For more information on Identification Set the date and time via the instrument panel
Charging markings, refer to the corresponding section. display.
This page allows you to programme deferred ►  Press and hold this button.
Network coverage
charging. In order to be able to use the various
►  Press one of these buttons to select
remotely operable features, ensure that your
the setting to be changed.

27
 Instruments

►  Briefly press this button to confirm. With CITROËN Connect Nav

Time and date settings are only available if GPS
►  Press one of these buttons to change
synchronisation is deactivated.
the setting and confirm again to record
►  Select the Settings menu in the
the change.
banner of the touch screen.
►  Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
With audio system secondary page.
►  Press the MENU button for access to the ►  Select "Setting the time-date".
main menu.
►  Press the "7" or "8" button to select the ►  Select the "Date:" or "Time" tab.
"Personalisation-configuration" menu, then ►  Set the date and/or time using the numeric
confirm by pressing the OK button. keypad.
►  Press the "5" or "6" button to select the ►  Confirm with "OK".
Display configuration menu, then confirm by
Additional settings
pressing the OKbutton.
►  Press the "5" or "6" and "7" or "8" buttons You can choose:
to adjust the date and time values, then confirm –  To change the time zone.
by pressing the OK button. –  To change the display format of the date and
time (12h/24h).
With CITROËN Connect –  To activate or deactivate the summer time
Radio management function (+1 hour).
–  To activate or deactivate GPS synchronisation
►  Select the Settings menu in the upper (UTC).
banner of the touch screen.
►  Select "Configuration". The system does not automatically
►  Select "Date and time". change between winter and summer time
(depending on the country of sale).
►  Select "Date" or "Time".
►  Choose the display formats.
►  Change the date and/or time using the
numeric keypad.
►  Confirm with "OK".

28
 Access

Electronic key with

remote control function
If a door is not properly closed (except the
right-hand door with side-hinged rear
Unfolding / Folding the key
2
doors):
and built-in key, –  when the vehicle is stationary and engine
running, this warning lamp comes on,
If one of the doors or the boot is still open accompanied by a warning message for a few
or if the electronic key for the Keyless seconds,
Entry and Starting​system has been left inside –  when the vehicle is moving (at speeds above
the vehicle, central locking will not take place. 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on,
However, if the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, accompanied by an audible signal and a warning
it will be activated after 45 seconds. message for a few seconds. ►  Press this button to unfold or fold the key.

If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or

Remote control key The remote control may be damaged if
This allows the central locking or unlocking of the you do not press the button.
boot are not subsequently opened, the
vehicle will automatically lock itself again after vehicle using the door lock or remotely.
about 30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with It also allows the vehicle to be located, the fuel Keyless Entry and Starting
an alarm, it will be reactivated automatically. filler cap to be removed and refitted and the
This allows the central locking or unlocking of the
engine to be started or switched off, as well as
vehicle from a distance.
providing protection against theft.
Automatic door mirror folding and It is also used to locate and start the vehicle, as
unfolding can be deactivated by a The remote control buttons are not active well as providing protection against theft.
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. with the ignition switched on.
Integral key
As a safety measure, never leave the This is used to lock and unlock the vehicle when
vehicle, even for a short time, without the remote control cannot operate:
taking the Keyless Entry and Starting –  cell battery flat, vehicle battery discharged or
system’s electronic key with you. disconnected, etc.
Be aware of the risk of theft of the vehicle if –  vehicle located in an area with strong
the key is present in one of the defined areas electromagnetic signals.
while the vehicle is unlocked.

29
 Access

hands-free function is deactivated and it is Avoid pressing the remote control buttons
impossible to open the doors. while out of range of the vehicle, due to
For more information on Starting/switching the risk of rendering the remote control
off the engine, Keyless Entry and Starting inoperative. It would then be necessary to
and in particular the "ignition on" position, reset it.
refer to the corresponding section. The remote control does not work when the
►  Keep this button 1 pulled while removing key key is in the ignition switch, even when the
2 from the housing. ignition is switched off.
Locating the vehicle
If the alarm is activated, the audible Helps you to locate your vehicle from a distance,
signal triggered on opening a door with Anti-theft protection
with the vehicle locked:
the key (integral with the remote control) will Do not modify the electronic vehicle
–  The direction indicators flash for approximately
stop when the ignition is switched on. immobiliser, as this might result in
10 seconds.
malfunctions.
–  The courtesy lamps come on.
For vehicles with a key ignition switch,
"Keyless Entry and Starting" on your ►  Press this button.
remember to remove the key and turn the
person steering wheel to engage the steering lock.

Remote operation of lighting

Locking the vehicle
If fitted to the vehicle.
Driving with the doors locked could make
A short press on this button switches on
it more difficult for the emergency services
the lighting remotely (lighting of
to enter the passenger compartment in an
sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps and number
emergency.
plate lamps).
As a safety precaution, remove the key from
A second press on the button before the end of
the ignition or take the electronic key with you
the timed period cancels the remote lighting.
when leaving the vehicle, even for a short
Advice time.

It allows the unlocking, locking and starting of the Remote control Purchasing a second-hand vehicle
vehicle while carrying the remote control on your The remote control is a sensitive, high- Have the key codes memorised by a
person in recognition zone "A". frequency device; avoid handling it in your CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the keys in
pocket, due to the risk of unintentionally your possession are the only ones able to
In the ignition on (accessories) position, unlocking the vehicle. start the vehicle.
with the "START/STOP" button, the

30
 Access

To preserve the battery charge in the

electronic key and the vehicle's battery,
Unlocking/Complete or
selective unlocking
Activation/Deactivation
2
the "hands-free" functions are set to
hibernation mode after 21 days without use.
To restore these functions, press one of the What is the purpose of total
remote control buttons or start the engine with
the electronic key in the reader.
or selective unlocking?
For more information on starting with the
Keyless Entry and Starting system, refer to
the corresponding section. ►  To activateselective unlocking
between the cab and the loading
Electrical interference area or to deactivate selective unlocking and
The electronic key may not operate if return to total unlocking mode, switch on the
close to certain electronic devices such as ignition and press this button for more than two
telephones (switched on or on standby) or seconds.
laptop computers, strong magnetic fields, etc. An audible signal and, depending on equipment,
Total unlocking unlocks all the vehicle’s doors a display message, confirm that the request has
Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt, (front, side and rear). been acknowledged.
etc.) on the inner surface of the door
Selective unlocking between cab and
handle may affect detection.
loading area is activated by default.
If cleaning the inner surface of the door
handle using a cloth does not restore
detection, contact a CITROËN dealer or a Unlocking/Complete
qualified workshop.
A sudden splash of water (stream of water,
unlocking
Selective unlocking unlocks either the cab doors,
high pressure jet washer, etc.) may be or the doors of the loading area (side and rear). Unlocking is signalled by rapid flashing of
identified by the system as the desire to open the direction indicators for a few
The separated unlocking system
the vehicle. seconds.
between cab and loading area is a
Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold
security measure. This prevents access to the
and the alarm is deactivated.
part of the vehicle where the driver is not
present.

31
 Access

With the key With electric sliding side door(s) With an opening rear screen in the tailgate
►  To unlock the vehicle fully, turn the key in the
front left-hand door lock towards the front of the
vehicle.
If the vehicle has an alarm, it will not be
deactivated. Opening a door will trigger the
alarm, which can be stopped by switching the
ignition on.

With the remote control ►  With the Keyless Entry and Starting on your
►  Depending on equipment, person, to unlock the vehicle, press the tailgate
press one of these buttons to opening rear screen unlocking control. The
unlock the vehicle. ►  With the Keyless Entry and Starting on screen will open slightly; then, lift it up to open it.
your person, pass your hand behind the
Using the remote control with electric handle to unlock the vehicle, then pull and Selective unlocking
sliding side door(s) release the handle. This action also causes the
►  To fully unlock the vehicle and open corresponding door to open.
the side door, press and hold this button With tailgate
until the door has opened.
Unlocking is signalled by rapid flashing of
With Keyless Entry and Starting on the direction indicators for a few
your person seconds.
To unlock the vehicle, the remote control must be Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold
in recognition zone A. and the alarm is deactivated.
►  To unlock the vehicle fully, pass your hand
behind one of the door handles (front door(s), ►  With the Keyless Entry and Starting on your
With the remote control
manual sliding side door(s) or left-hand side- person, to unlock the vehicle, pull the tailgate
handle and then lift it up to open it. ►  To unlock the cabin doors alone,
hinged door) and then pull the handle to open
press this button once.
the corresponding door.
►  To unlock the side and rear doors of the
loading area, press this button a second time.
If the vehicle is fitted with this function:

32
 Access

►  Press this button to unlock the

loading area only.
right-hand door handle to unlock the loading
area, then pull and release the handle. This 2
action also causes the corresponding door to
Using the remote control with electric open.
sliding side door(s)
With tailgate
►  To unlock the loading area alone
without opening the side door, press the
relevant door button or keep the button pressed
down to open the door.

With Keyless Entry and Starting on ►  To unlock the loading area alone, the remote
control on your person in recognition zoneA, B
your person
or C, pass your hand behind a handle of the front
►  With the Keyless Entry and Starting on your
left or right doors, then pull the handle to open
person, to unlock the loading area, pull the
the corresponding door.
tailgate handle and then lift it up.
Depending on the version, the door
Unlocking is signalled by rapid flashing of
mirrors unfold only when the cabin is
the direction indicators for a few
unlocked, the alarm is deactivated.
seconds.
►  To unlock the cabin alone, pass your hand
behind a handle of the front left or right doors, With electric sliding side door(s)
then pull the handle to open the door.
Locking
The door locking state of the loading
area remains unchanged. With the key
►  To lock the vehicle fully, turn the key in the
front left-hand door lock towards the rear of the
vehicle.
If your vehicle has an alarm, it will not be
activated.

►  With the Keyless Entry and Starting on your

person, pass your hand behind the left-hand or

33
 Access

With the remote control ►  With the Keyless Entry and Starting on your Deadlocking
person, press the tailgate locking control to lock
►  To lock the vehicle completely, press
the vehicle. Deadlocking deactivates the exterior and
this button.
interior door controls, as well as the
Depending on version, keeping
With Keyless Entry and the locking controls depressed
central locking button on the dashboard.
The horn remains operational.
Starting on your person closes the windows. If the control is released,
You must therefore never leave anyone inside
the window stops in its current position.
To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be in the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
recognition zone A.
Ensure that no person or object might
prevent the windows from closing With the key
properly. ►  To deadlock the vehicle, turn the key in the
Pay particular attention to children when front left-hand door lock towards the rear of the
operating windows. vehicle.
►  Then, within five seconds, turn the key
If the vehicle is not fitted with an alarm, towards the rear again.
►  To lock the vehicle, press the markings on
one of the door handles (front door(s), manual locking is signalled by fixed lighting of the
With the remote control
sliding side door(s) or left-hand side-hinged direction indicators for approximately two
seconds. ►  To deadlock the vehicle, press this
door).
Depending on version, the door mirrors fold at button.
With electric sliding side door(s) the same time. ►  Then within five seconds after locking,
press this button again.
►  With the Keyless Entry and Starting on
your person, to lock the vehicle fully, press the Driving with the doors locked could make Depending on version, the electric door
markings on one of the front door handles. it more difficult for the emergency mirrors fold at the same time.
services to enter the passenger compartment
With tailgate in an emergency. If the vehicle is not fitted with an alarm,
As a safety measure, never leave the vehicle deadlocking is confirmed by fixed
without taking the remote control with you, illumination of the direction indicators for
even for a short time. about two seconds.

34
 Access

With Keyless Entry and Starting on

your person
►  With the Keyless Entry and Starting on your
person, press the tailgate locking control to lock
In the first case, change the remote control
battery. 2
To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be in the entire vehicle. In the second case, reinitialise the remote
recognition zone A. ►  To deadlock the vehicle, press the control control.
again within five seconds. Refer to the corresponding sections.
►  Insert the key in the door lock.
If the vehicle is not fitted with an alarm,
►  Turn the key towards the front/rear to unlock/
deadlocking is signalled by fixed lighting
lock the vehicle.
of the direction indicators for approximately
►  Turn the key towards the rear again within
two seconds.
►  To lock the vehicle fully, press the markings 5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
on one of the door handles (front door(s), If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will
manual sliding side door(s) or left-hand side-
hinged door).
Back-up procedures not be activated when locking with the
key.
►  To deadlock the vehicle, press the markings If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds
again within five seconds. Lost keys, remote control, when the door is opened; switch on the
With electric sliding side door(s)
electronic key ignition to stop it.
Go to a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's
►  With the Keyless Entry and Starting on registration certificate, your personal If the vehicle is unlocked with the key in
your person, to lock the vehicle fully, press the identification documents and if possible, the label the lock after locking it with the remote
markings on one of the front door handles. bearing the key code. control or the Keyless Entry and Starting
►  To deadlock the vehicle, press the markings The CITROËN dealer will be able to retrieve the system, all doors and the boot are
again within five seconds. key code and the transponder code, enabling a unlocked.
With tailgate new key to be ordered. If the vehicle is unlocked with the key in the
lock after locking it with the key, only the
Complete unlocking/locking doors (front door and sliding side door(s)) are
of the vehicle with the key unlocked. The side-hinged doors and tailgate
are not unlocked. Switching on the ignition
Use this procedure in the following situations:
unlocks them.
–  Remote control battery discharged.
–  Remote control malfunction.
–  Vehicle battery discharged.
–  Vehicle in an area subject to strong
electromagnetic interference.

35
 Access

Central locking not ►  Close the door and check from the outside
that the vehicle is locked.
functioning
Use these procedures in the following cases: Unlocking the tailgate
–  Central locking malfunction.
–  Battery disconnected or discharged. Sliding side door
►  Remove the black cap on the edge of the
In the event of a malfunction of the door, using the key.
central locking system, the battery must ►  Insert the key in the aperture without
be disconnected to ensure that the vehicle is forcing it, then without turning it, move the latch
locked fully. sideways towards the inside of the door.
►  Remove the key and refit the black cap.
Front left-hand door ►  Close the doors and check from the outside
that the vehicle is locked. ►  From inside the vehicle, insert a small
►  Insert the key into the door lock.
screwdriver into hole A on the lock to unlock the
►  Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle Side-hinged doors tailgate.
to lock it, or towards the front to unlock it.
Unlocking ►  Move the latch to the left.
Front passenger door and sliding ►  Use the interior opening handle.
If the fault persists after closing again,
Locking
side door the tailgate will remain locked.
►  If fitted to your vehicle, check that the electric
Unlocking child lock is not on.
►  Pull the interior door opening handle.
Locking
►  Open the left-hand side-hinged door. Changing the battery
►  Open the door. If the battery is flat, this warning lamp
►  For the side door, check that the child lock is comes on, accompanied by an audible
not on. Refer to the corresponding section. signal and the display of a message.

►  Insert the key into the latch aperture on the

edge of the door (without forcing it) and slide the
assembly upwards.
Front passenger door
►  Remove the key.

36
 Access

Battery type: CR2032/3 volts.

Without Keyless Entry and Starting
located in the corner, then clip the cover onto
the unit.
►  Immediately press the closed padlock button
for a few seconds. 2
►  Reinitialise the remote control. ►  Switch off the ignition and remove the key
For more information on Reinitialising the from the ignition switch.
remote control, refer to the corresponding The remote control is now fully operational
section. again.

Do not throw remote control batteries With Keyless Entry and Starting
away, as they contain metals that are
harmful to the environment. Take them to an
approved disposal point.

Reinitialising the remote

control
With Keyless Entry and Starting Following replacement of the battery or in
the event of a fault, it may be necessary to
reinitialise the remote control.

Without Keyless Entry and Starting ►  Insert the mechanical key (incorporated into
the remote control) into the lock to open the
vehicle.
►  Place the electronic key against the back-up
reader on the steering column and hold it there
until the ignition is switched on.
►  With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever
in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal.
►  With an automatic gearbox or drive
►  Unclip the cover by inserting a small selector, while in mode P, depress the brake
screwdriver in the slot and lift the cover. pedal.
►  Remove the flat battery from its housing. ►  Switch on the ignition by pressing the
►  Put the new battery in place, respecting the "START/STOP" button.
polarity. Start by inserting it into the contacts ►  Switch the ignition off.
►  Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on).

37
 Access

If the fault persists after reinitialisation, contact a ►  After deadlocking, you must use the When the tailgate or side-hinged doors are
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without remote control, the "Keyless Entry and open, only the other doors are locked (the
delay. Starting" system or the built-in key to unlock button does not light up).
the vehicle.

Central locking Automatic (anti-intrusion

Driving with the doors locked makes
access for the emergency services more security)
difficult in an emergency. The doors and the tailgate or the side-hinged
doors can lock automatically while driving (speed
above 6 mph (10 km/h)).
To deactivate/reactivate this function (activated
by default):
►  Press the button until an audible signal is
When transporting an oversized load
heard and/or a message appears on the screen.
(tailgate or side-hinged doors open),

Manual
press the button to lock only the cab doors. Locking/unlocking the
►  Press this button to lock/unlock the vehicle loading area
(doors, tailgate or side-hinged doors) from inside
the vehicle.
The indicator lamp comes on to confirm the
central locking of the vehicle. When transporting an oversized load
(tailgate or side-hinged doors open),
Central locking does not take place if any
press the button to lock only the front and rear
of the doors are open.
doors (sliding side door).

When locking/deadlocking from the

When locking from inside, the door
outside
mirrors do not fold.
When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked
Central locking from the inside does not
from the outside, the indicator lamp flashes
operate if one of the doors is open (indicated
and the button is deactivated. This button is unavailable if the vehicle
by a mechanical noise coming from the
►  After normal locking, pull one of the has been locked or deadlocked from
locks).
interior door controls to unlock the vehicle. outside (using the key, remote control or

38
 Access

Keyless Entry and Starting, depending on

equipment) or if any of the doors are still
Electric sliding side
door(s)
►  With the door unlocked, press and
hold this button until the corresponding 2
open. sliding side door has opened.
The exterior and interior door handles and the ►  Press this button again to reverse the
interior buttons allow the electrically powered direction of the door's movement.
Automatic
movement of the door to be started. The remote control buttons are not active
The loading area is always locked when driving.
Opening and closing of the doors is with the ignition switched on.
To deactivate this automatic locking, go accompanied by an audible signal.
to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified With the button(s) on the door pillar
workshop. Opening
With the exterior or interior handle
Manual
►  With complete unlocking activated,
press this button to lock (indicator lamp
comes on)/unlock (indicator lamp goes off) the
vehicle.
►  With selective unlocking activated, press this
button to lock (indicator lamp comes on)/unlock ►  With the door unlocked, pull and release the
(indicator lamp goes off) the loading area. handle to start opening the door. Pull the handle
Driving with the doors locked could make again to reverse the direction of the door's
it more difficult for the emergency movement. With the button(s) at the front
services to enter the vehicle in an emergency. With the remote control

The indicator lamp goes off when

unlocking one or more doors of the
loading area.
With the ignition off and the vehicle fully
locked, the indicator lamp goes off for energy
economy reasons.
►  With total unlocking activated and the child
lock deactivated, to unlock the vehicle and start

39
 Access

opening a door, press the button corresponding The remote control buttons are not active The button(s) at the front or on the door
to the door you wish to open. with the ignition switched on. pillar is not operational and pressing it
►  With selective unlocking activated, to unlock results in an audible signal, if:
only the loading area and start opening a door, With the button(s) on the door pillar –  the vehicle is moving,
press the button corresponding to the door you –  the child lock is on (activated) (for the
wish to open. buttons on the door pillars),
►  In both cases, pressing the button again –  the vehicle has been locked or deadlocked
reverses the direction of the door's movement. from outside (using the key, remote control
or Keyless Entry and Starting, depending on
Closing equipment).
With the exterior handle The button for the left-hand door is not
operational and pressing it results in an
audible signal if the fuel filler flap is open.

With the button(s) at the front

General
recommendations for the
sliding side doors
Doors must only be operated when the
vehicle is stationary.
For your safety and that of your passengers,
►  Pull and release the handle to start closing as well as for correct operation of the doors,
the door. Pull the handle again to reverse the you are strongly advised not to drive with a
direction of the door's movement. ►  To start closing a door, press the door open.
With the remote control corresponding button for that door. Press again Always check that it is safe to operate the
to reverse the direction of the door's movement. door and in particular, be sure not to leave
►  Press and hold this button until the
children or animals near the door controls
sliding side door has closed. Pull the The button is not operational and without supervision.
handle again to reverse the direction of the pressing it results in an audible signal, if The audible warning, the lighting of the "door
door's movement. the speed of the vehicle is above 20 mph (30 open" warning lamp and the message on the
km/h). screen are there to remind you. Contact a

40
 Access

CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop if

you want to deactivate this warning.
Take care not to block the guide space
on the floor so that the door can slide
Doors and door clearances 2
Lock the vehicle when you use an automatic correctly.
car wash. For safety and functional reasons, do not
drive with the sliding side door open.
Before opening or closing and while
moving doors, ensure that no person, The electric controls are disabled in the
animal or object is in the door frame or any event of an impact. Manual opening and
other position that would block the desired closing remain possible.
movement, inside or outside the vehicle.
If this advice is not followed, injuries or While starting the engine, door When open, a door projects beyond the body.
damage may occur if any part of a person or movements are paused, resuming when Allow adequate clearance when parking
an object is trapped or caught. the engine is running. alongside walls, lamp-posts, high pavements,
Electrical door opening is disabled at speeds etc.
above 2 mph (3 km/h):
Depending on the engine fitted, if
–  However, if the vehicle started moving
the door is closed and an opening
while the doors were open, the speed must
request is issued in Stop mode of Stop &
be reduced below 19 mph (30 km/h) before
Start, the door will open slightly and then
they can be closed.
stop. In Start mode, the door will resume its
–  Any attempt to open a door electrically
movement when the engine re-starts.
using the interior handle while driving results
in it only being possible to open the door
To hold the sliding side door in the open
manually.
position, open the door fully to engage
–  This situation is accompanied by the
the latch (located at the bottom of the door). When open, a door never projects
audible warning, the lighting of the "door
open" warning lamp and the message on the beyond the rear bumper.
screen. To release the door and be able to
operate it again, it is necessary to stop the
vehicle.

41
 Access

Safety/Obstacle detection ►  Fully open the door(s) electrically. If your vehicle is on a slope, with the front of the
►  Close the door(s) electrically. vehicle facing down the slope, the door may not
with electric door(s) On completion of this procedure, electric stay open and may close violently with the risk
operation of the doors is restored. of injury.
However, if a problem persists following this
In the case of a steep slope, the door
procedure, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
may be driven by its own weight and as a
qualified workshop.
consequence may open or close violently.
On a steep slope There would not be time for action at the
electric controls to take effect.
There would not be time for the obstacle
detection system to react.
The obstacle detection system is triggered when Take care not to leave the vehicle on a
the moving door encounters an obstacle with a steep slope with the door(s) open without
certain level of physical resistance. If an obstacle supervision. If this advice is not followed,
is detected: injuries or damage may occur if a person or
–  while the door is closing, the door stops then an object is trapped or caught.
opens fully. It is possible to open and close the doors
–  while the door is opening, the door stops then electrically on slopes of up to a 20% gradient.
closes. If the vehicle is on a slope, with the front of the
–  twice in succession during a movement of the vehicle facing up the slope, open the door with
door, the door will no longer close electrically care. The door may open more quickly due to
(uninitialisation). the incline.
On a steep slope: a safety system slows down On a steep slope, guide the side door manually
the movement of the door. to help it to close.
In all cases, wait a few seconds before operating
the door (closing or opening).
Close the door manually for safety reasons.
Then reinitialise the door.

Reinitialising electric doors

If electrical operations no longer work:
►  Fully close the door(s) manually.

42
 Access

Hands-free sliding side

door(s)
positioned, so that you do not lose your
balance (rain, snow, ice, mud, etc.).
indicators flashing for a few seconds,
accompanied by an audible signal. 2
Take care not to touch the exhaust tailpipe The movement of the door is reversed if the
when making the movement with your foot - movement of the foot takes place during the
Opening/Closing risk of burns. manoeuvre.
If the vehicle is so equipped, the electric door
mirrors fold/unfold on locking/unlocking the
vehicle.

Automatic locking
The vehicle locks itself following the hands-free
closing of the sliding door.

If your vehicle is not fitted with an alarm,

locking is signalled by the fixed
illumination of the direction indicators for
With a movement of your foot while keeping the about two seconds.
►  Put your foot beneath the corner of the rear Depending on your version, the door mirrors
remote control on your person in the recognition
bumper, then move the foot at normal speed with fold at the same time.
zone A, the system unlocks and opens the
a sweeping side movement.
sliding side door or closes and locks it.
The sensor detects the foot approaching and
The remote control must be located at the rear
leaving and triggers the opening or closing of the Activation/Deactivation
of the vehicle, at least about 30 cm but no more
side door. With audio system or touch screen
than about 2 m from the vehicle.
Make the movement without interruption By default, hands-free access is activated.
The automatic locking after closing the
and do not repeat it immediately The "Hands-Free Tailgate Access"
door can be programmed in the vehicle
afterwards or several times. function or automatic vehicle
configuration menu.
If the door does not open, wait about 2 locking when the sliding door is closed is
seconds before trying again. activated and deactivated via the vehicle
Before making the movement with your Do not keep the foot in the air. configuration menu.
foot, ensure that you are steady and well
Confirmation that the door is going to
open or close is signalled by the direction

43
 Access

Malfunction –  A trailer is coupled or decoupled.

–  A bicycle carrier is installed or removed.
Side-hinged rear doors
An audible signal repeated three times while
–  Bicycles are loaded on to or unloaded from
using the function indicates a fault with the
the bicycle carrier.
system.
–  Something is deposited or lifted behind the
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
vehicle.
workshop to have the system checked.
–  An animal approaches the bumper,
If the "Hands-free tailgate access –  The vehicle is washed.
self-locking" option is selected in the –  The vehicle is being serviced.
vehicle menu and after closing the door, –  A wheel is changed.
check that the vehicle is properly locked. To avoid any sudden operation, keep the key
Locking will not take place: away from the detection zone (also from the
–  if the ignition is on, boot’s interior sides) or deactivate the function
–  if one of the doors or the tailgate is open, in the vehicle configuration menu. ►  After first opening the left-hand door, pull the
–  if a "Keyless Entry and Starting" remote lever A towards you to open the right-hand door.
control is inside the vehicle. Ensure that no person or object might
If a number of gestures with your foot have prevent the correct opening or closing of Closing
no effect, wait a few seconds before starting the doors. ►  First close the right-hand door, then the left-
again. Be aware of children when operating the hand door.
The system is automatically deactivated in doors.
heavy rain or with accumulations of snow. If the left-hand door is closed first, a
If it does not work, make sure that the buffer stop located on the edge of the
remote control is not exposed to a source of right-hand door prevents it closing.
electromagnetic interference (smartphone,
etc.).
Operation may be affected if using a
prosthetic leg.
This system may not work correctly if your
vehicle is fitted with a towbar.

The side door may open or close without

warning if: If the left-hand side-hinged door is not properly
–  Your vehicle is fitted with a towbar. closed, the "door open" warning lamp lights up

44
 Access

(the right-hand door is not detected). For more

information on the List of warning lamps and,
device required by legislation and regulations
in your country.
In the event of a malfunction or if you
experience difficulty opening or closing 2
in particular, the door open warning, refer to the the tailgate, have it checked by a CITROËN
corresponding section. dealer or a qualified workshop without delay,
to avoid the issue deteriorating and prevent
Opening to approximately any risk of the tailgate dropping, potentially
180° causing serious injury.

Tailgate rear screen

Tailgate The opening rear screen allows you to access
the rear of the vehicle directly, without having to
open the tailgate.
Opening
Opening

If fitted to your vehicle, a check strap system

allows the doors to be opened from about 90° to
about 180°. ►  After unlocking the vehicle, pull the handle,
►  Pull the yellow control when the door is open. then raise the tailgate.
The check strap will engage again automatically
on closing. Closing After unlocking the vehicle, press this control and
lift the rear screen to open it.
►  Lower the tailgate using the interior grab
When parked with the rear doors open to
90°, the doors will cover the rear lamps.
handle, then lock it.
If the tailgate is not properly closed, the "door
Closing
In order to warn other road users travelling in Close the rear screen by pressing the centre of
open" warning lamp comes on. For more
the same direction (who may not be aware the glass until it is fully closed.
information on the list of warning and indicator
that the vehicle is stationary) of the vehicle's If the tailgate rear screen is not properly closed,
lamps, and in particular the door open warning,
position, use a warning triangle or other the "door open" warning lamp comes on. For
refer to the corresponding section.
more information on the list of warning and

45
 Access

indicator lamps and in particular the door open Interior volumetric monitoring If your vehicle is fitted with Additional
warning, refer to the corresponding section. Heating / Ventilation, volumetric
The system only checks for any monitoring is not compatible with this system.
The tailgate and rear screen cannot both variation in volume in the cab. For more information on Additional Heating
be open at the same time, to avoid The alarm is triggered if / Ventilation, refer to the corresponding
damaging them. someone breaks a window section.
or enters the vehicle’s cab;
however it is not triggered if
Alarm someone enters the loading Locking the vehicle with full
(Depending on version) area. alarm system
The system checks for any Activation
variation in volume in the
►  Switch off the ignition and exit the vehicle.
passenger compartment.
►  Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the
The alarm is triggered if anyone
remote control or with the "Keyless Entry and
breaks a window, enters the
Starting" system.
passenger compartment or
When the monitoring system is active, the red
moves inside the vehicle.
indicator lamp in the button flashes once per
Self-protection function second and the direction indicators come on for
System which protects and provides a deterrent
about 2 seconds.
against theft and break-ins. The system checks for the putting out of service
The exterior perimeter monitoring is activated
of its components.
Exterior perimeter monitoring after 5 seconds and the interior volumetric
The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central
The system checks for opening of the vehicle. monitoring after 45 seconds.
control or the siren wiring is put out of service or
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a damaged. If an opening (door, tailgate/side-hinged
door, the boot or the bonnet, for example. doors or bonnet) is not properly closed,
For all work on the alarm system, contact
the vehicle is not locked, but the exterior
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
perimeter monitoring will be activated after 45
workshop.
seconds, at the same time as the interior
volumetric monitoring.

46
 Access

Deactivation
►  Press the remote control unlocking
Locking the vehicle
with exterior perimeter
Reactivating interior volumetric
monitoring
2
button. ►  Deactivate exterior perimeter monitoring by
or monitoring only unlocking the vehicle using the remote control or
►  Unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Entry and Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring to the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system.
Starting system. avoid the unwanted triggering of the alarm, in The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
The monitoring system is deactivated: the certain cases such as: ►  Reactivate the full alarm system by locking
indicator lamp in the button goes off and the –  Slightly open window. the vehicle using the remote control or the
direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds. –  Washing the vehicle. "Keyless Entry and Starting" system.
–  Changing a wheel. The red indicator lamp in the button once again
If the vehicle automatically locks itself
–  Towing the vehicle. flashes every second.
again (as happens if a door or the boot is
–  Transport on a ship or ferry.
not opened within 30 seconds of unlocking),
the monitoring system is automatically
Locking the vehicle without
Deactivating interior volumetric
reactivated.
monitoring
activating the alarm
►  Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
►  Switch off the ignition and within 10 seconds
(integral to the remote control) in the driver's
Triggering of the alarm press the alarm button until the indicator lamp is
door lock.
This is indicated by sounding of the siren on fixed.
and flashing of the direction indicators for 30 ►  Exit the vehicle.
►  Immediately lock the vehicle using the remote
Failure of the remote control
seconds.
To deactivate the monitoring functions:
The monitoring functions remain active until control or the "Keyless Entry and Starting"
►  unlock the vehicle using the key (integral to
the alarm has been triggered ten times in system.
the remote control) in the driver's door lock,
succession. Only exterior perimeter monitoring is activated;
►  Open the door; this sets off the alarm.
When the vehicle is unlocked, rapid flashing of the red indicator lamp in the button flashes every
►  Upon switching on the ignition the alarm
the indicator lamp in the button indicates that the second.
stops. The button indicator lamp goes off.
alarm was triggered during your absence. When To take effect, this deactivation must be
performed whenever the ignition is switched
the ignition is switched on, this flashing stops
off.
Malfunction
immediately.
When the ignition is switched on, the fixed
lighting of the red indicator lamp in the button
indicates a system malfunction.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.

47
 Access

Automatic activation the ignition is switched off if the front doors If an electric window meets an obstacle
are not open. during operation, the movement of the
(Depending on version)
After that time, the controls are disabled. To window must be reversed. To do this, press
The system is activated automatically 2 minutes
reactivate them, switch the ignition on again. the relevant switch.
after the last door or the boot is closed.
When the driver operates the passenger
►  To avoid triggering the alarm on entering the
electric window switch, it is important to
vehicle, first press the unlocking button on the Safety anti-pinch ensure that nothing can prevent the window
remote control or unlock the vehicle using the
If your vehicle is fitted with the safety anti-pinch from closing properly.
“Keyless Entry and Starting” system.
function, when the window rises and meets an Pay particular attention to children when
obstacle, it stops and partially lowers. operating windows.
Electric windows In the event of unwanted opening of the window
on closing, press the control until the window
opens completely. Within 4 seconds, pull the
control until the window closes.
The safety anti-pinch does not operate while
1. Left-hand electric window control. doing this.
2. Right-hand electric window control.
Reinitialising the electric
Operation windows
►  To open/close the window manually, press/ After reconnecting the battery, or in the event
pull the switch without passing the point of of abnormal window movement, the anti-pinch
resistance; the window stops as soon as the function must be reinitialised.
switch is released. The anti-pinch function is disabled during the
►  To open/close the window automatically, following sequence of operations.
press/pull the switch fully, beyond the point of For each window:
resistance; the window opens/closes completely ►  Lower the window fully, then raise it; it will
when the switch is released (pressing the switch rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the
again stops the movement of the window). control is pressed. Repeat the operation until the
window is fully closed.
The electric window controls remain ►  Continue to pull the control for at least one
operational for about 45 seconds after second after the window reaches the closed
position.

48
 Ease of use and comfort

Correct driving position

Before taking to the road and to make the most
Manually-adjusted front
seats
Height 3
of the ergonomic layout of the instruments and
controls, carry out these adjustments in the For more information on the Seat belts,
following order: refer to the corresponding section.
–  the height of the head restraint,
–  the seat backrest angle,
–  the seat cushion height,
Forwards-backwards ►  Pull the control upwards to raise the seat or
–  the longitudinal position of the seat, push it downwards to lower the seat, until the
–  the height and reach of the steering wheel, position required is obtained.
–  the rear view mirror and door mirrors.
Backrest angle

►  Raise the control bar and slide the seat

forwards or backwards.
►  Release the bar to lock the seat in position on
one of the notches.

Before moving the seat backwards, ►  Depending on equipment, turn the knob
ensure that there is nothing that might or pull the control all the way up and tilt the
prevent the full travel of the seat. backrest forwards or backwards to adjust it.
There is a risk of trapping or pinching
Once these adjustments have been passengers if present in the rear seats or Lumbar
made, check the instrument panel can be jamming the seat if large objects are placed
viewed correctly from your driving position. on the floor behind the seat.

►  Turn the knob manually to obtain the desired

level of lumbar support.

49
 Ease of use and comfort

Table position of the driver's Longitudinal

and/or the front passenger
seat backrest

On the front passenger side, this position allows ►  Push the control forwards or rearwards to
long objects to be carried. slide the seat.
On the driver's side, this position allows rear
passengers to be helped out of the vehicle (by ►  Pull the control fully up and tip the backrest Before moving the seat backwards,
the emergency services). forward. ensure that there is nothing that might
To return to the normal position, pull the control prevent the full travel of the seat.
Check that there is no object that could There is a risk of trapping or pinching
up to release the backrest, then pull the backrest
interfere with the movement of a seat, passengers if present in the rear seats or
up to its raised position.
both above and below. jamming the seat if large objects are placed
When sharp deceleration occurs, objects on the floor behind the seat.
►  Place the head restraint in the low position, placed on the folded backrest can turn
and if fitted to your vehicle, raise the armrest and into projectiles.
fold the table fitted to the back of the seat. Seat cushion height
We recommend deactivating the front
passenger airbag. Electric front seat
To avoid discharging the battery, carry
out these adjustments with the engine
running.
►  Tilt the control upwards or downwards to
For more information on the Seat belts, obtain the desired height.
refer to the corresponding section.

50
 Ease of use and comfort

Backrest angle ►  To put it back in place, engage the head

restraint rods in the openings keeping them in
If the vehicle is so equipped, a storage space is
provided under the seat. 3
line with the seat backrest. ►  Pull the strap towards you to tip the seat
►  To lower it, press the lug A and push down on cushion.
the head restraint at the same time.

The head restraint has a frame with Armrest

notches which prevents it from lowering;
►  Tilt the control forwards or rearwards to this is a safety device in case of impact.
adjust the angle of the backrest. The adjustment is correct when the upper
edge of the head restraint is level with the
top of the head.
Head restraint height Never drive with the head restraints removed;
adjustment they must be fitted and correctly adjusted.

2-seat front bench seat

If fitted in the vehicle, this is fixed and has a seat
belt built into the backrest for the seat next to the The armrest has notches.
driver’s seat. ►  Pull the armrest fully up
►  Lower it fully down.
For more information on the Seat belts,
►  Raise the armrest to the desired position.
refer to the corresponding section.

Under-seat storage
If fitted to your vehicle.
►  To raise it, pull it upwards as far as possible
(notch).
►  To remove it, press the lug A and pull it
upwards.

51
 Ease of use and comfort

Heated seats and bench Prolonged use of heated seats is not

recommended for people with sensitive
Electric lumbar
seat skin. adjustment
There is a risk of burns for people whose
perception of heat is impaired (illness, taking
medication, etc.).
To keep the heated pad intact and to prevent
a short circuit:
–  Do not place heavy or sharp objects on the
seat.
–  Do not kneel or stand on the seat.
–  Do not spill liquids onto the seat.
–  Never use the heating function if the seat
is damp.

►  Press the control to obtain the desired lumbar

Do not use the function when the seat support.
is not occupied.
Reduce the heating intensity as soon as
possible. Massage function
When the seat and passenger compartment
have reached a satisfactory temperature,
switch the function off; reducing electrical
consumption in turn decreases energy
If fitted to your vehicle. consumption.
►  With the engine running, use the adjustment
knob to switch on and select the level of heating
required from 0 (off) to 3 (high).

52
 Ease of use and comfort

This function provides lumbar massage; it only

operates when the engine is running as well as
Steering wheel
adjustment
into account in order to correctly judge the
distance of vehicles approaching from behind. 3
in STOP mode of the Stop & Start system.

Activation/Deactivation
►  Press this button to activate/deactivate
the function.
Upon activation, the indicator lamp comes on.
The massage function is activated for a period
of one hour.
During this time, massage is performed in
6 cycles of 10 minutes (6 minutes of massage
followed by a 4-minute break).
After one hour, the function is deactivated; the
indicator lamp goes off. ►  Move control A to the right or to the left to
►  When stationary, lower the control lever to
select the corresponding mirror.
release the steering wheel.
Adjustment of intensity ►  Adjust the height and reach.
►  Move control B in any of the four directions
to adjust.
►  Pull the control lever to lock the steering
►  Return control A to its central position.
wheel.

As a safety precaution, these operations Manual folding

must only be carried out while the vehicle The mirrors can be folded manually (parking
is stationary. obstruction, narrow garage, etc.).
►  Turn the mirror towards the vehicle.

Mirrors Electric folding

Depending on equipment, the mirrors can be
folded electrically, when the vehicle is parked.
Door mirrors
Press this button to adjust the intensity of ►  From the inside, with the
the massage. As a safety measure, the mirrors should ignition on, place control A in the
Two levels of massage are available. be adjusted to reduce the "blind spots". central position.
The objects that you see in the mirrors are ►  Pull control A backwards.
in fact closer than they appear. Take this

53
 Ease of use and comfort

►  Lock the vehicle from the outside. Rear view mirror

Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which
Electric unfolding
darkens the mirror glass and reduces the
The door mirrors are unfolded electrically when
nuisance to the driver caused by the sun,
the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control
headlamps of other vehicles, etc.
or key. Unless folding was selected with control
A, pull the control in the central position towards Day/night position
the rear again.

Folding/unfolding when locking/unlocking Once the removable flap has been

the vehicle can be deactivated. Contact a removed, you can load long objects
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. under the outer seat.
If necessary, the mirrors can be folded
manually.
Removable flap (type 1)
Heated mirrors ►  Pull the lever to change to the anti-dazzle
"night” position.
Removing the flap

►  Push the lever to change to the normal "day"

position.

Moduwork

►  Press this button.

The cushion of the bench seat's outer seat can
For more information on Rear screen be folded up against the backrest to create a
demisting/defrosting, refer to the loading area inside the cab.
corresponding section. A removable flap on the partition can be
removed to allow long objects to be loaded.

54
 Ease of use and comfort

►  While holding the flap with one hand, turn the

control at the top of the flap with the other hand
Removable flap (type 2) Never put your hand underneath the seat
cushion to guide it upwards, as your 3
to release it. fingers may become trapped.
►  Lower the flap to remove it from its housing. Always use only the strap.
►  Stow it behind the driver’s seat, clipping it into
the attachment lugs.
►  Turn the control at the top of the flap to
secure it.
Refitting the flap

►  To open or close the flap, slide it to the left

or right.
The flap is kept in the closed or open position
with magnets located at each end position.
When the outer seat is raised and the
Folding seat cushion flap is removed, you must install the
anti-slip net.
Raising the seat cushion
Refer to the Anti-slip net section.

►  Tilt the flap, with the yellow hinges pointing

downwards.
►  Insert the hinges into their housing then press
down fully (to avoid vibrations).
►  With one hand lift the flap to close it, then
with the other hand turn the control at the top of
the flap to secure it.

►  With one hand, firmly pull the strap forwards

to unlock the seat cushion.
►  A strut lifts the seat cushoin against the
backrest.

55
 Ease of use and comfort

Lowering the seat cushion Anti-slip net turn it a quarter turn (in a clockwise direction) to
lock it.
Installing the net ►  Put the second fastener into the lower cut-out
2, located on the seat base. Keep the fastener
pressed against the structure, then turn it a
quarter turn (in a clockwise direction) to lock it.

►  Secure the first hook to the ring 3 located in

the glove box.
►  Secure the second hook to the ring 4 located
on the floor.
Removing the net
►  Release the hooks from the rings 4 and 3.
►  Remove the lower fastener 2 then the upper
►  Remove the anti-slip net. fastener 1, turning them by a quarter turn
►  To reposition the seat cushion, press firmly backwards to unlock them.
on the top of the seat with one hand to lower the
seat cushion until it locks into the seat position. Make sure that the size, shape and
volume of the loads carried are
Ensure that there are no objects or feet compatible with the highway code and safety
obstructing the anchorage points or regulations and do not impair the driver’s field
preventing the assembly from locking of vision.
properly. All loads must be appropriately secured
►  Put the first fastener into the upper cut-out 1,
located beneath the folded seat cushion. Keep to prevent or minimise displacement and
the fastener pressed against the structure, then prevent injury.

56
 Ease of use and comfort

Install the anti-slip net (supplied with the

vehicle) every time that the seat is raised and
Central seat cushion
storage
3
the partition flap removed.
Never use the net for any other purposes.
Regularly check the condition of the anti-
slip net. As soon as signs of wear or tear
appear, contact a CITROËN dealer to have
it replaced by an anti-slip net that meets the
specifications required by CITROËN for the
vehicle.
Always fit the removable flap back into place
when you are not carrying any long loads.

"Rotating writing table" Never use the table while the vehicle is
If fitted to your vehicle, the central seat cushion being driven.
of the bench seat can be tilted to form a pivoting In the event of sudden braking or impact, any Precautions for the seats
writing table, thus creating a mobile desk (with
the vehicle stationary).
objects on the table might become dangerous
projectiles that could cause injury.
and bench seats
►  Pull the handle located at the top of the Do not remove a head restraint without storing it
backrest cushion. and securing it to a support.
Ensure that the passengers can always access
the seat belts and fasten them easily.
A passenger must not take their seat without
adjusting the seat's head restraint correctly and
adjusting and fastening their seat belt.

Ensure that no object or passenger feet

could obstruct the anchorage points or
prevent the correct latching of the assembly.

If removing and storing seats and bench

seats out of the vehicle, ensure that they
are placed in a clean area, so as to avoid

57
 Ease of use and comfort

introducing any foreign bodies into the The different equipment and settings described
mechanisms. hereafter vary according to the version and the
configuration of your vehicle.
The seats and bench seats are not
designed for any other use than in the
vehicle. They are equipped with mechanisms
and features that may be damaged if used
improperly or if dropped.

Loading luggage or objects

behind the row 3 seat and
The bench seat has a one-piece backrest that
bench seat may be fixed or foldable (table position).

For more information on the Seat belts,

When driving, it is prohibited to have a refer to the corresponding section.
passenger:
–  in rows 2 and 3, in the outer right-hand seat, if
the bench seat is in the fully folded position, Access to row 3
–  in the centre seat if the outer right-hand seat is
in the fully folded position,
–  in row 3 if the backrest in front (row 2) is in the
table position,
–  in row 3 if the seat/bench seat in front (row 2)
is in the fully folded position.
If you want to load luggage onto the backrests in
row 3 while in the table position, the backrests in
row 2 must also be in the table position. Fixed one-piece bench
seat
Combi, Business ►  Using the handle, release the rear feet then
tip the seat forward.

58
 Ease of use and comfort

►  To return the seat, tip the bench towards the

rear until the feet lock into place..
Tilting
►  If your vehicle has the facility, place the
3
It is not necessary to fold the backrest backrest in the table position.
(table position) to tip the bench seat for
access to row 3.

Folding the backrest to the

table position
►  Put the head restraints in the low position.
►  Release the front feet using the handles.
►  Disengage the bench seat from its
anchorages.
►  Remove the bench seat.
►  Using the handle, release the rear feet then
tip the seat forward. Refitting
►  To return the seat, tip the bench towards the ►  Check that there is no object obstructing the
rear until the feet lock into place.. anchorages and preventing the feet locking into
►  From the rear, lower the handle to release the
place.
backrest. Removing
►  From the front, raise the handle to release
►  If the vehicle is so equipped, place the
the backrest.
backrest in the table position.
►  Fold the backrest onto the cushion.
►  Tip the bench seat.
►  To return the backrest to its normal position,
raise the handle and pull the backrest up.

Do not leave objects (such as a bag or ►  Engage the front feet in the anchorages on
toys) on the cushion when folding the the floor (as shown above).
backrest.

59
 Ease of use and comfort

Check that the seat has correctly locked Access to row 3

on the floor when returned to the seating
(example for an individual seat)
position.

Fixed rear seat and bench

seat
Combi, Business

►  Lock the front feet using the handles.

►  Tip the bench seat backwards until the rear The different equipment and settings described
feet lock into place. hereafter vary according to the version and the
configuration of your vehicle. ►  Using the handle, release the rear feet then
Be careful of passengers' feet when
tip the seat forward.
tipping.
►  To return the seat to the normal position, tip
the seat backwards until the rear feet engage in
their anchorages.

It is not necessary to fold the backrest

(table position) to tip the bench seat and
so access row 3.

The seat has a backrest that may be fixed or Folding the backrest into
foldable (table position).
The bench seat has a one-piece backrest that the table position
may be fixed or foldable (table position). ►  Place the head restraints in the low position.

►  If the vehicle is so equipped, pull the control For more information on the Seat belts,
and raise the backrest (from the rear, lower the refer to the corresponding section.
handle).

60
 Ease of use and comfort

►  Remove the seat through the side door for

row 2 or from the rear for row 3. 3
Refitting
(example of an individual seat)
►  Check that there is no object obstructing the
anchorage points and preventing the feet locking
correctly into place.
►  From the rear, lower the lever to release the
backrest.
►  From the front, raise the lever to release the ►  Using the handle, release the rear feet then
backrest. tip the seat forward.
►  Fold the backrest onto the seat cushion. ►  To return the seat to the normal position,
►  To return the backrest to the normal position, unfold the seat backwards until the rear feet
raise the lever and pull the backrest up (from the engage in their anchorages. ►  Engage the front feet in the anchorage points
rear, lower the lever). on the floor (as shown above).

Do not leave objects (such as a bag or Removing

toys) on the seat cushion when folding (example of an individual seat)
the backrest. ►  Tip the seat.

Tilting
(example of an individual seat)
►  If your vehicle has the facility, place the
backrest in the table position.

►  Lock the front feet using the levers.

►  Tilt the seat towards the rear until the rear
feet lock into place.
Be careful of passengers' feet during the
►  Release the front feet using the handles.
manoeuvre.
►  Disengage the seat from its anchorages.

61
 Ease of use and comfort

►  Release the control when the desired position

is reached.

Moving forward or backward

(example for an individual seat)

The individual seat is always on the right and the

bench seat on the left (facing forward).
►  If fitted to your vehicle, pull the control and The seat has an independent backrest and the
raise the backrest (from the rear, lower the bench seat has two independent backrests.
lever). For more information on the Seat belts,
Check that the seat has correctly refer to the corresponding section.
engaged in its anchorage points on the
floor when returned to the sitting position. Adjusting the angle of the Two controls are provided for moving the seat
backrest forward and backward:
►  From the rear, pull the strap without going
Rear seat and bench seat The reclining backrest can be adjusted to several
beyond the point of resistance and push the seat
positions.
on rails forward or pull it backward.
►  From the front, raise the control and slide the
Feel, Shine, Business Lounge seat forward or backward.

Moving the seat along the

The different equipment and settings described full length of the rail
hereafter vary according to the version and the
configuration of your vehicle.

►  To recline the backrest, pull the control

upwards (from the rear, lower the handle).

62
 Ease of use and comfort

Do not leave objects (such as a bag or

toys) on the cushion when folding the 3
backrest.

Returning the backrest

to the normal position
(between the markings)
►  Place the seat backrest in the table position.
►  Slide the seat by pulling on the front control ►  Use the front control to move the seat so that
or rear strap. it is between the markings.

Folding the backrest to the Removing

table position (example of an individual seat)
(example for an individual seat) ►  Move the seat forward for access to the
►  Put the head restraints in the low position. strap.
►  Fold the backrest to the table position

To return the backrest to the normal position, the

►  From the rear, lower the handle to release the seat must be positioned between the markings.
backrest. The arrow must not be outside the markings. ►  From the rear, pull the strap fully to release
►  From the front, raise the handle to release the anchorages and tip the seat forwards to
the backrest. place it in the vertical position.
►  Fold the backrest onto the cushion. ►  Remove the seat through the side door for
row 2 or through the rear for row 3.

63
 Ease of use and comfort

Refitting ►  Check that nothing is obstructing the rails.

The individual seat is fitted with a three-point

inertia reel seat belt.
►  Place the front part of the guides on the rails. It can be placed facing forwards or facing
►  Tip the seat to align the rear of the guides in rearwards.
the rails.
►  Slide the seat forwards or backwards until it If there is an individual seat facing
Before refitting the seat or bench seat in
engages in the notches. rearwards in row 2, ensure that the seat
the vehicle, pull the strap fully to ensure
►  Raise the backrest. in row 1 (driver or passenger) is not set too
that the latching mechanism has engaged.
far back, in order to avoid contact between
Check that the seat has correctly locked the two seats.
on the floor when returned to the seating This could cause significant wear of the parts
position. which are in contact.

For more information on the Seat belts,

Individual rear seat(s) on refer to the corresponding section.
rails
Shine, Business Lounge
Armrest(s)
The armrest has notches.

The different equipment and settings described

Do not use the strap to lift the seat or hereafter vary according to the version and the
bench seat. configuration of your vehicle.
(example of an individual seat)

64
 Ease of use and comfort

Moving forward or backward interfering with the operation to fold the

backrest. 3
►  Put the head restraints in the low position.

►  Pull the armrest fully up.

►  Lower it fully.
►  Raise the armrest to the desired notched
position. ►  From the rear, lower the handle to release the
backrest.
Two controls are provided for moving the seat
Adjusting the angle of the forward and backward:
►  From the front, raise the handle to release
backrest ►  From the rear, pull the strap without going
the backrest.
►  Fold the backrest onto the cushion.
The backrest can be adjusted to several beyond the point of resistance and push the seat
forward or pull it backward.
positions.
►  From the front, raise the control and slide the
Removing
seat forward or backward. ►  Move the seat forwards for access to the
strap.
Folding the backrest to the ►  Fold the backrest to the table position.

table position

►  To recline the backrest, pull the control

upwards (from the rear, lower the handle). Ensure that nothing (examples: bag,
►  From the rear, pull the strap beyond the point
►  Release the control when the desired position case, toy, folding and sliding table) is
of resistance to release the anchorages and
is reached.

65
 Ease of use and comfort

tip the seat forwards to place it in the vertical Refitting

position.
►  Remove the seat through the side door for
row 2 or through the rear for row 3.

Changing the direction of

the seat
►  Fit the front part on the rails.
►  Tip the seat to align the rear of the guides in
the rails.
►  Slide the seat forwards or backwards until it
engages in the notches.
Before refitting the seat in the vehicle, ►  Raise the backrest.
pull the strap fully to ensure that the
Check that the seat has correctly locked
latching mechanism has engaged.
on the floor when returned to the seating
position.

When the seat is removed, your can rotate it by

180°. Fixed crew cab

The crew cab is made up of a fixed bench seat,

seat belts, storage compartments (depending
on equipment) and side windows. It is separated
from the loading area by a high-strength
Do not use the strap to lift the seat. partition.

Rear bench seat

►  Check that nothing is obstructing the rails.
This ergonomic bench seat has three seats.

66
 Ease of use and comfort

The two outer seats are fitted with ISOFIX

mountings.
Under seat cushion storage
wells
3
For more information on the ISOFIX
mountings, refer to the corresponding
section.

Storage compartment

Depending on the country of sale, the wells can

be dismantled and removed through the rear so
that bulky objects can be stowed underneath the
bench seat.

Do not attach anything to the cab fixing

structure.
Do not exceed the number of passengers
indicated on the registration certificate.
In the rear, the loading area is intended for
If applicable, a storage compartment is available
carrying goods only.
at the front, underneath the bench seat.
You are advised to place the goods or heavy
If the vehicle is so equipped, they are located objects as far forwards as possible in the
underneath the centre and outer left-hand seats. loading area (towards the cab) and secure
To gain access to it from the cab, tip the required them by means of straps using the stowing
seat forwards. rings on the floor.
The rear seat belt frames are not designed to
secure the load being carried.

67
 Ease of use and comfort

Folding crew cab ►  Using handle B, guide the movement of the

bench seat until it locks in the folded position.
Never put your hand underneath the
bench seat to guide it downwards, as you
could get your fingers trapped.
Bench seat position Ensure there are no objects or feet beneath
the bench seat or obstructing the anchorage
system, preventing the assembly from being
The crew cab has a folding bench seat, seat
correctly locked.
belts and side windows. It is separated from
the loading area by the bench seat by a high-
strength grille. Do not attach anything to the cab fixing
structure.
Folded position Do not exceed the number of passengers
indicated on the registration certificate.
In the rear, the load space is intended for
carrying goods only.
It is recommended to place goods or heavy
objects as far forwards as possible in the load
space (towards the cab) and secure them by
means of straps using the stowing rings on
the floor.
The rear seat belt frames are not designed to
secure the load being carried.

►  To put the bench seat back in place, pull the

strap C to unlock the bench seat, then release
the strap.
►  Then, using only the handle B, guide the
descent of the backrest to tip the assembly until
it locks in the bench seat position.

►  With just one hand, pull one of the straps A

upwards to fold the bench seat.

68
 Ease of use and comfort

Interior fittings To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:

–  Only use mats which are suited to the
Glove box
It houses the front passenger airbag deactivation
3
fixings already present in the vehicle; these
Mats fixings must be used.
switch and can hold a bottle of water, the
vehicle's handbook pack, etc.
–  Never fit one mat on top of another.
Fitting The use of mats not approved by CITROËN Never drive with the glove box (if
may interfere with access to the pedals and equipped) open when a passenger is
hinder the operation of the cruise control/ sitting at the front. It may cause injury during
speed limiter. sharp deceleration.
The approved mats have two fasteners
located underneath the seat.
Storage compartment
This can hold a bottle of water, the vehicle's
In row 2 and row 3 documentation, etc.

When fitting it on the driver's side, only use the

mountings present on the carpet.
The other mats are simply laid over the carpet.

Removing/refitting
►  To remove it on the driver's side, move
the seat as far back as possible and give the
fasteners a quarter turn.
►  To open the storage compartment, press the
left-hand end of the control and guide the lid to
its open position notch.
If your vehicle is so equipped, it is lit when the lid
Use the Velcro straps to attach the transverse
is opened.
mat in row 2 with the longitudinal mats in rows
►  To refit it, position the mat and replace the 2 and 3. When driving, keep the storage
fasteners, giving them a quarter turn. compartment closed. Otherwise, there is
►  Check that the mat is secured correctly.

69
 Ease of use and comfort

a risk of injury in the event of an accident or Any liquid which could spill risks causing For more information on the Front seats,
sudden braking. an electrical short circuit and therefore a and in particular placing the backrest in
potential fire. the "table" position, refer to the corresponding
section.
Front door storage pockets
"Aircraft" type tables
Liquids carried in an open vessel (e.g. a 12 V socket(s)
cup or mug) could be spilt, presenting a
Depending on version.
risk of damage on contact with the controls in
the dashboard and centre console. Be
careful. Fitted to the back of each front seat.

Upper glove box

This is located in the dashboard, behind the
steering wheel.

►  To use the table, lower it fully until it locks in

the low position.
►  To stow it, raise the table to the high position,
passing the point of resistance.

On the passenger side, do not forget to

Press the control to open the lid (depending on
fold the table up before placing the seat
version) then guide it to its fully open position.
in the "table" position.
To close it, guide the lid then press the centre
Do not place hard or heavy objects on
gently.
the table. They could become dangerous
projectiles in the event of emergency braking
or impact.

70
 Ease of use and comfort

USB socket For more information about how to use this

equipment, refer to the sections describing 3
the audio and telematics systems.

220 V socket

Depending on version, a 220 V/50 Hz socket

The socket can be used to connect a portable (maximum power: 150 W) is located underneath
►  To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum device or a USB memory stick. the front right-hand seat and therefore
power: 120 Watts), lift the cover and plug in a The socket reads audio files that are sent to your accessible from row 2.
suitable adapter. audio system to be played through the vehicle's This socket works with the engine running, as
speakers. well as in STOP mode of Stop & Start.
Observe the maximum power rating to These files can be managed using the steering-
avoid damaging the accessory. mounted controls or those on the audio system.
The USB socket also allows a
The connection of an electrical device smartphone to be connected by
not approved by CITROËN, such as a Android Auto® or CarPlay®, enabling certain
USB charger, may adversely affect the smartphone applications to be used on the touch
operation of vehicle electrical systems, screen.
causing faults such as poor radio reception or For best results, use a cable made or approved
interference with displays in the screens. by the device manufacturer.
These applications can be managed using the
steering-mounted controls or the audio system
controls.
►  Lift the cover.
When the USB socket is used, the ►  Check that the indicator lamp is on green.
portable device charges automatically. ►  Connect your multimedia or other electrical
While charging, a message is displayed if the device (telephone charger, laptop computer,
power drawn by the portable device exceeds CD-DVD player, bottle warmer, etc.).
the current supplied by the vehicle.

71
 Ease of use and comfort

In the event of a malfunction, the ►  To install it, insert the guides into their
green indicator lamp flashes. housings.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer
In the event of sudden deceleration,
or a qualified workshop.
objects placed on the load space cover
Connect only one device to the socket at can turn into projectiles.
a time (do not use an extension lead or
multi-socket) and only connect devices with
Class II insulation (indicated on the device). Loading area fittings
Do not use devices with metallic cases.

Stowing rings
If the power consumption becomes too
high and when required by the vehicle's
electrical system (particular weather
conditions, electrical overload, etc.), the
power supply to the socket will be cut off; the
Use the stowing rings on the rear floor to secure
green indicator lamp goes off
loads.
Use the stowing rings on the side panels to
Load space cover secure loads.
As a safety precaution in case of sharp braking,
we recommend placing heavy objects as far
forwards as possible (i.e. near the cab).
We recommend immobilising the load by firmly
securing it using the stowing rings present on
the floor.

Load retaining partition

►  To remove it, lift it up.

72
 Ease of use and comfort

If you are using a carrying system (roof

bars/roof rack), comply with the
cannot slide, tip over, fall or be thrown. To do
this, use only retaining straps that conform to 3
maximum loads associated with this system. current standards (DIN for example).
For more information on Roof bars/Roof For more information on putting straps in
rack, refer to the corresponding section. place, refer to the manufacturer’s user guide.
There must not be any empty space between
Make sure that the size, shape and the components of the load.
volume of the loads carried are To prevent the load sliding, there must not be
compatible with the highway code and safety any empty space between the load and the
regulations and do not impair the driver’s field panels of the vehicle.
of vision. As well as the straps, optimise the stability
of the load with stable handling equipment
(wedges, rigid blocks of wood or padding).
The load must be evenly distributed in
the loading area so as not to interfere
with driving the vehicle. When washing your vehicle, never clean
On the floor, behind the front seats, a vertical Place the load close to the side panels, or the inside directly using a water jet.
partition protects the driver and front passengers even push it against the side panels between
against the risk of load movement. the wheel arches.
Steel or glazed partitions separate the loading However, it is recommended that heavy Seating area fittings
area from the cab. objects are placed as close to the cab as
possible as a precaution in case of sharp
Recommendations on braking.
loading
Firmly secure all parts of the load using
The weight of the load must comply with the stowing rings on the floor of the
High load retaining net
the Gross Train Weight (GTW). loading area. This allows the use of the entire loading capacity,
For more information on Engine technical For more information on the Interior up to the roof:
data and towed loads, refer to the fittingsand in particular on the stowing rings, –  behind the front seats in row 1, when the rear
corresponding section. refer to the corresponding section. seats (and bench seats) in rows 2 and 3 are
folded or removed,
–  behind the rear seats (and bench seats) in row
To avoid the risk of injury or accident, the
2, when the rear seats (and bench seats) in row
load must be made stable so that it
3 are folded or removed.

73
 Ease of use and comfort

Upper fixings Fit the net

Unclip the upper fixing covers and secure the
lower fixings (as previously described).
►  Fold (table position) the seats and bench
seats in rows 2 and 3 (according to equipment).
►  Close the rear heating and air conditioning
vents (depending on the equipment you have).
►  Unroll the high load retaining net.
►  Position the net upper fixings in the
►  Unclip the anchorage cover in the roof on
corresponding anchorages in the roof (first one
each side.
side, then the other).
►  On each side in row 2, insert the fixings in the
►  Fully extend the straps.
Lower fixings (behind row 1) floor anchorages then turn them a quarter turn to
►  On each side, attach the bottom fixings of the
If your vehicle has fixed one-piece bench seats lock them in place (as shown above).
net to the lower anchorages (behind row 1) or in
or seats and bench seats: Place them as close as possible to the end of
the stowing rings (behind row 2).
the rail.
►  Tension the straps to extend the net.
Lower fixings (behind row 2) ►  Check that the net is attached securely and
properly extended.

Never use the ISOFIX ring provided for

fixing the strap of a child seat with Top
Tether.

Rear windows in row 2

If fitted to your vehicle, the side windows in row 2
can be opened.
►  On each side in row 2, insert the fixings in the
floor anchorages (as shown above).
If your vehicle has seats and bench seats or
individual seats on rails: ►  Use the stowing rings.

74
 Ease of use and comfort

Blinds 3
Opening/Closing

While driving, the windows must be closed or ►  Pull the tab A and attach the blind to the hook
secured at one of the notches. B.
►  Squeeze the two controls then move the
Always guide the blind slowly, using the
window sideways.
tab, when raising or lowering it.
For more information on the Child lock ►  Take one of the blinds by its grip and push it
on rear windows, refer to the back or pull it forwards to the desired position.
corresponding section. Panoramic sunroof
Retractable sliding table
Side blinds Shine, Business Lounge
Fitted to the windows in row 2, these protect the
passenger compartment from the sun's rays. This is fitted with two manual and independent
blinds, which improve thermal and acoustic
comfort.

75
 Ease of use and comfort

The storage space can only support a For the table to run smoothly, ensure that
maximum weight of 3 kg; do not exceed no objects are blocking the space used
this maximum load in use. by the runner on the floor.
Before manoeuvring the table, check that
there is nothing on the table.
Moving forward or backward
Unfolding

The table has a central storage space covered

by a lid. When deployed, this device becomes
a table with two table tops on which you can
place objects. The central part has two cup/
can holders and can also be used to hold small
objects (e.g. credit card, pen).
The assembly is mounted on a runner allowing it ►  Operate the control on the top and pull the
►  Lift the control (without going beyond the
to be positioned either in row 2 or row 3. table assembly up until it clicks into place.
point of resistance) and slide the assembly
►  Pull each table top fully up then pivot them on
Storage forwards or backwards.
each side into the horizontal position.
►  Release the control when it is in the desired
position.
►  Check that the table is secured on the runner.
Folding
If this is not the case, move the assembly slightly ►  Raise each table top, going beyond the point
to the next notch on the runner. of resistance, to the vertical position.
►  Push each table top down into its housing
You can move the table in both the open until it clicks into place.
and stowed position. However, to ensure
safety, it is advised that you handle the
assembly in the stowed position.
►  Slide back the cover for access to 11 litres of
storage space.

76
 Ease of use and comfort

Removal Changing the direction 3

►  Push the control then tip the table assembly

downward until it clicks into place.
►  Raise the control fully to release the With the table removed, you can turn it 180°.
Before stowing the table tops, check that
anchorages and tip the table assembly forward.
they are clear. Before tipping the Remove a seat to make this easier.
►  Remove the table assembly through the
assembly down, check that the two table tops
sliding door in row 2.
have clicked home in the low position and that
there is nothing in the cup holder area (such Check that there is nothing in the space
as a can or pen). around the runner on the floor, so that
Refitting
the table disengages cleanly. ►  Check that there is no object obstructing the
runner and preventing proper locking.
Cup holders
Two cups or cans and small objects (such as
a credit card, portable ashtray or pen) can be
carried in the middle of the unfolded table.

Liquids carried in an open vessel (a cup

or mug) could be spilt, presenting a risk.
Be careful.
Never use the table in this position while the
vehicle is being driven.

77
 Ease of use and comfort

►  Check that the control is in the upper position - risk of damaging the surface and starting a
(locking mechanism armed). If not, lift this control fire!
fully to arm the mechanism.
►  Place the front of the table on the runner. When the table is deployed, each table
►  Taking care not to interfere with the control, top can support a maximum of 10 kg. If
tip the assembly towards the rear until you hear you exceed the maximum weight limit, you
it lock into place. risk damaging part or all of the table.
►  Check that the assembly is fully locked into Never lift the table when it is between
the runner. If not, slide the assembly gently along individual seats; you risk damaging the table
the runner until it meets the next notch. tops.
Incorrect use of the table can cause
Check that the table is fully locked into
serious injury.
the runner - risk of injury in the event of
Never use the table in the open or deployed
an accident or sudden braking.
position while the vehicle is in motion. In the
►  Release the control until the guide locks into event of sudden braking, any object placed on
the runner. the table can become a projectile.
Ensure that the table is correctly stowed in
Be careful of passengers' feet when the low position before setting off.
manoeuvring the assembly. Never use the table tops as seats or lean on
them.
Storage off the runner A label attached to the side of the table
serves as a reminder of this.
If removing the table from the vehicle for
storage, ensure that it is placed in a
clean area, in order to avoid introducing any
foreign bodies into the mechanisms.
The table must be placed outside the vehicle,
on a flat and level surface, resting on the
Before moving the table or an individual
guide so as not to damage visible parts.
seat forwards or backwards, make sure
Never place hot objects such as that the seat's backrest is upright and the
Caution, when out of the vehicle, the table is stowed.
saucepans or frying pans on the table
table leans to the right or left when
placed on a surface.

78
 Ease of use and comfort

When towing the maximum load on a steep

gradient in high temperatures, switching off
passenger compartment clean (by reducing
allergic symptoms, unpleasant odours and 3
the air conditioning increases the available greasy deposits).
engine power, enhancing the towing capacity. ►  To ensure correct operation of the
air conditioning system, have it checked
Avoid driving for too long with the according to the recommendations in the
When stowing the table tops, never place ventilation off or with prolonged operation Maintenance and Warranty Guide.
your hand inside the slide area - risk of of interior air recirculation. Risk of misting and
trapping your fingers! Use the handle deterioration of the air quality!
provided.
If the interior temperature is very high
after the vehicle has stood for a long
Heating and Ventilation time in the sunshine, air the passenger
Contains R134A fluorinated
greenhouse gases
compartment for a few moments. Depending on version and country of sale, the
Advice Put the air flow control at a setting high air conditioning system may contain R134A
enough to quickly change the air in the fluorinated greenhouse gases. Gas capacity
Using the ventilation and air passenger compartment. 0.5 kg (+/- 0.025 kg), GWP index 1430 (CO2
conditioning system
equivalent: 0.715 t).
►  To ensure that air is distributed evenly,
Condensation created by the air
keep the external air intake grilles at the base
conditioning results in a discharge of Stop & Start
of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents, the
water underneath the vehicle. This is perfectly The heating and air conditioning systems
air outlets and the air extractor in the boot
normal. only work when the engine is running.
free from obstructions.
Temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start
►  Do not cover the sunshine sensor located
Servicing the ventilation and air system to maintain a comfortable temperature
on the dashboard; this sensor is used to
conditioning system in the passenger compartment.
regulate the automatic air conditioning
►  Ensure that the passenger compartment For more information on Stop & Start, refer
system.
filter is in good condition and have the filter to the corresponding section.
►  Operate the air conditioning system for at
elements replaced regularly.
least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice a month to
We recommend using a composite passenger ECO driving mode
keep it in perfect working order.
compartment filter. Thanks to its special active Selecting this mode reduces electrical
►  If the system does not produce cold air,
additive, this type of filter helps to purify the energy consumption, but restricts the
switch it off and contact a CITROËN dealer or
air breathed by the occupants and keep the performance of the heating and air
a qualified workshop.

79
 Ease of use and comfort

conditioning systems, although it does not resulting from the forward movement of the When the air conditioning is in operation, to
deactivate them. vehicle. cool the air more quickly, you can use interior
air recirculation for a few moments by pressing
button 4. Then restore the intake of exterior air.
Temperature
Heating ►  Turn the thumbwheel 1 from "LO" (cold) The air conditioning does not operate
to "HI" (hot) to adjust the temperature to your when the air flow adjustment is set to off.
requirements.
Switching the system off could result in
Air distribution discomfort (humidity, misting).
►  Pressing button 3 successively directs the air
Manual air conditioning flow towards:
–  windscreen, side windows and footwells, Dual-zone automatic air
The air conditioning system only operates with
the engine running.
– footwells,
–  central vents, side vents and footwells,
conditioning
–  windscreen, side windows, central vents, side
vents and footwells,
–  central and side vents,
–  windscreen and side windows (demisting or
1. Temperature. defrosting). 1. Temperature.
2. Air flow. 2. Air flow.
3. Air distribution. Air conditioning 3. Air distribution.
4. Interior air recirculation. With the engine running, the air conditioning is 4. Recirculation of interior air.
5. Air conditioning on/off. designed to operate effectively in all seasons, 5. Air conditioning on/off.
with the windows closed. 6. Automatic comfort mode.
Air flow It enables you to:
–  lower the temperature in summer,
7. Visibility programme.
►  Turn the thumbwheel 2 to obtain a 8. “Mono” function or Rear heating and air
–  enhance the effectiveness of the demisting conditioning on/off (depending on version).
comfortable air flow.
function in winter, above 3°C.
If you set the air flow control to the
minimum position (off), the temperature On/Off Automatic comfort mode
in the vehicle will no longer be controlled. A ►  Press button 5 to activate/deactivate the air ►  Press the "AUTO" button 6 to toggle the
slight air flow can still be felt however, conditioning system. mode.

80
 Ease of use and comfort

The active mode appears in the display screen,

as described below:
Temperature is no longer controlled. A slight air
flow can still be felt, however, resulting from the
exceed the minimum value 14 or the
maximum value 28. 3
Ensures soft, quiet operation by limiting forward movement of the vehicle. ►  Push button 1 down until "LO" is
air flow. ►  Press button 2 "+" to switch the system on displayed or up until "HI" is displayed.
Offers the best compromise between a again.
comfortable temperature and quiet
operation. Temperature "Mono" function
Provides dynamic, effective air flow. The driver and front passenger can each set the The comfort setting for the passenger's side
temperature to suit their preferences. can be indexed to the driver's comfort setting
The value shown on the display is a level (mono-zone).
When the engine is cold, the air flow will
of comfort, not a temperature in Celsius or
only increase to its optimum level
Fahrenheit.
gradually, to avoid distributing too much cold
►  Push button 1 down to decrease the value or ►  Press the corresponding button 8 to activate/
air.
up to increase it. deactivate the function.
In cold weather, it prioritises the distribution of
The indicator lamp in the button is on when the
warm air to the windscreen, the side windows A setting of around 21 provides optimum
function is activated.
and the footwells only. comfort. Depending on your
The function is deactivated automatically if a
requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is
passenger uses the temperature control.
normal.
Manual mode
It is possible to make a different choice from
In addition, we recommend avoiding left/right Rear heating - air
setting differences of more than 3.
that offered by the system by changing a conditioning
setting. The other functions will still be managed
On entering the vehicle, if the interior
automatically.
temperature is significantly colder or
As soon as a setting is changed, the "AUTO"
warmer than the comfort value setting, there ►  Press the corresponding button 8 to activate/
symbol disappears.
is no need to alter the value displayed in deactivate the function.
Deactivating the system order to reach the required level of comfort.
For more information, refer to the Rear
The system compensates automatically and
►  Press button 2 "-" until the fan symbol heating - air conditioning section.
corrects the temperature difference as quickly
disappears.
as possible.
This action switches off all of the functions of the
system.
For maximum cooling or heating of the
passenger compartment, it is possible to

81
 Ease of use and comfort

Visibility programme Switching the system off could result in ►  Press this button to activate/deactivate
discomfort (humidity, misting). the function (confirmed by the
►  Press button 7 "Visibility" to demist or
illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp).
defrost the windscreen and side windows more
quickly. Air distribution
The system automatically manages the air
►  Pressing button 3 successively directs the air Front demisting
conditioning, air flow and air intake, and provides
optimum distribution towards the windscreen and
flow towards: - defrosting
–  windscreen, side windows and footwells,
side windows. These markings on the control panel
– footwells,
►  Press button 7 "Visibility" again to stop the indicate the positioning of the controls for
–  central vents, side vents and footwells,
programme. rapid demisting or defrosting of the windscreen
–  windscreen, side windows, central vents, side
Or and side windows.
vents and footwells,
►  Press button 6 "AUTO" to return to the
–  central and side vents,
automatic comfort programme.
–  windscreen and side windows (demisting or
Heating or manual air
Air conditioning defrosting). conditioning
With the engine running, the air conditioning is Air flow
designed to operate effectively in all seasons,
►  Press the buttons 2 to increase/decrease the
with the windows closed.
air flow.
It is used to:
The air flow symbol (a fan) appears. It is filled in
–  lower the temperature in summer,
or emptied gradually, according to the value set.
–  increase the effectiveness of the demisting in
winter, above 3°C.
Interior air recirculation
On/Off
The intake of exterior air prevents the formation
►  Press button 5 to activate/deactivate the air of mist on the windscreen and side windows.
conditioning system. Recirculating the interior air isolates the
When the air conditioning is in operation, to passenger compartment from outside odours
cool the air more quickly, you can use interior and fumes and allows the desired passenger
air recirculation for a few moments by pressing compartment temperature to be achieved more
button 4. Then restore the intake of exterior air. rapidly. ►  Set the air flow, temperature and air
The air conditioning does not operate distribution controls to the appropriately marked
when the air flow adjustment is set to off. positions.

82
 Ease of use and comfort

►  For air conditioning, press this button;

its indicator lamp comes on.
Rear screen and/or door
mirror demisting/de-icing
Rear heating - air
conditioning
3
Dual-zone automatic air
conditioning

►  Press this button to switch on/off rear screen

and door mirror demisting/de-icing (depending
►  Press this button to demist or defrost on version).
the windscreen and side windows more The indicator lamp in the button comes on when
quickly. the function is activated.
The system automatically manages the air Demisting/de-icing switches off automatically to
conditioning, air flow and air intake, and provides prevent excessive power consumption.
optimum distribution towards the windscreen and
side windows. Switch off demisting/de-icing as soon
►  To turn it off, press this button as you no longer consider it necessary,
again or press "AUTO". as decreasing power consumption in turn
The system restarts with the values in use before reduces fuel consumption.
it was deactivated.
Demisting/de-icing only operates with the
engine running.

If your vehicle is fitted with a rear air conditioning

unit located in the roof, this system distributes
conditioned and heated air via a distribution rail
and individual outlets.

83
 Ease of use and comfort

Air flow Additional heating/ With a Bluetooth® audio system or a CITROËN

Connect Radio, use the remote control to start/
►  Turn the dial to increase or decrease
the air flow.
ventilation system stop the additional heating and/or adjust the pre-
heating times.
Comfort temperature With Bluetooth® audio system
–  Turn the thumbwheel from blue (cold)
to red (hot) to modulate the temperature
to your liking.
This control simultaneously adjusts the ►  Press the MENU button to access the
temperature and the location of the air delivery: main menu.
–  blue: the air is delivered mainly at roof level, ►  Select "Pre-heat. / Pre-ventil.".
–  red: the air is delivered mainly by the vent ►  Select "Activation" and, if necessary, for
located in row 3 on the right. Heating programming, “Parameters".
This is an additional and separate system which ►  Select "Heating" to heat the engine and
Activation/Deactivation heats the passenger compartment and improves passenger compartment or "Ventilation" to
defrosting performance. ventilate the passenger compartment.
This indicator lamp is lit while the system
is programmed or set in operation
remotely via the remote control.
It flashes during the whole duration of the
heating and goes off at the end of the heating ►  Select:
cycle or when stopped using the remote control. •  the first clock to set/save the time at which
the pre-heating temperature will be reached,
Depending on version, this button is accessible Ventilation •  the second clock to set/save a second time
at the front, from the dual-zone automatic air This system allows ventilation of the passenger at which the pre-heating temperature will be
conditioning control panel. compartment with exterior air to improve the reached,
►  Press this button to activate/deactivate temperature experienced on entering the vehicle
the operation of the rear controls. Using these two clocks and depending
in summer.
on the season you can, for example,
select one or the other start time.
Programming A message on the screen confirms your
With a CITROËN Connect Nav, use the remote choice.
control to start/stop the additional heating.

84
 Ease of use and comfort

With CITROËN Connect Radio

Press Connect-App to display the main
You must allow at least 60 minutes
between programming operations.
Switching off
►  Pressing and holding this button stops
3
page. the heating immediately (confirmed by the
Then press "Programmable heating/ Depending on the outside temperature, a temporary illumination of the red indicator lamp).
ventilation". certain amount of pre-conditioning time is The indicator lamp in the remote control flashes
►  Select the "Status" tab to activate/deactivate necessary in order to reach the programmed for about 2 seconds if the vehicle has not
the system. temperature by the stored activation time. received the signal.
►  Select the "Other settings" tab to choose This pre-conditioning time lasts up to 45 min. Then repeat the command after having changed
the "Heating" mode, to heat the engine and location.
passenger compartment, or "Ventilation" to
ventilate the passenger compartment.
Long-range remote control Changing the battery
►  Then set/save the time at which the This enables you to switch the heating in The indicator lamp in the remote control will
preheating temperature will be reached for each the passenger compartment on or off from a change to orange if the battery charge is low.
selection. distance. If the indicator lamp is not on, the battery is
Press this button to save. The remote control has a range of about 0.6 discharged.
miles (1 km) in open country.

With CITROËN Connect Nav

In the Applications > Vehicle
apps menu:
►  Select AIR CON programming.

►  Press the Status tab to activate/deactivate

the system.
►  Press the Settings tab to select Heating On
mode to heat the engine and passenger ►  Pressing and holding this button starts
compartment or Ventilation mode to ventilate the heating immediately (confirmed by the ►  Use a coin to unscrew the cap and replace
the passenger compartment. green indicator lamp coming on briefly). the battery.
►  Then programme/save the activation time for
each selection. Do not throw remote control batteries
►  Press OK to confirm. away, as they contain metals that are
harmful to the environment. Take them to an
approved disposal point.

85
 Ease of use and comfort

If the system is switched on using the workshop which is not equipped with an To avoid the risks of poisoning or
long-range remote control, the maximum exhaust gas extraction system. suffocation, the additional heating must
heating duration is around 45 min. Do not park the vehicle on a flammable not be used, even for short periods, in a
surface (dry grass, dead leaves, paper, etc.) closed environment such as a garage or
The ventilation is activated provided that - Risk of fire! workshop which is not equipped with an
the battery is sufficiently charged. exhaust gas extraction system.
The heating is activated provided that: Glazed surfaces such as the rear screen
–  the battery charge and the fuel level are or windscreen can become very hot in Do not park the vehicle on a flammable
sufficient, places. surface (for example: dry grass, fallen
–  the engine has been started since the Never put objects on these surfaces; never leaves, paper, etc.) - risk of fire!
previous heating cycle, touch these surfaces - Risk of burns!
–  60 minutes have elapsed between two Have the additional heating checked at
heating requests. least once a year, at the beginning of
Independent additional winter.
Programmable heating is supplied by the
vehicle fuel tank. Before use, make sure
heating For maintenance and repairs, you must only
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
that you have sufficient fuel. If the fuel tank is Depending on the country of sale, this is an workshop.
on reserve, you are strongly recommended additional and independent system which heats
not to programme the heating. the hot water circuit of the Diesel engine to
improve comfort and to raise the temperature
of the cold engine. It improves demisting and
A/C preconditioning
defrosting performance. With the engine idling (Electric)
or the vehicle stationary, it is normal to notice a This function allows you to programme the
The additional heating must always be
high-pitched whistling and some emissions of temperature in the passenger compartment to
switched off while refuelling to avoid any risk
smoke or odour. reach a pre-defined, non-modifiable temperature
of fire or explosion.
The temperature near the heating system must (approx. 21°C) before you enter the vehicle, on
not exceed 120°C. A higher temperature (e.g. in the days and at the times of your choice.
To avoid the risk of poisoning or a paint oven) could damage the components of This function is available when the vehicle is
asphyxia, the programmable heating electronic circuits. connected or not connected.
must not be used, even for short periods, in a The additional heating is supplied by the
closed environment such as a garage or vehicle's fuel tank. Make sure that the low fuel
warning lamp is not on.

86
 Ease of use and comfort

Programming
With Bluetooth® audio system
To optimise the driving range, we recommend
starting a programme while the vehicle is
Always lit, ignition on.
3
connected. Always off.
Temperature pre-conditioning is not available
with the Bluetooth® audio system. The fan noise that occurs during
With CITROËN Connect Radio or CITROËN temperature pre-conditioning is perfectly Front
Connect Nav normal.
Programming can be carried out from a
smartphone using the MyCitroën Operating conditions
application.
–  The function is only activated when the
For more information on the Remotely-operable
ignition is switched off and the vehicle
functions, refer to the corresponding section.
locked.
With CITROËN Connect Nav –  When the vehicle is not connected, the
In the Applications menu: function is only activated if the battery charge
level is greater than 50%.
Press "Car Apps" to display the applications –  When the vehicle is not connected and a
home page. recurring programme is active (e.g. from Monday
Select Temperature conditioning. to Friday), if two temperature pre-conditioning
sequences are run without the vehicle being
►  Press + to add a programme. used, the programme will be deactivated.
►  Select the time of entry into the vehicle and
the desired days. Press OK.
►  Press ON to activate this programme.
Courtesy lamp(s)
The temperature pre-conditioning sequence Front: comes on when one of the front or
begins approximately 45 minutes before the rear doors is opened (sliding side door
programmed time when the vehicle is connected and depending on equipment, left-hand
(20 minutes when it is not connected) and is side-hinged door or tailgate).
maintained for 10 minutes after. Rear or row 2 and row 3: comes on when one of
the rear doors is opened (sliding side door and
You can set multiple programmes. depending on equipment, left-hand side-hinged
Each one is saved in the system. door or tailgate).

87
 Ease of use and comfort

Individual reading lamp

If fitted to the vehicle, these are switched

on and off by means of a manual switch.
Automatic switching on/off With the ignition on, operate the corresponding
Rear The front courtesy lamp comes on when the key
switch.
is removed from the ignition switch. Take care not to put anything in contact
All courtesy lamps come on when the vehicle is with the courtesy lamp.
unlocked, when one of the corresponding doors
is opened and when locating the vehicle using
the remote control.
They fade to off after the ignition is switched on
and when the vehicle is locked.

Take care not to allow objects to come

into contact with the courtesy lamp.

88
 Lighting and visibility

Lighting control stalk Operation of the selected lighting is

confirmed by the illumination of the
►  Rotate the ring forwards/backwards to turn
it on/off. 4
corresponding indicator lamp. When the lighting is switched off automatically
Main lighting (with AUTO model), the foglamp and the dipped
beam headlamps will remain on.
Without AUTO lighting
Front foglamps/Rear foglamps
They operate with the sidelamps, dipped
or main beam headlamps on.

Lamps off (ignition off)/ With AUTO lighting

Daytime running lamps (engine running)
Automatic illumination of lamps/daytime
►  Rotate the ring forwards:
running lamps
•  once to switch on the front foglamps,
Sidelamps only
•  a second time to switch on the rear
foglamps.
Dipped or main beam headlamps
►  Turn in the opposite direction to switch off.
If the lighting is switched off automatically (with
Headlamp dipping Foglamps AUTO model) or the dipped beam headlamps
are switched off manually, the foglamps and
Rear foglamp sidelamps remain on.
It only works if the sidelamps are on. ►  Rotate the ring backwards to switch the
foglamps off; the sidelamps will then switch off.

Switching on the foglamps is prohibited

►  Pull the stalk to switch between dipped and in clear weather or in rain, both day and
main beam headlamps. night. In these situations, the power of their
In lamps off and sidelamps modes, pull the stalk beams may dazzle other drivers. They must
to switch the main beam headlamps on directly
("headlamp flash").

89
 Lighting and visibility

only be used in fog or falling snow (rules may Travelling abroad Daytime running lamps/
vary depending on country). If planning to use your vehicle in a
Do not forget to switch off the foglamps when country that drives on the other side of the
Sidelamps
they are no longer necessary. road, the dipped beam headlamps must be
adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming drivers.
Switching on the lamps after Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
switching off the ignition workshop.
To reactivate the lighting control, rotate the
ring to the "0" position - lamps off, then to the
desired position.
Direction indicators
If the driver's door is opened, a temporary
audible signal warns the driver that the lamps
are on.
They will go off automatically after a period
of time that depends on the level of charge in
If the vehicle is so equipped, they come on
the battery (entering energy economy mode).
automatically when the engine is started, when
the lighting control stalk is in position "0" or
Switching off of the lamps when the "AUTO".
ignition is switched off
When the ignition is switched off, all of the ►  Left or right: lower or raise the lighting control
stalk, beyond the point of resistance.
Automatic headlamp
lamps turn off immediately, except for dipped
beam headlamps if automatic guide-me-home
illumination
If you forget to cancel the direction
lighting is activated. When a low level of ambient light is detected
indicators for more than 20 seconds, the
by a sunshine sensor, the number plate
volume of the audible signal will increase if
lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps
In some weather conditions (e.g. low the speed is above 50 mph (80 km/h).
are switched on automatically, without any action
temperature or humidity), misting on the
on the part of the driver. They can also come
internal surface of the glass of the headlamps
Three flashes on if rain is detected, at the same time as the
and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear
►  Press briefly upwards or downwards, without automatic rain sensitive wipers.
after the lamps have been on for a few
going beyond the point of resistance; the As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient
minutes.
direction indicators will flash 3 times. level or after the windscreen wipers are switched
off, the lamps are switched off automatically.

90
 Lighting and visibility

Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction of the rain/sunshine
Guide-me-home and
welcome lighting
With audio system or touch screen
The activation, deactivation and
4
sensor, the vehicle’s lamps come on and this duration of guide-me-home lighting
warning lamp is displayed on the instrument are set in the vehicle configuration menu.
Guide-me-home lighting
panel, accompanied by an audible signal and/or
the display of a message. Manual Exterior welcome lighting
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a The remote operation of the lighting makes your
qualified workshop. approach to the vehicle easier in poor light. It
is activated when the lighting control is in the
Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor
"AUTO" position and the level of light detected
located at the top centre of the
by the sunshine sensor is low.
windscreen behind the interior rear view
mirror; the associated functions would no Switching on
longer be controlled.
Press this button on the remote control or
Switching on/off on one of the front door handles with the
In fog or snow, the rain/sunshine sensor
►  With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps "Keyless Entry and Starting" system.
may detect sufficient light. For this
using the lighting control stalk to switch the The dipped beam headlamps and sidelamps
reason, the lighting will not come on
function on or off. come on; your vehicle is also unlocked.
automatically.
Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off
Switching off
automatically at the end of a given period of
The inner surface of the windscreen may time. The exterior welcome lighting switches off
become misted up and affect the proper automatically after a set time, when the ignition
operation of the rain/sunshine sensor. Automatic is switched on or on locking the vehicle.
In humid and cold weather, demist the With the "Automatic illumination of lamps"
windscreen regularly. Programming
function activated (lighting control stalk in the
"AUTO" position) and when the light is poor, the With audio system or touch screen
dipped beam headlamps come on automatically
The activation, deactivation and
when the ignition is switched off.
duration of the welcome lighting
With the ring in the "AUTO" position and when
can be set via the vehicle configuration menu.
the light is poor, the dipped beam headlamps
come on automatically when the ignition is
switched off.

91
 Lighting and visibility

Cornering lighting Programming The system becomes operational when

the vehicle exceeds 16 mph (25 km/h).
This system makes use of the beam from a front With audio system or touch screen When the speed falls below 9 mph (15 km/h),
foglamp to illuminate the inside of a bend, when The system's settings are adjusted the function is no longer operational.
the main or dipped beam headlamps are on and via the vehicle configuration menu.
the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h)
(urban driving, winding road, junctions, parking Activation/Deactivation
manoeuvres). Automatic headlamp
dipping With/without audio system
When the ring is in the "AUTO” position, this
system automatically switches between dipped
and main beam headlamps according to the
lighting and traffic conditions, using a camera
located at the top of the windscreen.

Without/With cornering lighting

Switching on / off ►  To activate or deactivate the system, press

this button.
This system starts:
The indicator lamp in the button is on when the
–  when the corresponding direction indicator is
function is activated.
switched on.
or With touch screen
–  from a certain angle of rotation of the steering
The settings are adjusted via the vehicle
wheel.
configuration menu.
It becomes inactive:
►  Then put the lighting control stalk ring in the
–  below a certain angle of rotation of the
This system is a driving aid. "AUTO" or "Dipped/main beam position".
steering wheel.
–  above 25 mph (40 km/h). The driver remains responsible for
the vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the
Pause
–  when reverse gear is engaged.
prevailing conditions of light, visibility and If the situation requires a change of headlamp
traffic, and for observation of driving and beam, the driver can take over at any time.
vehicle regulations.

92
 Lighting and visibility

►  A "headlamp flash" pauses the

function and the lighting system switches
–  Vehicles whose lighting is obscured (for
example, vehicles driving behind a safety 4
to "automatic illumination of lamps" mode: barrier on a motorway).
–  If the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" indicator –  Vehicles at the top or bottom of a steep 0 Empty (initial setting)
lamps were on, the system changes to main slope, on winding roads, on crossroads. 1 Partial load
beam. 2 Medium load
–  If the "AUTO" and "Main beam" 3 Maximum authorised load
Clean the windscreen regularly,
indicator lamps were on, the system changes to 456 Not used
particularly the area in front of the
dipped beam. camera.
►  To reactivate the function, once again switch The internal surface of the windscreen can
the headlamps manually between dipped and also become misted around the camera.
main beam. In humid and cold weather, demist the
0 1 or 2 people in the front seats (initial
Flashing the headlamps does not windscreen regularly.
setting)
deactivate the system. Do not allow snow to accumulate on the
1 5 people
The state of the system is stored when the bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could
2 6 to 9 people
ignition is switched off. obstruct the detection camera.
3 Driver + maximum authorised load
4 5 6 Not used
The system may be disrupted or not work
correctly: Headlamp beam height
–  When visibility conditions are poor adjustment Interior ambient lighting
(snowfall, heavy rain, etc.).
–  If the windscreen in front of the camera is
dirty, misted or obscured (for example, by a
sticker).
–  If the vehicle is facing highly reflective The dimmed passenger compartment lighting
signs. improves visibility inside the vehicle when the
When the system detects thick fog, it light is poor.
temporarily deactivates the function.
The system is not able to detect:
Switching on
To avoid inconvenience to other road users, At night, the front roof lighting and panoramic
–  Road users that do not have their own
the height of the halogen headlamps must be roof lighting (if fitted to your vehicle) comes on
lighting, such as pedestrians.
adjusted according to the load in the vehicle.

93
 Lighting and visibility

automatically when the sidelamps are switched Without AUTO wiping Automatic wiping
on.
The ambient lighting switches off automatically Refer to the corresponding section.
when the sidelamps are switched off.
After switching off the ignition, a slight
Programming movement of the windscreen wipers to
store them under the bonnet may occur.
With audio system or touch screen
The activation, deactivation and If the ignition has been switched off with
the choice of brightness of the the windscreen wiper active, it is
ambience lighting can be set via the vehicle necessary to operate the control stalk to
configuration menu. reactivate the wiping when the ignition is
With AUTO wiping switched on (unless the ignition is off for less
Wiper control stalk than 1 minute).

Before operating the wipers in wintry Windscreen wash

conditions, clear any snow, ice or frost
►  Pull the wiper control stalk towards you and
from the windscreen, and from around the
hold.
wiper arms and blades.
The screenwash then the windscreen wipers
Windscreen wipers operate for a pre-determined time.
Do not operate the wipers on a dry ►  To select the wiping speed: raise or lower the
windscreen. In extremely hot or cold stalk to the desired position. With automatic air conditioning, any
weather, check that the wiper blades are not Fast wiping (heavy rain) action on the screenwash control results
stuck to the windscreen before operating the in temporary closure of the air intake to avoid
wipers. Normal wiping (moderate rain) odours inside the passenger compartment.

After using an automatic car wash, you Intermittent wiping (proportional to the To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do
may temporarily notice abnormal noises vehicle’s speed) not operate the screenwash if the
and poorer wiping performance.  You do not Off screenwash reservoir is empty.
need to replace the wiper blades. Only operate the screenwash if there is no
Single wipe (press down and release). risk of the fluid freezing on the windscreen
and hindering visibility. During the winter
or period, use "very cold climate" rated products.

94
 Lighting and visibility

Never top up with water. A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has
been accepted.
Rear wiper 4
This indicator lamp lights up on the
Low screenwash fluid level
instrument panel, accompanied by a
When the low level of the reservoir is message.
reached, this warning lamp lights up on
the instrument panel, accompanied by an Switching off
audible signal and a message. ►  Give the control stalk another brief push Off.
It comes on when the ignition is switched on, downwards or place the control stalk in another
or every time the stalk is operated, until the position (Int, 1 or 2). Intermittent wipe.
reservoir is refilled. This indicator lamp goes off in the
Refill the screenwash reservoir (or have it instrument panel, accompanied by a Wash-wipe (set duration).
refilled) the next time you stop. message.

Automatic windscreen If the ignition has been off for more than Reverse gear
one minute, the automatic wipers must
wipers be reactivated by pushing the control stalk
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
In AUTO mode, the windscreen wipers work will come into operation automatically if the
downwards.
automatically and adapt to the intensity of the windscreen wipers are operating.
rain.
Malfunction Activation/Deactivation
The rainfall detection function uses a rain/
sunshine sensor located at the top centre of the If a fault occurs with the automatic wipers, the With audio system or touch screen
windscreen, behind the rear view mirror. wipers operate in intermittent mode. The system's settings are adjusted
Have them checked by a CITROËN dealer or a via the vehicle configuration menu.
Switching on qualified workshop.
This function is activated by default.
Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor.
When using an automatic car wash,
switch off the automatic wipers and the
In the event of accumulation of snow or
ignition.
hard frost or if a bicycle carrier is fitted to
In winter, wait until the windscreen is
the tailgate, deactivate the automatic rear
completely clear of ice before activating the
►  Give a short downwards push to the control wiper via the vehicle configuration menu.
automatic wipers.
stalk.

95
 Lighting and visibility

Rear screenwash Before removing a windscreen wiper blade Changing a wiper blade
►  Turn the ring all the way towards the
dashboard and hold. Removing / Refitting at the front
The screenwash and the wiper operate for as
long as the ring remains turned.
A final wiping cycle is performed when
screenwashing ends.

Special position of the

windscreen wipers
This maintenance position is used while cleaning
or replacing the wiper blades. It can also be
useful, in wintry weather (ice, snow), to release ►  Operating the wiper control stalk within one
the wiper blades from the windscreen. minute after switching off the ignition will place
the wiper blades in a vertical position. ►  Carry out these wiper blade replacement
To maintain the effectiveness of the flat ►  Proceed with the desired operation or the operations from the driver's side.
wiper blades, it is advisable to: replacement of the wiper blades. ►  Starting with the wiper blade farthest from
–  handle them with care. you, hold each arm by the rigid section and raise
After refitting a windscreen wiper blade
–  clean them regularly using soapy water. it as far as possible.
–  avoid using them to hold cardboard on the ►  To return the wiper blades to their initial
windscreen. position, switch on the ignition and operate the Take care not to hold the arms at the jet
–  replace them at the first signs of wear. wiper control stalk. locations.
Do not touch the wiper blades. Risk of
irreparable deformation.
Do not release them while moving them. Risk
of damaging the windscreen!

►  Clean the windscreen using screenwash

fluid.

Do not apply "Rain X" type water-

repellent products.

96
 Lighting and visibility

►  Unclip the worn wiper blade closest to you

and remove it. 4
►  Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the
arm.
►  Repeat the procedure for the other wiper
blade.
►  Starting with the wiper blade closest to you,
once again hold each arm by the rigid section,
then guide it carefully onto the windscreen.

Removing/refitting at the rear

►  Hold the arm by the rigid section and raise it
as far as possible.
►  Clean the rear screen using screenwash
fluid.
►  Unclip the worn wiper blade and remove it.
►  Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the
arm.
►  Once again hold the arm by the rigid section,
then guide it carefully onto the rear screen.

97
 Safety

General safety CITROËN dealers or qualified workshops,

equipped with the special tools required (risk
Hazard warning lamps
recommendations of malfunctions of the vehicle's electronic
systems that could cause breakdowns or
Do not remove the labels attached in serious accidents). The Manufacturer cannot
different places on your vehicle. They be held responsible if this advice is not
include safety warnings as well as followed.
identification information for the vehicle. –  Any modification or adaptation not intended
or authorised by CITROËN or carried out
For all work on your vehicle, use a without meeting the technical requirements ►  Pressing the red button causes all the
qualified workshop that has the technical defined by the Manufacturer will result in the direction indicators to flash.
information, skills and equipment required, all suspension of the commercial warranty. They can operate with the ignition off.
of which a CITROËN dealer is able to
provide. Installation of accessory radio Automatic operation of
communication transmitters hazard warning lamps
Depending on country regulations, Before installing a radio communication When braking in an emergency, depending on
certain safety equipment may be transmitter with an external aerial, you must the rate of deceleration, the hazard warning
mandatory: high visibility safety vests, without fail contact a CITROËN dealer for lamps come on automatically. They switch off
warning triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs, the specification of transmitters which can automatically when you next accelerate.
spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial They can be turned off by pressing the button
flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc. position, specific installation requirements), again.
in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic
Installing electrical accessories: Compatibility Directive (2004/104/EC).
–  The fitting of electrical equipment or
accessories not approved by CITROËN may Declarations of conformity for radio
cause excessive current consumption and equipment
faults and failures with the electrical system The relevant certificates are available on the
of your vehicle. Contact a CITROËN dealer [Link] website.
for information on the range of approved
accessories.
–  As a safety measure, access to the
diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's
electronic systems, is reserved strictly for

98
 Safety

Emergency or assistance
call
If an impact is detected by the airbag
control unit, an emergency call is made
protection of personal information established
by Regulation 2016/679 (GDPR) and 5
automatically, independently of the Directive 2002/58/EC of the European
deployment of any airbags. Parliament and the Council, and in particular,
seeks to protect the vital interests of the
‘Localised Emergency Call’ is a service data subject, in accordance with Article 6.1,
that can be accessed free of charge. paragraph d) of Regulation 2016/679.
Personal information processing is strictly
limited to the management of the "Localised
System operation Emergency Call" system used with the “112”
–  Upon switching on the ignition, if the indicator European single emergency call number.
lamp lights up red, then green, and then goes The "Localised Emergency Call" system is
out: the system is operating correctly. able to collect and process only the following
Localised Emergency Call –  If the indicator lamp is fixed red: system data relating to the vehicle: chassis number,
(PE112) malfunction type (passenger vehicle or light commercial
–  If the indicator lamp flashes red: replace the vehicle), fuel type or power source, most
►  In an emergency, press button 1 for more
emergency battery. recent three locations and direction of travel,
than 2 seconds.
In the latter two cases, emergency and and a timestamped log file recording the
The lighting of the indicator lamp and a voice
assistance call services may not work. automatic activation of the system.
message confirm that the call has been made to
Contact a dealer or a qualified repairer as soon The recipients of the processed data are the
the emergency services*.
as possible. emergency call handling centres designated
‘Localised Emergency Call’ immediately locates
by the relevant national authorities in the
your vehicle and puts you in contact with the The system fault does not prevent the
territory in which they are located, enabling
appropriate emergency services**. vehicle from being driven.
priority reception and handling of calls to the
►  Pressing again immediately cancels the
“112” emergency number.
request. Data processing
The indicator lamp flashes when the vehicle All processing of personal information
data is sent, and then remains lit when Data storage
by the "Localised Emergency Call" system
communication is established. Data contained in the system’s memory
(PE112) complies with the framework for
is not accessible from outside the system until

* In accordance with the general conditions of use of the service, available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations.
** In areas covered by ‘Localised Emergency Call’ and ‘Localised Assistance Call’.
The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.

99
 Safety

a call is made. The system is not traceable Localised Assistance Call for customers, the Manufacturer reserves the
and is not continuously monitored in its right to carry out updates to the vehicle's
►  If the vehicle breaks down, press button 2
normal operating mode. on-board telematic system at any time.
for more than 2 seconds to request assistance
The data in the system's internal memory is
(confirmed by a voice message*).
automatically and continuously erased. Only If you benefit from the Citroën Connect
►  Pressing again immediately cancels the
the vehicle’s three most recent locations are Box offer with the SOS and Assistance
request.
stored. Pack included, there are additional services
When an emergency call is triggered, the data Privacy mode allows you to manage the available to you in your personal space, via
log is stored for no more than 13 hours. level of sharing (data and/or location) the website for your country.
between your vehicle and CITROËN. For information about the SOS and
Access to data It can be configured in the Settings menu on Assistance Pack, please refer to the general
You have the right to access the data the touch screen. conditions for these services.
and, if necessary, submit a request to By default, depending on equipment,
rectify, erase or restrict the processing of deactivate/reactivate geolocation by
any personal information not processed in simultaneously pressing the 2 buttons, then
press the "Localised Assistance Call" button
Horn
accordance with the provisions of Regulation
2016/679 (GDPR). Third parties to which data to confirm.
has been communicated shall be notified of
any rectification, erasure or restriction carried If you purchased your vehicle outside the
out in accordance with the aforementioned CITROËN dealer network, we invite you
Directive, unless doing so would be to have a dealer check the configuration of
impossible or require a disproportionate effort. these services and, if desired, modify them to
You also have the right to lodge a complaint suit your wishes. In a multilingual country,
with the relevant data protection authority. configuration is possible in the official national
language of your choice.

For technical reasons, in particular to

improve the quality of telematic services ►  Press the central part of the steering wheel.

* According to the geographic coverage of ‘Localised Emergency Call’, ‘Localised Assistance Call’ and the official national language chosen by the owner
of the vehicle.
The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.

100
 Safety

Pedestrian horn (Electric)

This system alerts pedestrians that the vehicle is
Anti-lock braking system
(ABS)/Electronic brake force
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off
the ignition. 5
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
approaching. distribution (EBFD) workshop.
The pedestrian horn operates once the vehicle
These systems enhance the vehicle’s stability When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
is moving and at speeds of up to 19 mph
and handling during braking, and enable greater ensure that these are approved for your
(30 km/h), in forward or reverse gear.
control while cornering, particularly on poor or vehicle.
This function cannot be deactivated.
slippery road surfaces.
Malfunction ABS prevents wheel locking in the event of
After an impact
In the event of a malfunction, this warning emergency braking.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
lamp comes on on the instrument panel. Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)
a qualified workshop.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a manages overall braking pressure on each
qualified workshop. individual wheel.
►  When braking in an emergency, depress Emergency braking
Electronic stability control the pedal very firmly and maintain this
pressure.
assistance (EBA)
(ESC) The normal operation of the ABS may
In an emergency, this system enables you
to reach the optimum braking pressure more
The electronic stability control programme result in slight vibrations in the brake quickly and therefore reduce the stopping
includes the following systems: pedal. distance.
–  Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Electronic It is triggered in relation to the speed at which
brake force distribution (EBFD). This warning lamp comes on fixed in the
the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a
–  Emergency braking assistance (EBA). event of an ABS malfunction.
reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an
–  Anti-slip regulation (ASR). The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive
increase in braking efficiency.
–  Dynamic stability control (DSC). carefully at a moderate speed.
–  Intelligent traction control. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
–  Trailer stability assist (TSA).
This warning lamp, when lit together with / Dynamic stability control
the STOP and ABS warning lamps, (DSC)
accompanied by a message and an audible
Anti-slip regulation (or traction control) optimises
signal, indicates an EBFD malfunction.
traction by using engine braking and by applying
You must stop the vehicle.
the brakes on the driving wheels to avoid one

101
 Safety

or more wheels spinning. It also enhances the Deactivating using the touch screen accompanied by the display of a message and
vehicle's directional stability. In the "Driving/Vehicle" menu, deactivate an audible signal.
If there is a difference between the vehicle’s the ASR system. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
trajectory and the path desired by the driver, the A confirmation message is displayed and qualified workshop.
dynamic stability control system automatically this warning lamp on the instrument panel
ASR/DSC
uses engine braking and the brakes on one or comes on.
These systems enhance safety during
more wheels to return the vehicle to the desired The ASR system no longer acts on the operation
normal driving, but should not encourage
path, within the limits of the laws of physics. of the engine.
the driver to take extra risks or drive at high
These systems are activated automatically every Reactivating using the button or Advanced
speed.
time the vehicle is started. Grip Control
It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, snow,
These systems are activated in the event Press this button.
ice) that the risk of loss of grip increases. It
of a problem with grip or trajectory
is therefore important for your safety to keep
(confirmed by this warning lamp flashing on the Or
these systems activated in all conditions, and
instrument panel). Turn the thumbwheel to this position.
particularly in difficult conditions.
Deactivation/Reactivation Correct operation of these systems depends
The indicator lamp in the button or thumbwheel
on compliance with the manufacturer's
In exceptional conditions (moving a vehicle that goes off.
recommendations relating to the wheels
is bogged down in mud, stuck in snow, on loose Reactivating using the touch screen
(tyres and rims), braking and electronic
soil, etc.), it may prove useful to deactivate the In the "Driving/Vehicle" menu, activate
components, as well as the assembly and
DSC/ASR systems, so that the wheels can move the ASR system.
repair procedures provided by CITROËN
freely and regain grip. A confirmation message is displayed and
dealers.
However, it is recommended that the systems be this warning lamp on the instrument panel
In order to ensure that these systems remain
reactivated as soon as possible. goes off.
effective in wintry conditions, the use of snow
These systems are reactivated automatically
Only the ASR system can be deactivated or all-season tyres is recommended. All four
every time the ignition is switched off, or at
from the touch screen. wheels must be fitted with tyres approved for
speeds over 31 mph (50 km/h).
your vehicle.
Deactivating using the button or Advanced Below 31 mph (50 km/h), these systems must be
All tyre specifications are listed on the
Grip Control reactivated manually.
tyre/paint label. For more information
Press this button or turn the thumbwheel on Identification markings, refer to the
to this position.
Malfunction
corresponding section.
The indicator lamp in the button or thumbwheel In the event of a malfunction, this warning
comes on: the DSC/ASR systems no longer lamp comes on on the instrument panel,
have an effect on engine operation.

102
 Safety

Intelligent traction control

("Snow motion")
flashing of this warning lamp on the instrument
panel and the brake lamps coming on).
When driving on slippery or poor surfaces, the
system may not be able to prevent sudden 5
For information on weights and towed loads, trailer snaking.
Depending on version, the vehicle has a system refer to the Engine technical data and towed
to help with driving on snow: intelligent traction loads section or your vehicle’s registration
control.
This system detects situations of poor surface
certificate. Advanced Grip Control
To ensure safe driving with a Towing device,
grip that could make it difficult to move off (Depending on version)
refer to the corresponding section.
or make progress on deep fresh snow or A special, patented traction control system,
compacted snow. Malfunction which improves driveability on snow, mud and
In these situations, the system limits the amount sand.
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp lights
of wheel spin to provide the best traction and This system, optimised for operation in a range
up on the instrument panel, accompanied
trajectory control for the vehicle. of conditions, enables you to manoeuvre in most
by a message and an audible signal.
slippery conditions (encountered during normal
The use of snow tyres is strongly To continue towing a trailer, reduce speed and
passenger car use).
recommended on surfaces offering low drive carefully!
When combined with all-season Peak Mountain
levels of grip. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
Snow Flake tyres, this system offers a
qualified workshop.
compromise between safety, grip and driveability.
Trailer stability assist (TSA) The trailer stability control system
provides an extra safety feature under
The accelerator pedal should be pressed
sufficiently to allow the system to harness the
When towing, this system reduces the risk of the
normal driving conditions, when following the power of the engine. Operation at high engine
vehicle or trailer snaking.
recommendations for use of trailers and speeds is completely normal.
current legislation in force in your country. It A five-position selector knob allows you to
Operation
must not encourage the driver to take extra choose the setting best suited to the driving
The system is activated automatically when the
risks, such as using a trailer in unsuitable conditions encountered.
ignition is switched on.
conditions of operation (e.g. excessive load, An indicator lamp associated with each mode
The electronic stability control system (ESC)
exceeded nose weight, worn or under-inflated comes on, accompanied by the display of a
must not have any faults.
tyres, faulty braking system) or driving at message to confirm your choice.
The vehicle speed must be between 37 and 99
excessive speed.
mph (60 and 160 km/h).
In certain cases, the system may not detect
If the system detects that the trailer is
trailer snaking, particularly with a light trailer.
snaking, it applies the brakes to stabilise
the trailer and reduces engine power, if
necessary, to slow the vehicle (indicated by the

103
 Safety

Operating modes regain grip. At the same time, the wheel with the occasionally drive on other less passable
most grip is controlled in such a way as to terrain.
transmit as much torque as possible. However, it does not permit off-road driving
When moving, the system optimises wheel spin such as:
to respond to the driver's requirements as fully –  crossing and driving on terrain which
as possible. could damage the underbody or strip away
(mode active up to 31 mph (50 km/h)) components (fuel pipe, fuel cooler, etc.) due
to obstacles or stones in particular,
Sand –  driving on terrain with steep gradients and
This mode allows little spin on the two poor grip,
driving wheels at the same time to allow –  crossing a stream.
the vehicle to move forward and limit the risks of
getting stuck in the sand.
(mode active up to 75 mph (120 km/h)) Seat belts
Standard (ESC) Do not use the other modes on sand as Inertia reel
This mode is calibrated for a low level of the vehicle may become stuck. The seat belts are equipped with an inertia reel
wheel spin, based on the different levels which allows the strap length to automatically
You can deactivate the ASR and DSC
of grip normally encountered on the road. adjust to your shape. The seat belt returns to its
systems by turning the knob to the "OFF"
storage automatically when it is not used.
Whenever the ignition is switched off, the position.
The inertia reels are fitted with a device which
system automatically resets to this mode. automatically locks the strap in the event of a
The ASR and DSC systems will no
longer act on the operation of the engine collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls
Snow or of the brakes in the event of a change of over. It can be released by pulling the strap firmly
trajectory. and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly.
This mode adapts its strategy to the
These systems are reactivated automatically Pyrotechnic pretensioning
conditions of grip encountered for each of
from 31 mph (50 km/h) and whenever the This system improves safety in the event of a
the two front wheels on moving off.
ignition is switched on. frontal or side impact.
(mode active up to 50 mph (80 km/h))
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
All terrain (mud, damp grass, etc.) Recommendations pyrotechnic pretensioning system instantly
Your vehicle is designed principally to tightens the seat belts against the body of the
This mode, when moving off, allows
drive on tarmac roads but it allows you to occupants.
considerable spin on the wheel with the
least grip to optimise clearing of the mud and to

104
 Safety

The pyrotechnic pretensioning seat belts are

enabled when the ignition is on.
Front seat belts The force limiting system reduces the pressure
of the seat belt on the chest of the occupant, 5
Force limiter thus improving their protection.
This system reduces the pressure of the seat
belt on the chest of the occupant, thus improving Locking
their protection.

In the event of an impact

Depending on the nature and
seriousness of the impacts, the pyrotechnic
device may trigger before and independently
of airbag deployment. Deployment of the
pretensioners is accompanied by a slight
discharge of harmless smoke and a noise,
due to the activation of the pyrotechnic
cartridge incorporated in the system.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes
on. ►  Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the
Following an impact, have the seat belt buckle.
system checked, and if necessary replaced, ►  Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified by pulling the strap.
workshop. The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic
pretensioning system and a force limiting Unfastening
system. ►  Press the red button on the buckle.
This system improves safety in the front seats in ►  Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
the event of a front or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
pyrotechnic pretensioning system instantly
tightens the seat belts against the body of the
occupants.
The pyrotechnic pretensioning seat belts are
enabled when the ignition is on.

105
 Safety

Height adjustment If your vehicle is fitted with a front bench seat, For rows 2 and 3, connect each seat belt
ensure that each belt is used with its correct to its correct buckle.
buckle. Do not interchange the belts or buckles for
Do not interchange the driver's seat belt or the outer seats with the belt or buckle for the
buckle with the centre seat belt or buckle. centre seat.
When folding the side seats or placing the
Rear seat belts backrests in the table position, avoid trapping
the belt for the centre seat.
After folding or moving a rear seat or bench
seat, ensure that the seat belt has reeled
in correctly and that the buckle is ready to
receive the belt tongue.
When removing/repositioning the outer seats
►  To lower the attachment point, while moving
or when accessing row 3, avoid trapping the
control A downwards, slide the assembly down
centre belt.
to the desired position.
►  To raise the attachment point, slide the
assembly up to the desired position. With individual seats
The upper part of the diagonal strap Shine, Business Lounge
should lie across the shoulder.
A 3-seat bench seat (one-piece or split 1/3 seat
- 2/3 bench seat) is fitted with three-point seat
2-seat front bench seat belts and inertia reels on the outer seats.
The centre seat has a seat belt guide and inertia
reel fitted into the seat backrest.
The seat belt inertia reels for the outer seats in
row 2 are fitted with force limiters.
The seats in row 3 have three-point seat belts
with inertia reels.

They are fitted with three-point seat belts

with guides and belt inertia reels built into the
backrests.

106
 Safety

Seat belt(s) warning lamps Advice

The driver must ensure that passengers
Recommendations for children
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger 5
is less than 12 years old or shorter than 1.5
use the seat belts correctly and that they metres.
are all fastened before setting off. Never use the same seat belt to secure more
Wherever seated in the vehicle, you must than one child.
always fasten the seat belt, even for short Never carry a child on your lap.
journeys. For more information on Child seats, refer to
Do not invert the seat belt buckles, as they the corresponding section.
will not fulfil their role properly.
A. Front seat belts not fastened/unfastened To ensure the proper functioning of the belt Maintenance
warning lamp. buckles, make sure that there are no foreign In accordance with current safety
B. Left-hand seat belt not fastened/unfastened bodies present (e.g. a coin) before fastening. regulations, for all work on your vehicle's
warning lamp. Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt seat belts, contact a qualified workshop with
C. Centre seat belt unfastened warning lamp (if is reeled in correctly. the skills and equipment needed, which a
your vehicle is fitted with a 2-seat front bench After folding or moving a seat or rear bench CITROËN dealer is able to provide.
seat). seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned Have the seat belts checked regularly by a
D. Right-hand seat belt not fastened/unfastened and reeled in correctly. CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop,
warning lamp (if your vehicle is fitted with particularly if the straps show signs of
individual front seats). Installation damage.
Right-hand seat belt unfastened warning The lower part of the strap must be Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or
lamp (if your vehicle is fitted with a 2-seat positioned as low as possible over the pelvis. a textile cleaning product, sold by CITROËN
front bench seat). The upper part must be positioned in the dealers.
hollow of the shoulder.
On switching on the ignition, the warning lamp(s)
In order to be effective, a seat belt must:
come(s) on if the corresponding seat belt is not
fastened or is unfastened.
–  be tightened as close to the body as
possible.
Airbags
At speeds above approximately 12 mph
–  be pulled in front of you with a smooth
(20 km/h), the warning lamp(s) flash(es) for 2
movement, ensuring that it is not twisted.
General information
minutes, accompanied by an audible signal. System designed to help improve the safety
–  only be used to secure one person.
Once these 2 minutes have elapsed, the warning of the occupants sitting in the front seats and
–  not show signs of tearing or fraying.
lamp(s) remain(s) on until the driver or the the rear outer seats, in the event of a violent
–  not be changed or modified, in order to
passenger fastens their seat belt. collision. The airbags supplement the action
avoid affecting its performance.

107
 Safety

of the seat belts equipped with a force limiting Impact detection zones Front airbags
system.
Electronic detectors record and analyse the
front and side impacts sustained in the impact
detection zones:
–  In the event of violent impact, the airbags
deploy instantly and help better protect the
occupants of the vehicle; immediately after the
impact, the airbags deflate rapidly in order not A. Front impact zone
to hinder the visibility or the possible exit of the B. Side impact zone
occupants.
–  In the event of a slight impact, a rear impact When one or more airbags are deployed,
and under certain rollover conditions, the airbags the detonation of the pyrotechnic charge
may not deploy; only the seat belt helps to incorporated in the system makes a noise and System that protects the driver and front
protect you in these situations. releases a small quantity of smoke. passenger in the event of a serious front impact,
The seriousness of the impact depends on the This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive limiting the risk of head and chest injury.
nature of the obstacle and the speed of the individuals may experience slight irritation. The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
vehicle at the moment of collision. The detonation noise associated with the steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is
deployment of one or more airbags may result fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
The airbags do not operate when the in a slight loss of hearing for a short time.
ignition is switched off. Deployment
This equipment will only deploy once. If a The airbags are deployed, except the front
second impact occurs (during the same or a passenger airbag if it is deactivated, in the
subsequent accident), the airbag will not be event of a serious front impact to all or part of
deployed again. the frontal impact zone A, in the longitudinal
centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane
and directed from the front to the rear of the
vehicle.
The front airbag inflates between the thorax
and head of the front occupant of the vehicle
and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the
dashboard, passenger side to cushion their
forward movement.

108
 Safety

If fitted to your vehicle, this is a system that

protects the driver and front passenger in the
Deployment
They are deployed on one side in the event
5
event of a serious side impact, in order to limit of a serious side impact applied to all or part
the risk of injury to the chest, between the of the side impact zone, perpendicular to the
abdomen and head. longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest horizontal plane and directed from the outside
frame, door side. towards the inside of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag inflates between the outer
Deployment rear passenger and the windows.
They are deployed on one side in the event
of a serious side impact applied to all or part Malfunction
of the side impact zone, perpendicular to the In the event of a malfunction, this warning
longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a lamp lights up on the instrument panel.
horizontal plane and directed from the outside Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
towards the inside of the vehicle. workshop to have the system checked.
When driving, keep the glove box
The lateral airbag inflates between the front The airbags may not be deployed in the event of
closed. Otherwise, this could cause injury
occupant's abdomen and head and the a serious impact.
in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
associated door trim panel.
In the event of a minor impact or bump at
Lateral airbags Curtain airbags (Row 2 & 3) the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle
rolls over, the airbags may not be deployed.
Feel, Shine, Business Lounge In the event of a rear or front collision, none of
the lateral airbags are deployed.

If fitted to your vehicle, this is a system that

contributes towards greater protection for Advice
passengers (with the exception of the centre
seats) in the event of a serious side impact, in For the airbags to be fully effective,
order to limit the risk of injury to the side of the observe the safety recommendations
head. below.
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and Adopt a normal and upright sitting position.
the upper passenger compartment area. Fasten your seat belt and position it correctly.
Do not place anything between the occupants
and the airbags (e.g. child, animal, object), do

109
 Safety

not fix or attach anything near or in the path of Lateral airbags Do not remove the grab handles installed on
the airbags, as this could cause injuries when Use only approved seat covers the roof, as these help to secure the curtain
they are deployed. compatible with the deployment of these airbags.
Never modify the original definition of the airbags. For information on the range of seat
vehicle, particularly in the area directly around covers suitable for your vehicle, contact a
the airbags. CITROËN dealer. Child seats
Even if all of the precautions mentioned are Do not fix or attach anything to the seat
observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to backrests (e.g. clothing) as this could cause The legislation on carrying children is
the head, chest or arms cannot be ruled out injuries to the chest or arm when the airbag is specific to each country. Refer to the
when an airbag is deployed. The bag inflates deployed. legislation in force in your country.
almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
then deflates within the same time, nearer to the door than necessary. For maximum safety, please observe the
discharging the hot gas via openings provided The vehicle's front door panels include side following recommendations:
for this purpose. impact sensors. –  In accordance with European regulations, all
After an accident or if the vehicle has been A damaged door or any unauthorised or children under the age of 12 or less than one
stolen, have the airbag systems checked. incorrectly executed work (modification or and a half metres tall must travel in approved
All work must be carried out only by a repair) on the front doors or their interior trim child seats suited to their weight, on seats
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. could compromise the operation of these fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings.
sensors - risk of malfunction of the lateral –  Statistically, the safest seats in your
airbags! vehicle for carrying children are the rear
Front airbags
All work must be carried out only by a seats.
Do not drive holding the steering wheel
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. –  A child weighing less than 9 kg must travel
by its spokes or resting your hands on the
in the "rearward facing" position both in the
centre part of the wheel.
front and in the rear.
Passengers must not place their feet on the
dashboard. Feel, Shine, Business Lounge It is recommended that children travel
Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags on the rear seats of the vehicle:
can cause burns or the risk of injury from a – "rearward facing" up to the age of 3,
cigarette or pipe. Curtain airbags – "forward facing" over the age of 3.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or Do not fix or attach anything to the roof,
hit it violently. as this could cause head injuries when the
Do not fix or attach anything to the steering curtain airbag is deployed.
wheel or dashboard, as this could cause
injuries when the airbags are deployed.

110
 Safety

Make sure that the seat belt is correctly

positioned and tightened.
Installing a booster seat
The chest part of the seat belt must be
Forward-facing or rearward-facing
5
For child seats with a support leg, ensure that positioned on the child's shoulder without
the support leg is in firm and steady contact touching the neck.
with the floor. Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
passes correctly over the child's thighs.
Use a booster seat with backrest, equipped
Advice with a belt guide at shoulder level.
An incorrectly installed child seat
compromises the child's safety in the Additional protections
event of an accident. To prevent accidental opening of the
►  Move the vehicle's front seat forward and
Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt doors and rear windows, use the "Child lock".
straighten the backrest so that the legs of the
buckle under the child seat, as this could Take care not to open the rear windows by
child in the forward-facing or rearward-facing
destabilise it. more than one third.
child seat itself do not touch the vehicle's front
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the To protect young children from the rays of the
seat.
harness of child seats, keeping the slack sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
►  Check that the backrest of the forward-facing
relative to the child's body to a minimum, As a safety precaution, do not leave:
child seat is as close as possible to the backrest
even for short journeys. –  a child alone and unattended in a vehicle,
of the vehicle's rear seat, and ideally in contact
When installing a child seat using the seat –  a child or an animal in a vehicle which is
with it.
belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened exposed to the sun, with the windows closed,
►  Adjust the rear seat to the fully back
correctly on the child seat and that it secures –  the keys within reach of children inside the
longitudinal position, with the backrest
the child seat firmly on the seat of the vehicle. vehicle.
straightened.
If the passenger seat is adjustable, move it
forwards if necessary. Ensure that the seat belt is correctly
Remove the head restraint before
Child seat at the rear tensioned.
installing a child seat with a backrest on a For child seats with a support leg, ensure
Row 2
passenger seat. that the support leg is in firm and steady
Ensure that the head restraint is stored or contact with the floor. If necessary, adjust the
attached securely to prevent it from being vehicle's front seat.
thrown around the vehicle in the event of
sharp braking. Refit the head restraint once
the child seat has been removed.

111
 Safety

Row 3 "Rearward facing" You must comply with the following instruction,
as reminded by the warning label on both sides
of the passenger sun visor:
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint
If a child seat is installed on a passenger seat in on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in
the third row, move the seats in the second row front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
forward and straighten the backrests so that the CHILD can occur.
child seat and the child's legs do not touch the
seats in the second row.
The front passenger airbag must be
Deactivating the front
Child seat at the front deactivated before installing a rearward passenger airbag
facing child seat. Otherwise, the child risks
being seriously injured or killed if the To ensure the safety of the child, the front
airbag is deployed. passenger airbag MUST be deactivated
when a "rearward facing" child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously
►  Adjust the front passenger seat to the injured or killed in the event of deployment of
highest and fully back longitudinal position, the airbag.
with the backrest straightened.
Vehicles not equipped with a
"Forward facing" deactivation/reactivation control
Installing a "rearward facing" child seat on the
front passenger seat or bench seat is strictly
Warning label - Front passenger airbag
prohibited - risk of death or serious injury in
the event of airbag deployment!

Deactivating/Reactivating the front

passenger airbag
For vehicles on which it is fitted, the switch is
You must leave the front passenger
located inside the glove box.
airbag active.

112
 Safety

Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg 5

With the ignition off:
►  To deactivate the airbag, turn the key in the
switch to the "OFF" position. L5
►  To reactivate it, turn the key to the "ON" "RÖMER KIDFIX XP"
position. Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX
When the ignition is switched on: mountings.
This warning lamp comes on and remains The child is restrained by the seat belt.
lit to signal deactivation. A version with a removable backrest may be
Or used for children weighing more than 25 kg.
This warning lamp comes on for about 1 However, for better protection, use a booster
minute to signal activation. seat with backrest for all children weighing up
to 36 kg.
Recommended child seats
Range of child seats secured using a three-
point seat belt.
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

L1
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the "rearward facing" position.

113
 Safety

Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt

In accordance with European regulations, the table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using a seat belt and universally approved (a)
according to the weight of the child and the seating position in the vehicle.

Weight of the child/indicative age

Seats Under 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg

(groups 0 (b) and (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
0+) From about 1 to 3 From about 3 to 6 From about 6 to 10
Up to about 1 year years old years old years old
old
Cab/Row 1 (c) (f)
Individual seat, U
passenger seat

Bench seat, outer seat U

Bench seat, centre X

seat

Row 2 (d) (Fixed bench seat)

Rear seats U

114
 Safety

Combi Weight of the child/indicative age 5

Seats Under 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg
(groups 0 (b) and (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
0+) From about 1 to 3 From about 3 to 6 From about 6 to 10
Up to about 1 year years old years old years old
old
Row 1 (c)
Individual seat, U
passenger seat with
passenger airbag
deactivated "OFF"
Individual seat, X UF
passenger seat with
passenger airbag
activated "ON"
Bench seat, centre X
seat with passenger
airbag deactivated
"OFF" or activated
"ON"
Bench seat, outer seat U
with passenger airbag
deactivated "OFF"
Bench seat, outer seat X UF
with passenger airbag
activated "ON"

115
 Safety

Combi Weight of the child/indicative age

Seats Under 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg

(groups 0 (b) and (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
0+) From about 1 to 3 From about 3 to 6 From about 6 to 10
Up to about 1 year years old years old years old
old
Row 2 and 3
Rear seats U

116
 Safety

Business, Feel Weight of the child/indicative age 5

Seats Under 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg
(groups 0 (b) and (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
0+) From about 1 to 3 From about 3 to 6 From about 6 to 10
Up to about 1 year years old years old years old
old
Row 1 (c)
Passenger seat U
(electric adjustments)
with passenger airbag
deactivated "OFF"
Passenger seat X UF
(electric adjustments)
with passenger airbag
activated "ON"
Passenger seat U
(without height
adjustment) with
passenger airbag
deactivated "OFF"
Passenger seat X UF
(without height
adjustment) with
passenger airbag
activated "ON"

117
 Safety

Business, Feel Weight of the child/indicative age

Seats Under 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg

(groups 0 (b) and (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
0+) From about 1 to 3 From about 3 to 6 From about 6 to 10
Up to about 1 year years old years old years old
old
Row 2 (d) and 3 (d)
Rear seats U

118
 Safety

Shine, Business Lounge Weight of the child/indicative age 5

Seats Under 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg
(groups 0 (b) and (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
0+) From about 1 to 3 From about 3 to 6 From about 6 to 10
Up to about 1 year years old years old years old
old
Row 1 (c)
Passenger seat U
(electric adjustments)
with passenger airbag
deactivated "OFF"
Passenger seat X UF
(electric adjustments)
with passenger airbag
activated "ON"
Row 2 (d) and 3 (d)
Outer seats and centre U
seat (e)

U: Seat position suitable for the installation of UF: Seat position suitable for the installation a X: Seat position not suitable for the installation
a child seat secured using the seat belt and child seat secured using the seat belt and of a child seat for the specified weight
universally approved for "rearward facing" universally approved for "forward facing" group.
and/or "forward facing" use. use.
(a) Universal child seat: child seat that can be
installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.

119
 Safety

(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Carrycots and

"car" infant carriers cannot be installed on
the front passenger seat(s) or the seats in
row 3.

(c) Refer to the current legislation in the country

in which you are driving before placing a Combi, Business, Feel
child in this seat position.

(d) To install a "rearward facing" or "forward

facing" child seat on a rear seat, move the
seats in front of it forward, then straighten The vehicle has been approved in accordance
their backrests to allow sufficient room for with the latest ISOFIX and i-Size regulations.
the child seat and the child's legs. If fitted to the vehicle, approved ISOFIX and
(e) The seat can be installed centrally in the i-Size fixings can be identified by the labels
vehicle; it then prevents the use of the outer attached to them.
seats. There are three rings for each seat:
–  Two front rings A, located between the vehicle
(f) When a "rearward facing" child seat is seat backrest and cushion, indicated by an
installed on the front passenger seat, the "ISOFIX" or "i-Size" marking,
front passenger airbag must be deactivated. –  If fitted to your vehicle, a rear ring B, called a
Otherwise, the child risks being severely Shine, Business Lounge
Top Tether, is located behind the vehicle's seat
injured or killed if the airbag is deployed. and is used to secure the upper strap and is
indicated by a "Top Tether" marking.
The Top Tether secures the upper strap of child
"ISOFIX" mountings and seats fitted with them. In case of frontal impact,
i-Size this device limits the extent to which the child
seat can tilt forward.
This ISOFIX and i-Size mounting system
provides fast, reliable and safe fitting of a child
seat inside the vehicle.

120
 Safety

ISOFIX and i-Size child seats are fitted with two

latches which are secured to the two front rings
Recommended ISOFIX child
seats
"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX"
(size category: B1)
5
A.
Some child seats also have an upper strap which Also consult the user guide from the child Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
is attached to rear ring B. seat’s manufacturer to find out how to
To secure the child seat to the Top Tether: install and remove the seat.
–  remove and stow the head restraint before
installing a child seat on this seat (refit it once
the child seat has been removed),
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX
–  pass the strap of the child seat over the top
base" Suitable for forward-facing installation only.
of the seat backrest, centring it between the
(size category: E) Attached to rings A and ring B, referred to as
openings for the head restraint rods,
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg TOP TETHER, using an upper strap.
–  attach the hook of the upper strap to rear ring
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining,
B,
lying down.
–  tighten the upper strap.
This child seat can also be used in seat
Incorrect installation of a child seat in a positions not equipped with ISOFIX
vehicle can compromise a child's safety Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX mountings. In this case, it must be secured to
in the event of an accident. base which is attached to rings A. the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt.
Strictly follow the fitting instructions provided The base has a support leg, height- Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the
in the installation guide supplied with the child adjustable, which rests on the vehicle's floor. child's feet do not touch the backrest.
seat. This child seat can also be secured with a
seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used
For information on the various options for and attached to the vehicle seat using the
installing ISOFIX child seats in your three-point seat belt.
vehicle, refer to the summary table.

121
 Safety

Locations for ISOFIX child seats

In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on vehicle seats fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child seat
next to the ISOFIX logo.
Weight of the child/indicative age

Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)

(group 0) (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old
Up to about 6 Under 13 kg
months old (group 0+)
Up to about 1 year old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot (1) rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Row 1
Individual passenger Not ISOFIX
seat or 2-seat bench
seat with passenger
airbag deactivated
"OFF" or activated
"ON"

122
 Safety

Weight of the child/indicative age 5

Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
(group 0) (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old
Up to about 6 Under 13 kg
months old (group 0+)
Up to about 1 year old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot (1) rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Row 2 with individual seats in row 1
Outer seats X IUF
Centre seat Not ISOFIX

Row 2 with individual seats in row 1

Outer seats IL IL (6) IL IL (6) IL IUF
Centre seat Not ISOFIX

123
 Safety

Combi Weight of the child/indicative age

Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)

(group 0) (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old
Up to about 6 Under 13 kg
months old (group 0+)
Up to about 1 year old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot (1) rearward facing rearward forward facing
facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 B2 B3
Row 1 (a)
Individual Not ISOFIX
passenger seat or
2-seat bench seat
with passenger
airbag deactivated
"OFF" or activated
"ON"

Row 2
Outer seats and X IL (3) IL (2) IL IL (2) IUF, IL
centre seat (b)

124
 Safety

Combi Weight of the child/indicative age 5

Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
(group 0) (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old
Up to about 6 Under 13 kg
months old (group 0+)
Up to about 1 year old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot (1) rearward facing rearward forward facing
facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 B2 B3
Row 3
Fixed one-piece X IUF, IL X
bench seat, outer
seats and centre
seat (b)
Seat and fixed X IUF, IL X
rear bench seat,
outer seats and
centre seat (b)

125
 Safety

Business Weight of the child/indicative age

Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)

(group 0) (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old
Up to about 6 Under 13 kg
months old (group 0+)
Up to about 1 year old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot (1) rearward facing rearward forward facing
facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 B2 B3
Row 1 (a)
Individual Not ISOFIX
passenger seat or
2-seat bench seat
with passenger
airbag deactivated
"OFF" or activated
"ON"

Row 2
Rear seats X IL IL (2) IL IL (2) IUF, IL
(1-3)

126
 Safety

Business Weight of the child/indicative age 5

Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
(group 0) (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old
Up to about 6 Under 13 kg
months old (group 0+)
Up to about 1 year old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot (1) rearward facing rearward forward facing
facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 B2 B3
Row 3
Fixed one-piece X IUF, IL X
bench seat, rear
seats
Seat and fixed X IUF, IL X
rear bench seat,
rear seats

127
 Safety

Feel Weight of the child/indicative age

Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)

(group 0) (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old
Up to about 6 Under 13 kg
months old (group 0+)
Up to about 1 year old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot (1) rearward facing rearward forward facing
facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 B2 B3
Row 1 (a)
Passenger seat Not ISOFIX
with passenger
airbag deactivated
"OFF" or activated
"ON"

Row 2
Rear seats IL IUF, IL

Row 3
Rear seats IL (1-4) X IL (4) X IL (4) IUF, IL X

128
 Safety

Shine, Business Lounge Weight of the child/indicative age 5

Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
(group 0) (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old
Up to about 6 Under 13 kg
months old (group 0+)
Up to about 1 year old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot (1) rearward facing rearward forward facing
facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 B2 B3
Row 1 (a)
Passenger seat Not ISOFIX
with passenger
airbag deactivated
"OFF" or activated
"ON"

Row 2
Seat behind driver X IL (5) IL IL (5) IL IUF, IL N/A N/A
or front passenger

Centre seat (b) X IL (5) IL IL (5) IL IUF, IL N/A N/A

Rear seats IL (1-5) IL IL IUF, IL

129
 Safety

Shine, Business Lounge Weight of the child/indicative age

Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)

(group 0) (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old
Up to about 6 Under 13 kg
months old (group 0+)
Up to about 1 year old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot (1) rearward facing rearward forward facing
facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 B2 B3
Row 3
Outer seats X IL (4) IL IL (4) IUF, IL N/A N/A

Centre seat (b) X IL (4) IL IL (4) IUF, IL N/A N/A

Rear seats IL (1-4) X IL (4) X IL (4) IUF, IL X

IUF: Seat position suitable for the installation

of an Isofix Universal seat, "Forward
facing", secured using the upper strap.

130
 Safety

IL: Seat position suitable for the installation

of an Isofix Semi-UniversaL seat which is
(b) The seat can be installed centrally in the
vehicle; it then prevents the use of the outer
(4) The seat in row 2 must be adjusted so that
there is no contact between the child in row
5
either: seats. 3 and the seat immediately in front.
–  "rearward facing" fitted with an upper
(5) The front seat must be adjusted so that
strap or a support leg, For information on securing the upper
there is no contact between the child in row
–  "forward facing" fitted with a support leg, strap using the ISOFIX mountings, refer
2 and the seat immediately in front.
–  a carrycot fitted with an upper strap or a to the corresponding section.
support leg. (6) The front seat must be adjusted so that
(1) Installing a carrycot on this seat may there is no contact between the child in row
X: Seat position not suitable for the installation prevent the use of one or more of the other 2 and the seat immediately in front (with the
of an ISOFIX child seat or carrycot for the seats in this row. front seat adjusted to 2 notches ahead of
specified weight group.
(2) Installation possible only behind the driver's the centre of the slide).
N/A: Not applicable seat.
(a) Refer to the current legislation in the country (3) Installation possible only behind the driver's
in which you are driving before placing a seat with individual passenger seat.
child in this seat position.

i-Size child seats

i-Size child seats have two latches that are anchored to the two rings A.
These i-Size child seats also have:
–  either an upper strap that is attached to ring B.
–  or a support leg that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat position.
Their role is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision.
For more information on the ISOFIX and i-Size mountings, refer to the corresponding section.

131
 Safety

Locations for i-Size child seats

In accordance with the new European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing i-Size child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with i-Size
approved ISOFIX mountings.
Seat i-Size restraint system
Passenger seat with passenger Not i-Size
airbag deactivated "OFF" or
activated "ON"
Row 1 (a)

With 2-seat bench seat in row 1

Outer seats Not i-Size
Centre seat Not i-Size
Row 2
With individual seats in row 1
Outer seats Not i-Size
Centre seat Not i-Size

132
 Safety

Seat i-Size restraint system 5

Combi, Business, Feel With 2-seat bench seat in row 1
Fixed one-piece bench seat, outer i-UF
seats and centre seat (b)

Row 2 Seat and bench seat, outer seats i-UF

and centre seat (b)

With individual seats in row 1

Fixed one-piece bench seat, outer i-U
seats and centre seat (b)

Seat and bench seat, outer seats i-U

and centre seat (b)

Combi, Business, Feel Fixed one-piece bench seat, outer i-U (c)
seats and centre seat (b)

Seat and bench seat, outer seats i-U (c)

Row 3 and centre seat (b)

133
 Safety

Seat i-Size restraint system

Shine, Business Lounge Rear seats with seat and bench i-U (c)
seat

Rear seats with 2 individual seats Not i-Size

Row 2 and 3

Rear seats with 1 individual seat Not i-Size

i-U: Suitable for forward facing and rearward facing "Universal" i-Size restraint systems.

i-UF: Only suitable for forward facing "Universal" i-Size restraint systems.

(a) Refer to the current legislation in the country in which you are driving before placing a child in this seat position.

(b) The seat can be installed centrally in the vehicle; it then prevents the use of the outer seats.

(c) The seat in row 2 cannot be used when an i-Size child seat is installed immediately behind.

Manual child lock Locking/Unlocking

►  Rotate the control located on the edge of the
Mechanical system to prevent opening of the
side door up to lock it, or down to unlock it.
sliding side door using its interior lever.

134
 Safety

Electric child lock Any other status of the indicator lamp

indicates a malfunction of the electric 5
Remote control system to child lock.
prevent opening of the rear Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
doors (sliding side door(s), side- qualified workshop.
hinged rear doors or tailgate
(depending on version)) using With the child lock activated, it is still
their interior controls. possible to open the doors from outside.
This control prevents the opening of the rear
doors using their interior handles and the use of This system is independent and in no
the rear electric windows. circumstances does it take the place of ►  The system is locked/unlocked using the
the central locking control. remote control key or the back-up key for the
Activation/Deactivation Check the status of the child lock each time Keyless Entry and Starting system.
you switch on the ignition.
Always keep the electronic key with you when
leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.
In the event of a serious impact, the electric
child lock is switched off automatically to
permit the exit of the rear passengers.

Child lock on rear

►  With the ignition on, press this button to
activate/deactivate the child lock. windows
A message is displayed, confirming activation/
This mechanical system
deactivation of the child lock.
prevents opening of the left-
When the indicator lamp is on, the child lock is
hand and/or right-hand rear side
activated.
windows.
In the event of a serious impact, the
electric child lock is deactivated
automatically.

135
 Driving

Driving recommendations Be aware of the effect of side winds on the

vehicle.
Never leave a vehicle unattended with
the engine running. If you have to leave
►  Observe the driving regulations and remain your vehicle with the engine running, apply
Maintenance
vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. the parking brake and put the gearbox into
►  Monitor your surroundings and keep your Inflate to the minimum pressure indicated on the
neutral or position N or P (depending on the
hands on the wheel to be able to react to label, or even over-inflate by 0.2 to 0.3 bar for
type of gearbox).
anything that may happen any time. long journeys.
►  Drive smoothly, anticipate the need for
braking and maintain a longer safety distance, Important! Never leave children inside the vehicle
unsupervised.
especially in bad weather.
Never leave the engine running in a
►  Stop the vehicle to carry out operations that
closed space without sufficient
require close attention (such as adjustments).
ventilation. Internal combustion engines emit On flooded roads
►  During long trips, take a break every 2 hours. We strongly advise against driving on flooded
toxic exhaust gases such as carbon
To ensure the durability of the vehicle and roads, as this could cause serious damage to the
monoxide. Danger of poisoning and death!
for safety reasons, remember that certain engine or gearbox, as well as to your vehicle's
precautionary measures must be taken when electrical systems.
driving the vehicle: In very severe wintry conditions
(temperature below -23°C), let the engine
Manoeuvre cautiously, at low speed run for 4 minutes before moving off, to ensure
Manoeuvre slowly. the correct operation and durability of the
Before turning, check that there are no obstacles mechanical components of your vehicle
at mid-height along the sides. (engine and gearbox).
Before reversing, check that there are no
obstacles, particularly at high level behind the Never drive with the parking brake
vehicle. applied. Risk of overheating and If the vehicle absolutely must drive through a
Be aware of the external dimensions, if ladders damaging the braking system! flooded section of road:
are fitted. ►  Check that the depth of the water does not
Drive the vehicle carefully Do not park the vehicle or leave the exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that
Take corners gently. engine running on a flammable might be generated by other users.
Anticipate the need to brake as the stopping surface (e.g. dry grass, dead leaves).The ►  Deactivate the Stop & Start function.
distance is increased, particularly on wet or icy vehicle exhaust system is very hot, even ►  Drive as slowly as possible without stalling. In
roads. several minutes after the engine stops. Risk all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h).
of fire! ►  Do not stop and do not switch off the motor.

136
 Driving

On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety

conditions allow, make several light brake
Towing
Driving with a trailer places greater
Tyres
►  Check the tyre pressures of the towing
6
applications to dry the brake discs and pads. vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
If in doubt about the state of your vehicle, demands on the towing vehicle and
recommended pressures.
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified particular care must be taken.
Lighting
workshop.
Do not exceed the maximum towable ►  Check the electrical signalling on the trailer
Noise (Electric) weights. and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle.

On the outside At altitude: reduce the maximum load by If a genuine CITROËN towing device is
10% per 1,000 metres of altitude; the lower used, the rear parking sensors will be
Due to the vehicle’s quiet operation when
air density at high altitudes decreases engine deactivated automatically to avoid the audible
driving, the driver must pay particular attention.
performance. signal.
At speeds of up to 19 mph (30 km/h), the
pedestrian horn warns other road users of the
vehicle’s presence. New vehicle: do not tow a trailer until the
vehicle has driven at least 620 miles
When driving
Cooling the traction battery (1,000 kilometres). Cooling
The cooling fan comes on during
Towing a trailer uphill causes the coolant
charging to cool the on-board charger and the If the outside temperature is high, let the temperature to increase. The maximum towable
traction battery. engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the load depends on the gradient and the exterior
vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to cool. temperature. The fan’s cooling capacity does not
On the inside
increase with engine speed.
During use, you may hear certain perfectly ►  Reduce speed and lower the engine speed to
normal noises specific to electric vehicles, such
Before setting off
limit the amount of heating produced.
as: Nose weight In all cases, pay attention to the coolant
–  Traction battery relay when starting. ►  Distribute the load in the trailer so that the temperature.
–  Vacuum pump when braking. heaviest items are as close as possible to the If this warning lamp and the
–  Vehicle tyres or aerodynamics when driving. axle and the nose weight (at the point where it STOP warning lamp come
–  Jolting and knocking noise during hill starts. joins your vehicle) approaches the maximum on, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine as
permitted without exceeding it. soon as possible.

137
 Driving

Brakes Starting/switching off the ►  Unlock the steering column by simultaneously

turning the steering wheel and the key.
Braking distances are increased when towing a
trailer. To avoid overheating the brakes, the use
engine
In certain circumstances, a significant
of engine braking is recommended. effort may be required to turn the
Side wind
Starting steering wheel (if the wheels are against a
The parking brake must be applied. kerb, for example).
Bear in mind that the vehicle will be more
susceptible to wind when towing. ►  Turn the key to position 2, ignition on, to
►  With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever
in neutral, fully depress the clutch pedal and operate the engine preheating system.
Anti-theft protection keep the pedal down until the engine starts. ►  Wait until this warning lamp goes off in
►  With an automatic gearbox, place the the instrument panel, then operate the
Electronic immobiliser selector in position P then depress the brake starter motor by turning the key to position 3
without pressing the accelerator pedal, until the
pedal.
The remote control contains an electronic chip engine starts. Once the engine starts, release
which has a special code. When the ignition is With the conventional key / With the the key.
switched on, this code must be recognised in remote control key
order for starting to be possible. The warning lamp does not come on if
A few seconds after switching off the ignition, the engine is already [Link] certain
this system locks the engine control system, climatic conditions, it is advised to follow the
therefore preventing the engine from being recommendations below:
started in the event of a break-in. –  In mild conditions, do not leave the engine
In the event of a fault, you are informed at idle to warm up but move off straight away
by illumination of this warning lamp, an and drive at moderate speed.
audible signal and a message on the screen. –  In wintry conditions, the preheater warning
The vehicle will not start; contact a CITROËN lamp will stay on for a longer period after
dealer as soon as possible. switching on the ignition; wait until it goes off
before starting.
– In very severe wintry conditions
1. Stop position. (temperature below -23°C), to ensure correct
2. Ignition on position. operation and durability of the mechanical
3. Starting position. components of the vehicle (engine and
►  Insert the key into the ignition switch. The gearbox), leave the engine running for
system recognises the starting code. 4 minutes before starting the vehicle.

138
 Driving

Never leave the engine running in an

enclosed area without adequate ventilation:
climatic conditions, it is advised to follow the
recommendations below:
The "Keyless Entry and Starting" system
remote control must be within the 6
internal combustion engines emit toxic –  In mild conditions, do not leave the engine recognition zone.
exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. to warm up while stationary, but move off Never leave the vehicle with the engine
Danger of poisoning and death! straight away and drive at moderate speed. running and with the remote control on your
–  In wintry conditions, when the ignition is person.
If the engine does not start immediately, switched on, the duration of lighting of the If the remote control leaves the recognition
switch off the ignition. preheating indicator lamp is extended. Wait zone, a message is displayed.
Wait a few seconds before operating the until it goes off before starting the engine. Move the remote control into the zone in
starter motor again. If the engine does not – In very severe wintry order to be able to start the engine.
start after several attempts, do not keep conditions (temperature below -23°C),
trying: risk of damaging the starter motor and to ensure correct operation and preserve If one of the starting conditions is not
the engine. the lifespan of the vehicle's mechanical met, a message is displayed on the
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified components, engine and gearbox, leave the instrument panel. In some circumstances, you
workshop. engine running for 4 minutes before moving must turn the steering wheel while pressing
off. the "START/STOP" button to assist unlocking
Never leave the engine running in an of the steering column. A message is
With the Keyless Entry and Starting enclosed area without adequate ventilation: displayed.
internal combustion engines emit toxic
exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide.
Danger of poisoning and death! Switching off

For Diesel vehicles, when the

With the conventional key/With the
temperature is below zero, remote control key
►  Place the remote control inside the vehicle, in
starting will only occur once the pre-heating ►  Immobilise the vehicle.
the recognition zone.
warning lamp goes off. ►  Turn the key all the way to position 1 (Stop)
►  Press the "START/STOP" button.
If this warning lamp comes on after pressing and remove it from the ignition.
the "START/STOP" button, keep the brake ►  To lock the steering column, turn the steering
The steering column unlocks and the engine
or clutch pedal depressed until the warning wheel until it locks.
starts more or less instantly.
lamp goes off, without pressing the "START/
To facilitate unlocking of the steering
The warning lamp does not come on if STOP" button again, until the engine starts
column, it is recommended that the
the engine is already warm. In some and is running.

139
 Driving

wheels be returned to the straight ahead To switch the ignition back on, turn the key ►  If using a conventional or remote control key,
position before switching off the engine. to position 1 (Stop), then back to position 2 depress the brake pedal and turn the key until it
(Ignition on). reaches position 3.
►  Check that the parking brake is correctly ►  If using Keyless Entry and Starting, depress
applied, particularly on sloping ground. the brake pedal and briefly press the "START/
With Keyless Entry and Starting
Never switch off the ignition before the STOP" button.
►  Immobilise the vehicle. ►  Keep your foot on the brake pedal until the
complete immobilisation of the vehicle.
►  With the remote control in the recognition READY indicator lamp comes on and an audible
With the engine off, the braking and steering
zone, press the "START/STOP" button. signal is emitted, indicating that the vehicle is
assistance systems are also turned off: risk of
The engine stops and the steering column locks. ready to drive.
loss of control of the vehicle.
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the ►  With your foot on the brake, select mode D
engine will not stop. or R.
As a safety measure, never leave the
►  Release the brake pedal, then accelerate.
vehicle without taking the remote control
On starting, the instrument panel lights up
with you, even for a short time. To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:
and the power indicator needle performs one
–  only use mats which are suited to the
sweep then moves to the "neutral" position. The
Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key fixings already present in the vehicle; these
steering column automatically unlocks (you may
or the remote control, which would weigh fixings must be used,
hear a sound and feel the steering wheel move).
down on its blade in the ignition switch and –  never place one mat on top of another.
could cause a malfunction. The use of mats not approved by CITROËN Switching off
may interfere with access to the pedals and ►  If using a conventional or remote control
hinder the operation of the cruise control / key, turn the key fully to position 1 (Stop).
Key left in the ignition
speed limiter. ►  If using Keyless Entry and Starting, press the
The mats approved by CITROËN have two "START/STOP" button.
When opening the driver's door, an alert
fixings located below the seat. Before exiting the vehicle, check that:
message is displayed, accompanied by
an audible signal, to remind you that the key –  The drive selector is in mode P.
is still in the ignition switch at position 1 Starting/Switching off the – The READY indicator lamp is off.
(Stop).
If the key has been left in the ignition switch
electric motor The drive selector moves automatically
to mode P when the motor is switched off
at position 2 (Ignition on), the ignition will be Starting or when the driver's door is opened.
switched off automatically after one hour. The drive selector must be in mode P.
If the driver's door is opened while the
required conditions for stopping are not

140
 Driving

satisfied, an audible signal is emitted,

accompanied by the display of a warning
►  With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever
in neutral, then fully depress the clutch pedal.
This mode allows electrical devices to continue
operating to ensure thermal comfort, vehicle 6
message. ►  With an automatic gearbox or a drive security and operation of the vehicle systems
selector, select mode P, then depress the brake needed for the task.
pedal.
Special case with Keyless ►  Press the "START/STOP" button.
Entry and Starting The engine starts.

Switching on the ignition without Remote control not recognised

starting the engine If the remote control is no longer in the
recognition zone, a message appears on the
KEY
With the "Keyless Entry and Starting"
electronic key inside the vehicle, pressing instrument panel when closing a door or trying to OFF
the "START/STOP" button, without depressing switch off the engine.
►  Press the "START/STOP" button for about ►  To activate or deactivate this mode, press this
any of the pedals, allows the ignition to be
3 seconds to confirm switching off the engine, button (the button's indicator lamp is on when
switched on.
then contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified the mode is activated).
►  Press this button again to switch off the
ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked. workshop. With an electric motor, this mode remains
active for about 10 minutes after the
Back-up starting Forced switch-off (also called vehicle is locked.
A back-up reader is fitted to the steering column,
Back-up switch-off)
to enable the engine to be started if the system In case of emergency only, the engine can be
fails to detect the key in the recognition zone, or switched off without conditions (even when
driving).
Manual parking brake
if the battery in the electronic key is flat.
►  To do this, press and hold the "START/
STOP" button for about 5 seconds.
Application
In this case, the steering column locks as soon ►  With your foot on the brake pedal, pull
as the vehicle stops. the parking brake lever up to immobilise your
vehicle.
"Key off" mode
"Key off" mode allows you to lock the vehicle
Release on level ground
►  Place and hold the remote control against the
while leaving the engine running without the key ►  With your foot on the brake pedal, pull the
reader.
or Keyless Entry and Starting being inside the parking brake lever up gently, press the release
vehicle. button, then lower the lever fully.

141
 Driving

When the vehicle is being driven, this In the event of a battery failure, the
warning lamp coming on, accompanied by electric parking brake will not operate.
an audible signal and a message, indicates that As a safety measure, with a manual gearbox,
the parking brake is still applied or has not been if the parking brake is not applied, immobilise
fully released. the vehicle by engaging a gear.
As a safety measure, with an automatic
When parking on a slope or on a steep
gearbox or drive selector, if the parking brake
slope with a loaded vehicle, turn the
is not applied, immobilise the vehicle by
wheels against the kerb then apply the
placing the supplied chock against one of the
parking brake.
At any time, with the engine running: wheels.
►  To apply the parking brake, briefly pull the Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
Pressing the brake pedal facilitates the workshop.
control.
application and release of the manual
►  To release it, briefly push the control while
parking brake.
pressing the brake pedal.
Automatic mode is activated by default.
With a manual gearbox, engage a gear This automatic operation can be temporarily
and then switch off the ignition. deactivated.

With an automatic gearbox, place the Indicator lamp

gear selector in position P, then switch This indicator lamp comes on both on the
off the ignition. instrument panel and on the control to
Before leaving the vehicle, check that the
confirm that the parking brake has been applied,
parking brake is applied: the parking
accompanied by display of the message
Electric parking brake "Parking brake applied".
brake indicator lamps on the instrument panel
and the control must be on fixed.
The indicator lamp goes out to confirm the
In automatic mode, this system applies the If the parking brake is not applied, there is an
release of the parking brake, accompanied by
parking brake when the engine is switched off audible signal and a message is displayed on
the display of the message "Parking brake
and releases it when the vehicle moves off. opening the driver's door.
released".
The indicator lamp flashes in response to a
manual request to apply or release the brake. Never leave a child alone inside the
vehicle, as they could release the parking
brake.

142
 Driving

When the vehicle is parked: on a

steep slope, heavily loaded or during
Automatic operation Automatic application
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake
6
towing Automatic release is applied automatically when the engine is
With a manual gearbox, turn the wheels switched off.
First ensure that the engine is running and that
toward the pavement and engage a gear.
the driver's door is closed. It is not applied automatically if the
With an automatic gearbox or a drive selector,
The electric parking brake gradually releases engine stalls or enters STOP mode with
turn the wheels toward the pavement and
automatically as the vehicle moves off. Stop & Start.
select mode P.
With a manual gearbox
When towing, the vehicle is approved for
►  Fully depress the clutch pedal and engage
parking on slopes of up to 12%. In automatic mode, the parking brake
first gear or reverse.
can be manually applied or released at
►  Depress the accelerator pedal and release
any time using the control.
Manual operation the clutch pedal.
With an automatic gearbox
Manual release ►  Depress the brake pedal. Special cases
►  Select mode D, M or R.
With the ignition on or engine running:
►  Depress the brake pedal.
►  Release the brake pedal and depress the Immobilising the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal. engine running
►  While maintaining pressure on the brake
With a drive selector
pedal, briefly push the control lever. To immobilise the vehicle with the engine
►  Depress the brake pedal.
running, briefly pull the control lever.
If you push the control lever without ►  Select mode D, B or R.
pressing the brake pedal, the parking ►  Release the brake pedal and depress the Parking the vehicle with the brake
brake is not released and a message is accelerator pedal. released
displayed.
With an automatic gearbox or drive
In very cold conditions (ice), applying the
selector, if the brake does not release
parking brake is not recommended.
Manual application automatically, check that the front doors are
To immobilise the vehicle, engage a gear or
With the vehicle stationary: properly closed.
place the chocks against one of the wheels.
►  Pull briefly on the control lever.
The control lever indicator lamp flashes to When stationary with the engine running,
With an automatic gearbox or drive
confirm the application request. do not depress the accelerator pedal
selector, mode P is automatically
unnecessarily. Risk of parking brake release.

143
 Driving

selected when the ignition is switched off. The ►  Hold the control lever pressed in the release If the ABS and DSC systems
wheels are blocked. direction for between 10 and a maximum of 15 malfunction, indicated by lighting
For more information on Free-wheeling, refer seconds. one or both warning lamps on the instrument
to the corresponding section. ►  Release the control lever. panel, the vehicle’s stability is no longer ensured.
►  Depress and hold the brake pedal. ►  In this case, ensure the vehicle's stability by
With an automatic gearbox or drive ►  Pull the control lever in the application successive and repeated "pull-release" actions
selector, while mode N is selected, direction for 2 seconds. on the electric parking brake control until the
opening the driver’s door triggers an audible This indicator lamp on the instrument vehicle comes to a complete stop.
signal. It stops when the driver's door closes panel comes on to confirm deactivation of
again. the automatic functions.
►  Release the control lever and the brake
Hill start assist
pedal. System which briefly keeps the vehicle stationary
Deactivating automatic From now on, the parking brake can only be (for approximately 2 seconds) when making a hill
operation applied and released manually using the control start, while you transfer your foot from the brake
lever. pedal to the accelerator pedal.
In some situations, for example when it is
Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic It is only active when:
extremely cold or when towing (e.g. caravan,
operation (confirmed by the indicator lamp on the –  The vehicle is completely stationary, with your
breakdown), it may be necessary to deactivate
instrument panel going off). foot on the brake pedal.
automatic operation of the system.
–  Certain slope conditions are met.
Emergency braking –  The driver’s door is closed.
If depressing the brake pedal fails to provide Do not leave the vehicle while it is being
effective braking or in exceptional circumstances held temporarily by hill start assist.
(e.g. driver unwell, assisted driving), the vehicle If someone needs to get out of the vehicle
can be braked by sustained pulling on the with the engine running, apply the parking
electric parking brake control. Braking continues brake manually. Then check that the parking
for as long as the control is kept pulled, and brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp
ceases when the control is released. in the electric parking brake control lever are
►  Start the engine. The ABS and DSC systems stabilise the vehicle on fixed.
►  Use the control lever to apply the parking during emergency braking.
brake, if it is released. If emergency braking malfunctions, the message
The hill start assist function cannot be
►  Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. "Parking brake fault" will be displayed on the
deactivated. However, using the parking
instrument panel.

144
 Driving

brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts its

operation.
Engaging reverse gear 6
If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox
and you have to move off on a steep
slope (uphill or downhill) with a loaded
vehicle, press the brake pedal, select
position D, release the parking brake then
release the brake pedal.
Facing downhill, with the vehicle stationary
and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held
Operation for a short time when the driver releases the
brake pedal.
►  Raise the ring under the knob and move the
Malfunction gear lever to the left, then forwards.
If the event of a malfunction, these Only engage reverse gear when the
warning lamps light up on the vehicle is stationary with the engine at
instrument panel, accompanied by the display of idle.
a message.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
qualified workshop.
engine starting:
Facing uphill, with the vehicle stationary, –  always select neutral,
the vehicle is held for a short time when the 6-speed manual gearbox –  depress the clutch pedal.
driver releases the brake pedal:
–  If first gear or neutral is engaged on a manual Engaging 5th or 6th gear
gearbox.
►  Move the gear selector fully to the right to Gear shift indicator
–  If mode D or M is selected on an automatic
engage 5th or 6th gear. (Depending on engine.)
gearbox.
System which reduces fuel consumption by
–  If mode D or B is selected on the drive Failure to follow this instruction could
recommending the most appropriate gear.
selector. cause permanent damage to the gearbox
(inadvertent engagement of 3rd or 4th gear).

145
 Driving

Operation Automatic gearbox Steering mounted controls

Depending on the driving situation and the Automatic 6 or 8-speed gearbox, with electronic
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise to management of gear changes. It also offers a
skip one or more gears. manual mode with sequential gear changes
Gear shift recommendations should not be via control paddles located behind the steering
considered compulsory. In fact, the road layout, wheel.
the traffic density and safety remain the deciding
factors when choosing the best gear. The driver Gear selector
therefore remains responsible for deciding
whether or not to follow the indications issued by To turn the gear selector in complete
the system. safety, it is recommended that you keep
This function cannot be deactivated. your foot on the brake pedal.
On certain BlueHDi Diesel versions with ►  Pull the right-hand "+" or left-hand "-" control
manual gearbox, the system may suggest paddle towards you to change up or down.
changing into neutral (N is displayed in the
instrument panel) so that the engine can go into The steering mounted controls do not
standby (STOP mode with Stop & Start), in allow neutral to be selected and reverse
certain driving conditions. gear to be engaged or disengaged.

With an automatic gearbox, the system is

only active in manual operation. Information displayed on
The information appears in the instrument
the instrument panel
panel, in the form of an ascending or
descending arrow and the recommended gear.
P. Park.
The system adapts its gear shift R. Reverse.
recommendation according to the driving N. Neutral.
conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the driver’s D. Drive (automatic operation).
requirements (request for power, acceleration, M. Manual (manual operation with sequential
braking, etc.). changing of the gears).
The system never suggests:
–  engaging first gear. Position N can be used in traffic jams or
–  engaging reverse. in a car wash tunnel.

146
 Driving

When you move the selector or press button M,

the corresponding gear and indicator lamp are
If P is displayed on the instrument panel
but the selector is in another position,
►  For maximum acceleration without
touching the selector, fully depress the 6
shown on the instrument panel. place the selector in position P to allow the accelerator pedal (kick-down).
The "-" symbol is displayed if a value is invalid. engine to be started. The gearbox changes down automatically or
►  If the message "Foot on the brake" is If position N is selected inadvertently while holds the gear selected until the maximum
displayed on the instrument panel, press driving, allow the engine to return to idle, then engine speed is reached.
the brake pedal firmly. select position D to accelerate. When braking, the gearbox changes down
automatically to provide effective engine braking.
Starting the vehicle When the engine is running at idle with If you release the accelerator sharply, the
►  With your foot on the brake, select the brakes released, if position R, D or M gearbox will not shift to a higher gear for safety
position P. is selected, the vehicle moves even without reasons.
►  Start the engine. the accelerator being pressed. Never select position N while the vehicle
If the conditions are not met, there is an audible Never leave children inside the vehicle is moving.
signal, accompanied by a message on the unsupervised. Never select positions P or R unless the
instrument panel screen. As a safety measure, never leave the vehicle vehicle is completely stationary.
►  Release the parking brake, unless it is set to without taking your key or remote control with
automatic mode (with electric parking brake). you, even for a short time.
►  Select position R, N or D. When carrying out maintenance with the Temporary manual control
If you are setting off from a steep slope
engine running, apply the parking brake and of gear changes
select position P.
with a loaded vehicle, depress the You can temporarily assume control of gear
brake pedal, select position D, release the changing using the "+" et "-” steering-mounted
parking brake, unless it is set to automatic With an automatic gearbox, never try to controls. The gear change request will be
mode (with electric parking brake), then start the engine by pushing the vehicle. executed if the engine speed permits.
release the brake pedal. This function allows you to anticipate certain

►  Gradually release the brake pedal. Automatic operation situations, such as overtaking another vehicle or
approaching a bend in the road.
Or ►  Select position D for automatic
After a few seconds with no inputs via the control
►  Accelerate gradually in order to release the changing of the gears.
paddles, the gearbox reverts to automatic
electric parking brake (if it is set to automatic The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive
operation.
mode). mode, without any intervention on the part of the
The vehicle moves off immediately. driver. It continuously selects the most suitable
gear according to the driving style, the road
profile and the load in the vehicle.

147
 Driving

Creeping (moving without It is only possible to change from one Invalid value during manual
gear to another if the vehicle speed and
using the accelerator) engine speed permit.
operation
This function facilitates manoeuvring of the This symbol is displayed if a gear is not
vehicle at low speed (when parking, in traffic engaged correctly (gear selector between
If the engine speed is too low or too high,
jams, etc.). two positions).
the selected gear flashes for a few
With the engine at idle, parking brake released ►  Place the selector "correctly" at a position.
seconds, then the gear actually engaged is
and position D, M or R selected, the vehicle
shown.
moves as soon as you take your foot off
When the vehicle is stationary or moving very
Switching off the vehicle
the brake pedal (even without pressing the Before switching off the engine, select position
slowly, the gearbox automatically selects gear
accelerator). P then apply the parking brake to immobilise
M1.
the vehicle, unless this is set to automatic mode
As a safety precaution, never leave the
(with electric parking brake).
vehicle with the engine running and the To preserve the brakes while descending
Check that mode P has been engaged and that
doors closed. a steep incline, use engine braking to
the electric parking brake has been applied
reduce your speed (change down or select a
automatically; if not, apply it manually.
lower gear).
Manual operation Keeping the brake pedal pressed
The corresponding indicator lamps in the
►  With the selector in position D, press selector and the electric parking brake control
continuously for long periods can overheat
button M to enable 6- or 8-speed lever must be on, as well as those on the
the brakes, with the risk of damaging the
sequential gear changing. instrument panel.
braking system or making it inoperative.
The indicator lamp for the button comes on. Only use the brakes when necessary, to slow A point of resistance may be noticed
►  Operate the "+" or "-" steering mounted or stop the vehicle. when moving to position P.
controls. If the selector is not in position P, when the
M appears and the engaged gears are driver's door is opened or approximately 45
Depending on the road configuration
shown in succession on the instrument seconds after the ignition is switched off,
(e.g. mountainous road), manual
panel. an audible signal sounds and a message
operation may be preferable.
►  You can revert to automatic operation at any appears.
Automatic operation may not always be
time by pressing button M again. ►  Return the drive selector to position P;
suitable, and does not enable engine braking.
The indicator lamp for the button goes off. the audible signal stops and the message
In manual mode, there is no need to disappears.
release the accelerator pedal while
changing gear.

148
 Driving

When positioned on a steep slope with a

loaded vehicle, depress the brake
If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox,
do not try to start the engine by pushing
N. Neutral
To move the vehicle with the ignition off and
6
pedal, select position P, apply the parking the vehicle. so allow it to free-wheel.
brake, unless it is set to automatic mode (with For more information on Free-wheeling, refer
electric parking brake), then release the brake to the corresponding section.
pedal. Drive selector (Electric) D. Drive (automatic forward gear)
B. Brake (regenerative braking)
In all circumstances, ensure that the Button for changing to Drive/automatic
selector is in position P before leaving forward gear mode with regenerative braking
your vehicle. function (the button lights up to indicate that it
is activated).

Malfunction
When the ignition is on, a message appears on
Information displayed on
the instrument panel to indicate a fault with the the instrument panel
gearbox. When the ignition is switched on, the drive
In this case, the gearbox goes into back-up selector status is displayed on the instrument
mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel a panel:
significant jolt (without risk to the gearbox) when The drive selector is a pulse selector with a
P : Park.
changing from P to R and from N to R. regenerative braking function.
R : Reverse.
Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h), local speed The drive selector provides traction control
N : Neutral.
restrictions permitting. based on the driving style, the road profile and
D : Drive (automatic forward gear).
Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer the vehicle load.
B : Brake (automatic forward gear with
or a qualified workshop. With regenerative braking activated, it also
regenerative braking function activated).
manages engine braking when the accelerator
There is a risk of damaging the gearbox:
–  If the accelerator and brake pedals are
pedal is released. Operation
P. Park
depressed simultaneously. ►  Move the selector by pressing it forwards
Button for parking the vehicle: the front
–  In the event of a battery failure, forcing the (N or R) or rearwards (N or D) once or twice,
wheels are locked (the button lights up to
selector from position P to another position. passing the point of resistance if necessary.
indicate that it is activated).
For example, to change from P to R (with your
R. Reverse
foot on the brake pedal), either push forwards
To engage reverse gear, with your foot on the
brake pedal.

149
 Driving

twice without passing the point of resistance or With the brake pedal When the message disappears, the selected
push just once, passing the point of resistance. When the brake pedal is depressed, the mode is activated and remains indicated on the
intelligent braking system automatically recovers instrument panel (except Normal mode).
Regenerative braking some of the energy and uses it to recharge the Each time the ignition is switched on, Normal
With the Brake function and when traction battery. mode is selected by default.
decelerating This energy recovery also reduces use of the Normal
The Brake function emulates engine braking, brake pads, thereby limiting their wear. This optimises the driving range and dynamic
slowing the vehicle with no need to depress the The driver may experience a different performance.
brake pedal. The vehicle slows more quickly sensation when depressing the brake To obtain maximum torque and power, depress
when the driver releases the accelerator pedal. pedal compared to a vehicle without the accelerator pedal fully.
The energy recovered when the accelerator regenerative braking. Eco
pedal is released is then used to partially
Optimises energy consumption, by reducing
recharge the traction battery, thereby increasing
the output of the heating and air conditioning
the vehicle's driving range. Driving modes (Electric) (without actually deactivating them) and limiting
The resulting deceleration of the vehicle Driving modes are selected using the following both motor torque and power.
does not cause the brake lamps to come control: Power
on.
Provides equivalent vehicle performance when
►  From mode D, press button B to activate/ fully laden (GVW) to when the vehicle is in
deactivate the function (the button lights up when Normal mode and when unladen.
the function is activated).
D on the instrument panel is replaced with B.
The system status is saved when the ignition is
Stop & Start
switched off. The Stop & Start function puts the engine
temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during
In some situations (e.g. battery full, phases when the vehicle is stopped (red lights,
extreme temperatures), the amount of queues, etc.). The engine restarts automatically
regenerative braking may be temporarily - START mode - as soon as the driver wishes to
limited, resulting in less deceleration. Pressing the control displays the modes on the move off again.
The driver must remain alert to traffic instrument panel and, depending on version, on Primarily designed for urban use, the function
conditions and must always be ready to use the screen with CITROËN Connect Nav. is intended to reduce fuel consumption and
the brake pedal. You cannot select a mode if the READY lamp
is off.

150
 Driving

exhaust emissions as well as the noise level

when stationary.
If the system has been deactivated in
STOP mode, the engine restarts
With an automatic gearbox: with the brake
pedal depressed or the gear selector in 6
The function does not affect the functionalities of immediately. position N, with the vehicle stationary.
the vehicle, in particular the braking. Time counter
Driving on flooded roads The system is reactivated automatically A time counter adds up the time spent in standby
Before entering into a flooded area, it is whenever the engine is started by the during the journey. It is reset to zero every time
strongly recommended that you deactivate driver. the ignition is switched on.
the Stop & Start system.
Special cases:
For more information on Driving Operation
recommendations, particularly on flooded The engine will not go into standby if all of the
roads, refer to the corresponding section. Main conditions for operation conditions for operation are not met and in the
–  The driver’s door must be closed. following cases.
–  The sliding side door must be closed. –  Steep slope (ascending or descending).
Deactivation/Reactivation
–  The driver's seat belt must be fastened. –  Vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h)
With/without audio system –  The level of charge in the battery must be since the last engine start (with the key or the
sufficient. START/STOP button).
–  The temperature of the engine must be within –  Needed to maintain a comfortable temperature
its nominal operating range. in the passenger compartment.
–  The outside temperature must be between –  Demisting active.
0°C and 35°C. In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes
for a few seconds, then goes off.
Putting the engine into standby
After the engine has restarted, STOP
(STOP mode)
mode is not available until the vehicle
The engine automatically enters standby mode
►  To deactivate or reactivate the system, press has reached a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
as soon as the driver indicates their intention to
this button. stop.
The indicator lamp is on when the system is During parking manoeuvres, STOP mode
With a manual gearbox: at speeds below 12
deactivated. is not available for a few seconds after
mph (20 km/h) or with the vehicle stationary
coming out of reverse gear or turning the
With touch screen (depending on engine), with the gear lever in
steering wheel.
neutral and the clutch pedal released.
The settings are changed via the vehicle
configuration menu.

151
 Driving

Restarting the engine (START mode) The warning lamp in this button flashes The system triggers an alert as soon as it
The engine automatically restarts as soon as the and a message appears, accompanied by detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one or
driver indicates the intention of moving off again. an audible signal. more tyres.
With a manual gearbox: with the clutch pedal Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
Under-inflation detection does not
fully depressed. qualified workshop.
replace the need for vigilance on the part
With an automatic gearbox: The vehicle stalls in STOP mode of the driver.
–  With the selector in position D or M: with the All of the instrument panel warning lamps come This system does not avoid the need to
brake pedal released. on if there is a fault. regularly check the tyre pressures (including
–  With the selector in position N and the brake Depending on version, a warning message the spare wheel) as well as before a long
pedal released: with the selector at D or M. may also be displayed, prompting you to place journey.
–  With the selector in position P and the brake the gear selector in position N and depress the Driving with under-inflated tyres, particularly
pedal depressed: with the selector at R, N, D brake pedal. in adverse conditions (heavy load, high
or M. ►  Switch off the ignition then start the engine speed, long journey):
–  Reverse gear engaged. again with the key or the "START/STOP" button. –  worsens road-holding,
–  lengthens braking distances,
Special cases 12 V battery
–  causes premature wear of the tyres,
The engine will restart automatically if all The Stop & Start system requires a
–  increases fuel consumption.
conditions for operation are met again and in the 12 V battery of specific technology and
following cases. specification.
All work must be carried out only by a The inflation pressures specified for the
–  With a manual gearbox: vehicle
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure
speed exceeds 16 mph (25 km/h) or 2 mph (3
label.
km/h) (depending on the engine).
For more information on the Identification
–  With an automatic gearbox, vehicle speed
exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h). Tyre under-inflation markings, refer to the corresponding section.

In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes

for a few seconds, then goes off.
detection Checking tyre pressures
This system automatically checks the pressures This check should be done when the
Malfunctions of the tyres while driving. tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or
It compares the information given by the wheel after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km) at
Depending on the vehicle’s equipment:
speed sensors with reference values, which moderate speeds).
In the event of a system malfunction, this
must be reinitialised every time the tyre Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures
warning lamp flashes on the instrument
pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed. shown on the label.
panel.

152
 Driving

Snow chains
The system does not have to be
Driving too slowly may not ensure
optimum monitoring.
Without audio system
6
reinitialised after fitting or removing snow The alert is not immediately triggered in the
chains. event of a sudden loss of pressure or tyre
blow-out. This is because analysis of the
Spare wheel values read by the wheel's speed sensors
The steel spare wheel does not have an can take several minutes.
under-inflation detection sensor. The alert may be delayed at speeds below
25 mph (40 km/h), or when adopting a sporty
driving mode.
Under-inflation alert ►  With the vehicle stationary, press this
button for about 3 seconds then release it.
This is signalled by the fixed illumination The alert is kept active until the system is Reinitialisation is confirmed by an audible signal.
of this warning lamp, accompanied by an reinitialised.
audible signal and, depending on equipment, the With audio system or touch screen
display of a message.
►  Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive Reinitialisation With the vehicle stationary, the
system is reinitialised via the
steering movements and avoid sudden braking. The system must be reinitialised after any vehicle configuration menu.
►  Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do adjustment to the pressure of one or more tyres,
so. and after changing one or more wheels. Malfunction
The loss of pressure detected may not Before reinitialising the system, make In the event of a malfunction, these
always cause visible deformation of the sure that the pressures of the four tyres warning lamps light up on the
tyre. are correct for the conditions of use of the instrument panel.
Do not rely on just a visual check. vehicle and conform to the values written on In this case, the tyre under-inflation monitoring
the tyre pressure label. function is no longer performed.
►  Using a compressor, such as the one in Check the pressures of the four tyres before Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
the temporary puncture repair kit, check the performing the reinitialisation. qualified workshop.
pressures of all four tyres when cold. The system does not advise if a pressure is
►  If it is not possible to carry out this check incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.
immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed.
►  In the event of a puncture, use the
temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel
(depending on equipment).

153
 Driving

Driving and manoeuvring the whole manoeuvre, in particular using the

mirrors.
In the event of a windscreen replacement,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
aids - General workshop to recalibrate the camera;
recommendations Radar(s) otherwise, the operation of the associated
The operation of the radar(s), along with driving aids may be disrupted.
Driving and manoeuvring aids cannot, in any associated functions, may be affected
any circumstances, replace the need for by the accumulation of dirt (e.g. mud, ice), Other cameras
vigilance on the part of the driver. in poor weather conditions (e.g. heavy rain, The images from the camera(s)
The driver must comply with the Highway snow), or if the bumpers are damaged. displayed on the touch screen or on the
Code, must remain in control of the vehicle in If the front bumper is to be repainted, contact instrument panel may be distorted by the
all circumstances and must be able to retake a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop; terrain.
control of it at all times. The driver must adapt certain types of paint could interfere with the In the presence of areas in shade, or in
the speed to climactic conditions, traffic and operation of the radar(s). conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate
the state of the road. lighting, the image may be darkened and with
It is the driver's responsibility to constantly lower contrast.
check the traffic, to assess the relative Obstacles may appear further away than they
distances and speeds of other vehicles and to actually are.
anticipate their movements before indicating
and changing lane. Sensors
The systems cannot exceed the limits of the Driving aids camera
The operation of the sensors, as well as
laws of physics. This camera and its associated functions
any associated functions, may be disrupted
may be impaired or not work if the windscreen
by noise pollution such as that emitted by
area in front of the camera is dirty, misty,
Driving aids noisy vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries,
frosty, covered with snow, damaged or
You should hold the steering wheel pneumatic drills), by the accumulation of
masked by a sticker.
with both hands, always use the interior and snow or dead leaves on the road or in the
In humid and cold weather, demist the
exterior rear view mirrors, always keep the event of damaged bumpers and mirrors.
windscreen regularly.
feet close to the pedals and take a break When reverse gear is engaged, an audible
Poor visibility (inadequate street lighting,
every two hours. signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors
heavy rain, thick fog, snowfall), dazzle
may be dirty.
(headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low sun,
Manoeuvring aids A front or rear impact to the vehicle can
reflections on a damp road, leaving a tunnel,
The driver must always check the upset the sensors’ settings, which is not
alternating shade and light) can also impair
surroundings of the vehicle before and during detection performance.

154
 Driving

always detected by the system: distance

measurements may be distorted.
units of speed so that it complies with what is
authorised locally.
C. If the vehicle is so equipped, inter-vehicle
distance information, automatic emergency
6
The sensors do not systematically detect In case of doubt, contact a CITROËN dealer braking alerts and navigation instructions.
obstacles that are too low (pavements, studs) or a qualified workshop. D. If the vehicle is so equipped, speed limit
or too thin (trees, posts, wire fences). information.
Certain obstacles located in the sensors’ blind
spots may not be detected or may no longer Head-up display For more information on Navigation,
be detected during the manoeuvre. refer to the Audio equipment and
System which projects various information onto a
Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound telematics section.
smoked blade placed in the driver's field of vision
waves: pedestrians may not be detected.
to avoid the driver having to take their eyes off

Maintenance
the road. Selectors
Clean the bumpers and door mirrors and Information displayed
the field of vision of the cameras regularly.
When washing your vehicle at high pressure, during operation
direct the spray from at least 30 cm away
from the radar, sensors and cameras.

Mats
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with the operation of
the speed limiter or cruise control.
To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:
–  Ensure that the mat is secured correctly.
–  Never fit one mat on top of another.
1. On.
Units of speed Once the system has been activated, the 2. Off (long press).
Ensure that the units of speed displayed following information is grouped together in the 3. Brightness adjustment.
in the instrument panel (mph or km/h) are head-up display: 4. Display height adjustment.
those for the country you are driving in. A. The speed of your vehicle.
If this is not the case, when the vehicle is B. Cruise control/speed limiter information.
stationary, set the display to the required

155
 Driving

Activation/Deactivation When stationary or while driving, no Programming

►  With the engine running, press button 1 to objects should be placed around the
The speed thresholds can be set in the
activate the system and deploy the projection projection blade (or in its recess) so as not to
vehicle configuration menu using the
blade. impede its movement and correct operation.
touch screen.
►  Select the system for which you want to
In certain extreme weather conditions memorise new speed settings:
(rain and/or snow, bright sunshine, etc.), –  speed limiter
the head-up display may not be legible or
may suffer temporary interference. or
Some sunglasses may hamper reading of the –  cruise control.
information.
To clean the projection blade, use a clean,
soft cloth (such as a spectacles cloth or
microfibre cloth). Do not use a dry or abrasive
cloth, or detergent or solvent products, due to
►  Press and hold button 2 to deactivate the the risk of scratching the projection blade or
system and retract the projection blade. damaging the non-reflective coating.
The state of the system is saved when the
engine is switched off and restored on restarting. This system operates when the engine is
running, and the settings are saved when
Adjusting the height the ignition is switched off.
►  With the engine running, adjust the display to ►  Press the button corresponding to the speed
the desired height using the buttons 4: setting you want to change.
•  up to move the display up, Memorising speeds ►  Enter the new value using the numerical
•  down to move the display down. keypad and confirm.
This function allows you to save speed
settings which are then used to set the two ►  Confirm to record the changes and quit the
Brightness adjustment
systems: the speed limiter (limits the speed menu.
►  With the engine running, adjust the
of the vehicle) or cruise control (vehicle Memorised speeds are recalled
brightness of the information display using the
cruising speed). by pressing this button.
buttons 3:
You can save 6 speed settings for each of the
•  on the "sun" to increase the brightness,
two systems.
•  on the "moon" to decrease the brightness.

156
 Driving

Speed Limit Recognition

and Recommendation
For the system to work correctly when
changing country, the speed unit shown on
Head-up display 6
the instrument panel must correspond to that
of the country you are driving in.
Refer to the General recommendations
on the use of driving and
Automatic road sign detection is a driving
manoeuvring aids.
aid system and does not always display
speed limits correctly.
The speed limit signs present on the road
always take priority over the information
displayed by the system.
The system is designed to detect signs that
conform to the Vienna Convention on road 1. Speed limit indication
signs.

Speed display
This system displays the maximum authorised Activation/Deactivation
speed on the instrument panel, according to The settings are changed via the
the speed limits in the country in which you are vehicle configuration menu.
driving, using:
–  Speed limit signs detected by the camera. Information displayed on
–  Speed limit information from the navigation the instrument panel The system is active but is not detecting speed
system’s mapping.
limit information.
Navigation mapping should be regularly
updated in order to receive accurate
speed limit information from the system.

The units for the speed limit (mph or

km/h) depend on the country you are
On detection of speed limit information, the
driving in.
system displays the value.
This should be taken into account to ensure
you observe the speed limit.

157
 Driving

Storing the speed setting Information displayed on the

instrument panel

The driver can, if desired, adjust the

speed of the vehicle according to the
In addition to Speed Limit Recognition and
information given by the system.
Recommendation, the driver can select the
speed displayed as a speed setting for the speed
Operating limits limiter or cruise control using the speed limiter or
The system does not take account of reduced cruise control 'store' button.
speed limits, especially those imposed in the
following cases: For more information on the Speed
–  Poor weather (rain, snow). limiter, Cruise control or Adaptive Head-up display
–  Atmospheric pollution. cruise control, refer to the corresponding
– Towing. sections.
–  Driving with a space-saver type spare wheel
or snow chains fitted. Steering-mounted controls
–  Tyre repaired using the temporary puncture
repair kit.
–  Young drivers.
The system may not display the speed limit if it
does not detect a speed limit sign within a preset
period and in the following situations:
–  Road signs that are obstructed, non-standard,
damaged or bent. 3. Speed limit indication.
1. Speed limiter/cruise control mode selection
–  Obsolete or incorrect maps. 4. Request to memorise the speed.
2. Memorise the speed setting
5. Current speed setting.

158
 Driving

Storing the speed setting Speed limiter Steering-mounted control 6

Refer to the General recommendations
on the use of driving and
manoeuvring aids.

►  Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control. This system prevents the vehicle from
The speed limiter/cruise control information is exceeding the speed programmed by the
displayed. driver (speed setting).
Upon detecting a sign suggesting a new speed The speed limiter is switched on manually.
setting, the system displays the value and The minimum speed setting is 19 mph (30 km/h).
"MEM" flashes for a few seconds, prompting you The speed setting remains in the system
to save it as a new speed setting. memory when the ignition is switched off.

If there is a difference of less than 6 mph For more information on this

(9 km/h) between the speed setting and button and the Adaptive cruise
the speed displayed by the Speed Limit control, refer to the corresponding section.
Recognition and Recommendation, the 1. ON (LIMIT position) / OFF (position 0)
"MEM" symbol is not displayed. For more information on 2. Reduce the speed setting
Memorising speeds, refer to the 3. Increase the speed setting
Depending on the road conditions, several corresponding section. 4. Pause / resume speed limiter with the speed
speeds may be displayed. setting previously stored
►  Press button 2once to save the suggested 5. Depending on version:
For more information on Speed limit
speed value. Display of the speed thresholds saved using
recognition and memorising the speed
A message is displayed, confirming the request. Memorising speeds
limit in particular, refer to the corresponding
►  Press button 2again to confirm and save the or
section.
new speed setting. Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit
The display then reverts to its previous state. Recognition and Recommendation (MEM
display)
6. Display and adjustment of the programmed
inter-vehicle distance
For more information on Memorising speeds
or the Speed Limit Recognition and

159
 Driving

Recommendation, refer to the corresponding Switching on/Pausing and Recommendation, as shown on the
sections. instrument panel:
►  Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "LIMIT" position
►  Press button 5 once; a message is displayed
to select speed limiter mode; the function is
Information displayed on paused.
to confirm the memorisation request.
the instrument panel ►  If the limit speed setting is suitable (most
►  Press button 5 again to save the suggested
speed.
recent speed setting programmed in the system),
The speed is immediately shown on the
press button 4 to switch the speed limiter on.
instrument panel as the new speed setting.
►  Pressing button 4 again temporarily pauses
the function.
Temporarily exceeding the
Adjusting the limit speed programmed speed
setting ►  To temporarily exceed the programmed
speed threshold, fully depress the accelerator
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in
pedal.
order to set the speed.
Head-up display To modify the limit speed setting based on the
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and
the displayed programmed speed flashes.
vehicle’s current speed:
If it is exceeded for a prolonged period of time,
►  Briefly press button 2 or 3 to change the
an audible warning is triggered.
value in steps of + or - 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Simply release the accelerator pedal to return to
►  Press and hold button 2 or 3 to change the
below the programmed speed.
value in steps of + or - 5 mph (8 km/h).
When the limit speed is exceeded but this is not
To change the limit speed setting using
due to action by the driver (in case of a steep
memorised speeds, via the touch screen:
slope, for example), an audible signal triggers
►  Press button 5 to display the memorised
immediately.
speed settings.
Once the speed of the vehicle returns to the
►  Press the touch screen button for the desired
programmed setting, the speed limiter functions
speed setting.
again: the display of the programmed speed
6. Speed limiter on/pause indication. The selection screen closes after a few
setting becomes fixed again.
7. Speed limiter mode selection indication. moments.
8. Speed setting value. This setting becomes the new limit speed.
To modify the cruise speed setting based on the
speed suggested by the Speed Limit Recognition

160
 Driving

Switching off
►  Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position:
On steep climbs or when towing, the set
speed may not be reached or maintained.
Cruise control 6
the display of information on the speed limiter Refer to the General recommendations
disappears. Exceeding the programmed speed on the use of driving and
setting manoeuvring aids and to Cruise control
Malfunction You can temporarily exceed the speed - particular recommendations.
setting by pressing the accelerator pedal (the
programmed speed flashes). This system automatically maintains the
To return to the speed setting, release the vehicle’s speed at the value programmed
accelerator pedal (when the set speed is by the driver (speed setting), without the use of
Dashes are displayed (flashing, initially, then
reached again, the displayed speed stops the accelerator pedal.
fixed) in the event of a speed limiter malfunction.
flashing). Cruise control is switched on manually.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer
It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph
or a qualified workshop.
(40 km/h).
Operating limits
With a manual gearbox, third gear or higher must
Cruise control - particular Never use the system in the following
situations:
be engaged.

recommendations –  In an urban area with the risk of

With an automatic gearbox, mode D or second
gear or higher in mode M must be engaged.
pedestrians crossing the road.
With a drive selector, mode D or B must be
For the safety of everyone, only use the –  In heavy traffic (except versions with the
engaged.
cruise control where the driving Stop & Go function).
conditions allow running at a constant speed –  On winding or steep roads. Cruise control remains active after
and keeping an adequate safety distance. –  On slippery or flooded roads. changing gear, regardless of the gearbox
Remain vigilant when the cruise control –  In poor weather conditions. type, on engines fitted with Stop & Start.
is activated. If you hold one of the speed –  Driving on a speed circuit.
setting modification buttons down, a very –  Driving on a rolling road. Switching off the ignition cancels any
rapid change in the speed of your vehicle may –  When using snow chains, non-slip covers speed setting.
occur. or studded tyres.
When descending a steep hill, the cruise
control system cannot prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the set speed. Brake if
necessary to control the speed of your
vehicle.

161
 Driving

Steering mounted control Information displayed on ►  Press button 2 or 3 to activate cruise control
and save a speed setting when the vehicle has
the instrument panel reached the desired speed; the vehicle’s current
speed is saved as the speed setting.
►  Release the accelerator pedal.
►  Pressing button 4 temporarily pauses the
function.
►  Pressing button 4 again restores operation of
the cruise control (ON).

Cruise control can also be paused

temporarily:
1. ON (CRUISE position) / OFF (position 0)
2. Activate cruise control at the current speed /
Head-up display –  by pressing the brake pedal.
–  by pressing the clutch pedal with a manual
decrease speed setting gearbox (depending on the engine fitted).
3. Activate cruise control at the current speed / –  automatically, if the electronic stability
increase speed setting control (ESC) system is triggered.
4. Pause / resume cruise control with the speed
setting previously saved
5. Depending on version: Modifying the cruise speed
Display the speed thresholds saved using the setting
Memorising speeds function
Cruise control must be active.
or
To modify the cruise speed setting, based on the
Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit
current speed of the vehicle:
Recognition and Recommendation (MEM
►  Briefly press button 2 or 3 to change the
display) 6. Cruise control pause/resume indication. value in steps of + or - 1 mph (km/h).
For more information on Memorising speeds 7. Cruise control mode selection indication. ►  Press and hold button 2 or 3 to change the
or the Speed Limit Recognition and 8. Speed setting value. value in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h).
Recommendation, refer to the corresponding
Pressing and holding button 2 or
sections. Switching on/pausing 3 results in a rapid change in the speed
►  Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position of the vehicle.
to select cruise control mode; the function is
paused.

162
 Driving

As a precaution, we recommend setting

a cruise speed fairly close to the current
To return to the programmed speed, simply
release the accelerator pedal.
Adaptive Cruise Control 6
speed of your vehicle, to avoid any sudden Once the vehicle has returned to the Refer to the General recommendations
acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle. programmed speed, cruise control takes over on the use of driving and
again and the programmed speed setting stops manoeuvring aids and to Cruise control
To change the cruise speed setting using flashing. - particular recommendations.
memorised speed settings and from the touch
screen: When descending a steep hill, the cruise
This system automatically maintains the
►  Press button 5 to display the memorised control system cannot prevent the
speed of your vehicle at a value which
speed settings. vehicle from exceeding the programmed
you set (speed setting), while keeping a safe
►  Press the touch screen button for the desired speed.
distance from the vehicle in front (target vehicle),
speed setting. You may have to brake to control the speed of
and which has been set beforehand by the
The selection screen closes after a few your vehicle. In this case, the cruise control is
driver. The system controls the vehicle's
moments. automatically paused.
acceleration and deceleration automatically
This setting becomes the new cruise speed. To activate the system again, with the vehicle
using only engine braking (as if the driver had
To modify the cruise speed setting using the speed above 25 mph (40 km/h), press button
pressed the "-" minus button).
speed suggested by the Speed Limit Recognition 4.
and Recommendation shown on the instrument
panel:
►  Press button 5 once; a message is displayed
Switching off
►  Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0” position: the
to confirm the memorisation request.
cruise control information disappears from the To do this, it uses a radar located in the front
►  Press button 5 again to save the suggested
screen. bumper.
speed.
The speed is immediately shown on the
instrument panel as the new speed setting.
Malfunction Primarily designed for driving on main
roads and motorways, this system only
works with moving vehicles driving in the
Temporarily exceeding the same direction as your vehicle.
programmed speed Dashes are displayed (flashing, initially, then
If needed (when overtaking, for example), fixed) in the event of a cruise control system If the driver operates a direction indicator
it is possible to exceed the programmed malfunction. to overtake a slower vehicle, the cruise
speed by pressing the accelerator pedal. Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer control allows the vehicle to temporarily
Cruise control is temporarily overridden and the or a qualified workshop. approach the vehicle in front to assist the
programmed speed setting flashes.

163
 Driving

overtaking manoeuvre, without ever 5. Depending on version: (without automatic regulation of the inter-
exceeding the speed setting. Display the speed thresholds saved using the vehicle safety distance).
Memorising speeds function
►  Press buttons 2 or 3: the current speed
Some vehicles present on the road may or
becomes the speed setting (minimum 25 mph
not be properly seen or may be Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit
(40 km/h)) and the cruise control is immediately
misinterpreted by the radar (e.g. a lorry), Recognition and Recommendation (MEM
activated.
which may lead to a poor assessment of display)
►  Press 3 to increase or 2 to decrease the
distance and lead to the vehicle accelerating 6. Display and adjustment of the distance
speed setting (in steps of 5 mph (5 km/h) if the
or braking inappropriately. setting to the vehicle in front
button is kept depressed).

Steering-mounted controls Use Pressing and holding either button 2 or

3 results in a rapid change in the speed
Activating the system (paused) of the vehicle.
The adaptive cruise control must be selected in
the "Driving/Vehicle" menu. Pausing/resuming cruise control
►  Turn the knob 1 downwards into the CRUISE ►  Press 4 or depress the brake pedal. To
position with the engine running. The cruise pause cruise control, it is also possible to:
control is ready for operation. •  Shift from mode D to N,
Starting cruise control and selecting a •  Depress the clutch pedal for more than 10
speed seconds.
•  Press the electric parking brake control.
The vehicle speed must be between 25 and
►  Press 4 to restart cruise control. Cruise
1. ON (CRUISE position)/OFF (position 0) 93 mph (40 and 150 km/h).
control may have been paused automatically:
2. Activation of cruise control at the current With a manual gearbox, third or fourth gear or
•  When the inter-vehicle distance threshold is
speed/decrease speed setting higher must be engaged.
reached.
3. Activation of cruise control at the current With an automatic gearbox, mode D or second
•  When the distance between your vehicle and
speed/increase speed setting gear or higher in mode M must be engaged.
the one in front becomes too short.
4. Pause/resume cruise control with the speed With a drive selector, mode D or B must be
•  When the vehicle starts moving too slowly or
setting previously saved engaged.
the vehicle in front starts moving too slowly.
If the speed setting is above 93 mph •  When the ESC system is triggered.
(150 km/h), the adaptive cruise control
When the driver attempts to reactivate
switches to standard cruise control mode
cruise control, after the function has been

164
 Driving

paused, the message "Activation not possible,

unsuitable conditions" is briefly displayed if
Deactivating the system
►  Turn the knob 1 upwards into position 0
9. Speed setting value.
6
reactivation is not possible (safety conditions (OFF). For more information on the Head-up
not met). display, refer to the corresponding
Information displayed on section.
Using the Speed Limit Recognition and
Recommendation function or speed limit the instrument panel
sign memorisation to modify the speed Messages and alerts
setting.
The display of these messages or alerts
►  Press 5 to accept the speed setting is not sequential.
proposed by the system on the instrument panel
or touch screen, then press again to confirm. “Cruise control paused” or “Cruise control
suspended” following a brief acceleration
To prevent any sudden acceleration or
by the driver.
deceleration of the vehicle, select a
“Cruise control active”, no vehicle
speed setting fairly close to the current speed
detected.
of your vehicle.
“Cruise control active”, vehicle detected.
Changing the inter-vehicle distance
Head-up display
“Cruise control active and speed
►  Press 6 to display the distance setting adjusted”, vehicle detected too close or at
thresholds ("Distant", "Normal" or "Close"), then a slower speed.
press again to select a threshold. “Cruise control active and speed
After a few seconds, the option is accepted and adjusted”, automatic deactivation
will be memorised when the ignition is switched imminent following a cruise control limit being
off. reached.
Temporarily exceeding the speed setting “Cruise control paused”, automatic
►  Depress the accelerator pedal. Distance deactivation following speed limit
monitoring and cruise control are deactivated as adjustment being exceeded and no reaction from
long as you continue to accelerate. The speed the driver.
on the instrument panel flashes. 7. Cruise control pause/resume indication.
8. Indication of selection of cruise control mode,
or vehicle speed adjustment phase.

165
 Driving

Operating limits setting and the speed of the vehicle in front

becomes too great.
The regulation range is limited to a maximum
difference of 19 mph (30 km/h) between the
cruise speed setting and the speed of the If the difference between the
vehicle in front. programmed speed setting and the
Above this, the system pauses itself if the safety –  Vehicles not running in the middle of the lane. speed of the vehicle in front is too great, the
distance becomes too short. speed cannot be adjusted: the cruise control
The adaptive cruise control uses only engine is automatically deactivated.
braking to slow the vehicle. Consequently the
vehicle loses speed slowly, as when releasing
the accelerator pedal.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction with the adaptive
The system is paused automatically:
cruise control, you will be alerted by an audible
–  if the vehicle in front slows down too much or
signal and the display of the message "Driving
too suddenly, and the driver does not brake,
–  Vehicles entering a corner. aid functions fault".
–  if a vehicle comes between your vehicle and
–  Vehicles changing lane at the last moment. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
the vehicle in front,
Reactivate cruise control when conditions permit. qualified workshop.
–  if the system does not slow the vehicle enough
to continue to maintain a safe distance, for Cases where the driver is urged to take back
example when descending a steep hill. control immediately:
–  When a vehicle cuts in sharply between your
Active Safety Brake with
Cases of non-detection by the radar:
–  Stationary vehicles (traffic jam, breakdown, vehicle and the one in front. Collision Risk Alert and
etc.). –  Excessively sharp deceleration of the vehicle
in front of you.
Intelligent emergency
–  Vehicles driving in the opposite direction.
When the driver must suspend the cruise The adaptive cruise control operates by
braking assistance
control system: day and night, in fog or moderate rainfall. Refer to the General recommendations
on the use of driving and
The system does not act on the braking manoeuvring aids.
system, but works only with engine
braking.
The regulation range is limited: there will
no longer be any adjustment of speed if the
–  When following a narrow vehicle. difference between the programmed speed

166
 Driving

This system:
–  warns the driver that their vehicle is at risk of
As soon as the system detects a
potential obstacle, it prepares the braking
It is possible that warnings are not given,
are given too late or seem unjustified. 6
collision with the vehicle in front. circuit in case automatic braking is needed. The driver must always stay in control of the
–  reduces the vehicle's speed to avoid a This may cause a slight noise and a slight vehicle and be prepared to react at any time
collision or limit its severity. sensation of deceleration. to avoid an accident.
This system is comprised of three functions:
–  Collision Risk Alert.
–  Intelligent emergency braking assistance
Operating conditions and Following an impact, the system is
automatically deactivated.
(iEBA). limits Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
–  Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency Vehicle moving forward. qualified workshop.
braking). ESC system operational.
Seat belts fastened for all passengers.
Stabilised speed on roads with few bends.
Collision Risk Alert
In the following cases, deactivating the system This function warns the driver that their vehicle
via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised: is at risk of a collision with the vehicle in front, or
–  Towing a trailer. with a pedestrian or cyclist present in their traffic
–  Carrying long objects on roof bars or roof rack. lane.
–  Vehicle with snow chains fitted.
–  Before using an automatic car wash, with the
Modifying the alert trigger threshold
engine running. This trigger threshold determines the sensitivity
–  Before placing the vehicle on a rolling road in with which the function warns of the risk of
a workshop. collision.
The vehicle has a camera located at the top of –  Towed vehicle, engine running. The threshold is set via the vehicle
the windscreen and, depending on version, a –  Damaged front bumper. configuration menu with the audio
radar located in the front bumper. –  Following an impact to the windscreen close to system or touch screen.
the detection camera. ►  Select one of the three pre-defined
This system does not replace the need thresholds: "Far", "Normal" or "Close".
for vigilance on the part of the driver. It can be dangerous to drive if the brake The last threshold selected is memorised when
This system is designed to assist the driver lamps are not in perfect working order. the ignition is switched off.
and improve road safety.
It is the driver's responsibility to continuously Operation
monitor traffic conditions in accordance with Depending on the degree of risk of collision
applicable driving regulations. detected by the system and the alert trigger

167
 Driving

threshold chosen by the driver, several different This assistance will only be provided if the driver –  The vehicle's speed does not exceed 50 mph
levels of alert may be triggered and displayed on presses the brake pedal. (80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle or a cyclist
the instrument panel. is detected.
The system takes account of the vehicle Active Safety Brake –  The vehicle's speed is between 6 mph and
dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and the one 53 mph (10 km/h and 85 km/h) (versions with
in front, the environmental conditions and the camera only) or 87 mph (140 km/h) (versions
operation of the vehicle (actions on the pedals, with camera and radar) when a moving vehicle
steering wheel, etc.) to trigger the alert at the is detected.
most relevant moment. This warning lamp flashes (for
Level 1 (orange): visual alert only, approximately 10 seconds) as soon as
warning that the vehicle in front is very the function applies the vehicle’s brakes.
close. With an automatic gearbox, in the event of
The message "Vehicle close" is displayed. automatic emergency braking bringing the
Level 2 (red): visual and audible alert, vehicle to a complete stop, keep the brake pedal
warning that a collision is imminent. depressed to prevent the vehicle from moving
The message "Brake!" is displayed. off again.
With a manual gearbox, in the event of automatic
Where the speed of your vehicle is too
emergency braking bringing the vehicle to a
high approaching another vehicle, the
complete stop, the engine may stall.
first level of alert may not be displayed: the
level 2 alert may be displayed directly. The driver can maintain control of the
Important: the level 1 alert is not displayed This function, also called automatic emergency vehicle at any time by firmly turning the
when there is a stationary obstacle or braking, intervenes following the alerts if the steering wheel and/or firmly depressing the
when the "Near" trigger threshold has been driver does not react quickly enough and does accelerator pedal.
selected. not operate the vehicle's brakes.
It aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid a
The brake pedal may vibrate slightly
collision where the driver fails to react.
Intelligent emergency while the function is operating.
If the vehicle comes to a complete stop,
braking assistance (iEBA) Operation
automatic braking is maintained for 1 to 2
The system operates subject to the following
If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid seconds.
conditions:
a collision, this system will provide additional
–  The vehicle's speed does not exceed 37 mph
braking, within the limits of the laws of physics.
(60 km/h) when a pedestrian is detected.

168
 Driving

Deactivation / Activation
By default, the system is automatically activated
Activation/Deactivation 6
at every engine start. With/without audio system
It is set via the vehicle
configuration menu.
Deactivation of the system is signalled by System that uses a camera to recognise
the illumination of this warning lamp, continuous or broken lines on traffic lanes and
accompanied by the display of a message. triggers an alert if the vehicle wanders off line.
If the direction indicator is not used at speeds
Malfunction above 50 mph (80 km/h) and there is a risk of
In the event of a malfunction, this warning one of these lines on the road surface being
lamp comes on on the instrument panel, crossed, the system triggers the alert. ►  To activate or deactivate the system, press
accompanied by the display of a message and This system is particularly useful on motorways this button.
an audible signal. and main roads. The indicator lamp is on when the system is
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a activated.
qualified workshop. Detection - Alert
If these warning lamps come on after the You are alerted by the flashing of this With touch screen
engine has been switched off and then warning lamp in the instrument panel, The settings are changed via the vehicle
restarted, contact a CITROËN dealer or a accompanied by an audible signal. configuration menu.
qualified workshop to have the system checked.
These warning lamps light up on No warning is transmitted while the Malfunction
the instrument panel to indicate direction indicator is active and for
Depending on the vehicle’s equipment:
that the driver's and/or front passenger's seat approximately 20 seconds after the direction
The indicator lamp in this button flashes.
belt is not fastened (depending on version). indicator is switched off.
or
Lane departure warning / The button flashes and a fault
appears.
system Consult a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Refer to the General recommendations
on the use of driving and
manoeuvring aids.

169
 Driving

Detection may be impeded: The state of the system is memorised when the
–  If the markings on the ground are worn ignition is switched off.
and not clearly contrasted against the road
surface. Coffee Break Alert
–  If the windscreen is dirty. The system triggers an alert as soon as it
–  In certain extreme weather conditions: detects that the driver has not taken a
fog, heavy rain, snow, shade, bright sunlight break after two hours of driving at a speed above
or direct exposure to the sun (e.g. low sun, 40 mph (65 km/h).
leaving a tunnel). This alert is issued via the display of a message
encouraging the driver to take a break,
accompanied by an audible signal.
Distraction detection If the driver does not follow this advice, the alert
Using a camera placed at the top of the
windscreen, the system assesses the
is repeated hourly until the vehicle is stopped.
driver's level of vigilance, fatigue or distraction by
Refer to the General recommendations The system resets itself if one of the following
identifying variations in trajectory compared to
on the use of driving and conditions is met:
the lane markings.
manoeuvring aids. –  With the engine running, the vehicle has been
This system is particularly suited to fast roads
stationary for more than 15 minutes.
Depending on version, the function consists of (speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)).
–  The ignition has been switched off for a few
either the "Coffee Break Alert" system alone At a first-level alert, the driver is warned by the
minutes.
or combined with the "Driver Attention Alert" “Take care!” message, accompanied by an
–  The driver's seat belt is unfastened and their
system. audible signal.
door is opened.
After three first-level alerts, the system triggers
These systems are in no way designed As soon as the speed of the vehicle a further alert with the message "Dangerous
to keep the driver awake or to prevent drops below 40 mph (65 km/h), the driving: take a break", accompanied by a more
the driver from falling asleep at the wheel. system goes into standby. pronounced audible signal.
It is the driver’s responsibility to stop if feeling The driving time is counted again once the
tired. In certain driving conditions (poor road
speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h).
Take a break if you are feeling tired or at least surface or strong winds), the system may
every 2 hours. give alerts independent of the driver's level of
Driver Attention Warning vigilance.
Depending on version, the "Coffee Break Alert"
Activation/Deactivation system is combined with the "Driver Attention
This function is set via the vehicle Warning" system.
configuration menu.

170
 Driving

The following situations may interfere

with the operation of the system or
–  you are driving on a straight or slightly curved
road, 6
prevent it from working: –  your vehicle is not towing a trailer, a caravan,
–  lane markings absent, worn, hidden (snow, etc.
mud) or multiple (roadworks);
–  close to the vehicle ahead (lane markings
not detected);
–  roads that are narrow, winding, etc. The warning is given by a fixed warning lamp
that appears in the door mirror on the side in
question:
Blind Spot Monitoring –  immediately, when being overtaken;
–  after a delay of about one second, when
Refer to the General recommendations overtaking a vehicle slowly.
on the use of driving and
manoeuvring aids. Operation
Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers
monitor the blind spots.
The alert is given by an orange warning lamp
coming on in the relevant door mirror, as soon as
a vehicle - car, lorry, bicycle - is detected.
The following conditions must be met for this:
–  all vehicles are moving in the same direction
and in adjacent lanes,
–  the speed of your vehicle must be between 7
and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h),
This system includes sensors, placed on the –  you overtake a vehicle with a speed difference
sides of the bumpers, and warns the driver of of less than 6 mph (10 km/h),
the potentially dangerous presence of another –  a vehicle overtakes you with a speed
vehicle (car, truck, motorcycle) in the blind spot difference of less than 16 mph (25 km/h),
areas of their vehicle (areas hidden from the –  the traffic is flowing normally,
driver's field of vision). –  overtaking a vehicle over a certain period of
time where the vehicle being overtaken remains
in the blind spot,

171
 Driving

Activation/Deactivation The warning lamp in this button flashes

and a message appears, accompanied by
With/without audio system an audible signal.
Consult a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.

Parking sensors
Refer to the General recommendations
on the use of driving and
manoeuvring aids.
►  To activate or deactivate the system, press
this button.
The indicator lamp is on when the system is
No alert will be given in the following situations:
activated.
–  in the presence of non-moving objects (parked
vehicles, safety barriers, street lamps, road With touch screen
signs, etc.),
The settings are changed via the vehicle
–  with vehicles moving in the opposite direction,
configuration menu.
–  driving on a winding road or sharp bends,
–  when overtaking or being overtaken by a very The system is automatically deactivated Using sensors located in the bumper, this
long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) which is both in the when towing with a towing device system signals the proximity of obstacles
rear blind spot and present in the driver’s front approved by CITROËN. (e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) present in
field of vision, their field of detection.
–  when overtaking quickly,
–  in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in Malfunction Rear parking sensors
front and behind are confused with a lorry or a Depending on the vehicle’s equipment: The system is switched on by engaging reverse
stationary object. gear, which is confirmed by an audible signal.
The system is switched off when disengaging
In the event of a fault, this or these warning reverse gear.
lamp(s) flash(es).
or

172
 Driving

Audible assistance Deactivation/Activation

Without audio system
6

This supplements the audible signal by

displaying bars on the screen that move
The function signals the presence of obstacles progressively nearer to the vehicle (green: more
present within the sensors’ detection zone. distant obstacles; yellow: close obstacles; red:
The proximity information is given by an very close obstacles).
intermittent audible signal, the frequency of When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger" ►  To deactivate or activate the system, press
which increases as the vehicle approaches the symbol is displayed on the screen. this button.
obstacle. The indicator lamp is on when the system is
When the distance between the vehicle and Front parking sensors deactivated.
the obstacle becomes less than about thirty With audio system or touch screen
Supplementing the rear parking sensors, the
centimetres, the audible signal becomes
front parking sensors are triggered when an The settings are changed via the
continuous.
obstacle is detected in front and the speed of the vehicle configuration menu.
The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left)
vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h).
allows you to identify the side on which the The rear parking sensors system will be
Front parking sensor operation is suspended if
obstacle is located. deactivated automatically if a trailer or
the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in
forward gear, if an obstacle is no longer detected bicycle carrier is connected to a towing device
Visual assistance installed in accordance with the
or the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
manufacturer's recommendations.
The sound emitted by the speaker (front
or rear) locates the obstacle relative to
the vehicle, in front or behind it. Operating limits
If the boot is heavily loaded, the vehicle may tilt,
affecting distance measurements.

173
 Driving

Malfunction Principle of operation

In the event of a malfunction when
changing into reverse gear, this warning
lamp lights up on the instrument panel,
accompanied by the display of a message and
an audible signal (short beep).
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.

Top Rear Vision Using the rear camera, the vehicle's close
Refer to the General recommendations surroundings are recorded during manoeuvres
on the use of driving and at low speed.
manoeuvring aids. An image from above your vehicle in its close
The screen is divided into two parts with a surroundings is reconstructed (represented
contextual view and a view from above the between the brackets) in real time and as the
vehicle in its close surroundings. manoeuvre progresses.
The parking sensors supplement the information It facilitates the alignment of your vehicle when
on the view from above the vehicle. parking and allows obstacles close to the vehicle
Various contextual views may be displayed: to be seen. It is automatically deleted if the
–  Standard view. vehicle remains stationary for too long.
–  180° view.
–  Zoom view. The display disappears above
AUTO mode is activated by default. approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
In this mode, the system chooses the best view The system is automatically deactivated
As soon as reverse gear is engaged with the
to display (standard or zoom). about 7 seconds after coming out of reverse
engine running, this system displays views of
You can change the type of view at any time or on opening a door or the boot.
your vehicle’s close surroundings on the touch
screen using a camera located at the rear of the during a manoeuvre.
vehicle. The system status is not saved when the ignition Activation
is switched off.
Activation is automatic on engaging reverse gear
at a speed lower than 6 mph (10 km/h).

174
 Driving

AUTO mode The blue lines 1 represent the width of your

vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their direction 6
changes according to the position of the steering
wheel.
The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm
from the rear bumper; the two blue lines 3 and 4
represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively.
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the
view selection menu.

You can choose the display mode at any time by Zoom view
pressing this area.
When the sub-menu is displayed, select one of This mode is activated by default.
the four views: Using sensors in the rear bumper, the automatic
"Standard view". view changes from the rear view (standard) to
the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is
"180° view". approached at the level of the red line (less than
30 cm) during a manoeuvre.
"Zoom view".
Standard view
"AUTO mode".

The function will be deactivated: The camera records the vehicle's surroundings
–  If a trailer is attached or a bicycle during the manoeuvre in order to create a
carrier is fitted on a towing device (vehicle view from above the rear of the vehicle in its
fitted with a towing device installed in line with near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be
the manufacturer's recommendations). manoeuvred around nearby obstacles.
–  Above about 6 mph (10 km/h). This view is available with AUTO mode or in the
–  When the boot is opened. view selection menu.
–  Upon changing out of reverse gear (the
image remains displayed for 7 seconds).
–  By pressing the white arrow in the upper- The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the
left corner of the touch screen. screen.

175
 Driving

Obstacles may appear further away than This view is only available via the view selection
they actually are. menu.
It is important to monitor the sides of the
vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the Quick start mode
mirrors.
Parking sensors also provide additional
information about the area around the vehicle.

180° view

This mode displays, as quickly as possible, the

contextual view (left-hand part) and the overhead
view of the vehicle.
A message is displayed advising you to check
your vehicle's surroundings before starting the
manoeuvre.

The 180° view facilitates reversing out of a

parking space, making it possible to see the
approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists.
This view is not recommended for carrying out a
complete manoeuvre.
It features 3 areas: left A, centre B and right C.

176
prefers

FILL UP WITH
CONFIDENCE
WITH TOTAL QUARTZ LUBRICANTS

For more than 50 years, TOTAL and CITROËN

have shared common values: excellence, creativity
and technological innovation.
It is in this same spirit that TOTAL has developed
a range of TOTAL QUARTZ lubricants adapted for
engines in CITROËN vehicles, making them ever
more fuel efficient and environmentally friendly.
TOTAL and CITROËN test the reliability and the
performance of their products under extreme
motorsport conditions.
Choose TOTAL QUARTZ lubricants when
servicing your vehicle; they are your assurance
of optimum engine life and performance.
 Practical information

Compatibility of fuels At temperatures below -15 °C (+5 °F) to avoid

problems starting, it is best to park the vehicle
Stop & Start
Never refuel with the engine in STOP
under shelter (heated garage). mode; you must switch off the ignition.

Diesel fuels conforming to the EN590, EN16734 Travelling abroad

and EN16709 standards and containing up to Certain fuels could damage your vehicle’s
Refuelling
7%, 10%, 20% and 30% fatty acid methyl ester engine. At least 8 litres of fuel must be added, in order to
respectively. The use of B20 or B30 fuels, even In certain countries, the use of a particular be registered by the fuel gauge.
occasionally, imposes special maintenance fuel may be required (specific octane rating, Opening the filler cap may create a noise caused
conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions". specific trade name, etc.) to ensure correct by an inrush of air. This is entirely normal and
operation of the engine. results from the sealing of the fuel system.
For all additional information, consult a dealer. To refuel in complete safety:
Paraffinic Diesel fuel conforming to the EN15940 ►  Always switch off the engine.
►  Unlock the vehicle using the Keyless Entry
standard.
Refuelling and Starting.
The use of any other type of (bio) fuel Fuel tank capacity: approximately 69 litres.
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, Reserve level: approximately 6 litres.
domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited (risk
of damage to the engine and fuel system). Low fuel level
When the low fuel level is reached,
The only Diesel fuel additives authorised one of these warning lamps lights
for use are those that meet the B715000 up on the instrument panel, accompanied by the
standard. display of a message and an audible signal.
When it first comes on, about 8 litres of fuel
Diesel at low temperature remain.
You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid
At temperatures below 0 °C (+32 °F), the
running out of fuel. ►  Open the fuel filler flap.
formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel
For more information on Running out of fuel
fuels could prevent the engine from operating
(Diesel), refer to the corresponding section.
correctly. In these temperature conditions, use
winter-type Diesel fuel and keep the fuel tank A small arrow by the warning lamp
more than 50 % full. indicates which side of the vehicle the
fuel filler flap is located on.

178
 Practical information

►  Put the filler cap back in place and close it by

turning to the right.
If you have put in the wrong fuel for
your vehicle, you must have the fuel 7
►  Push the fuel filler flap to close it (your tank drained and filled with the correct fuel
vehicle must be unlocked). before starting the engine.

Fuel cut-off
Your vehicle is fitted with a safety system that
cuts off the supply of fuel in the event of an
impact.

►  With a conventional key, insert the key into Diesel misfuel prevention
the filler cap, then turn the key to the left. Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank
If the vehicle is equipped with a sliding
door on its left-hand side, do not open it of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It helps avoid the
while the fuel filler flap is open (risk of risk of engine damage that can result from filling
damaging the fuel filler flap and the sliding with the wrong fuel.
door and risk of injuring the person filling up). Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention
device appears when the filler cap is removed.
If the fuel filler flap is open and you try to
open the left-hand side door, a
mechanism prevents it from being opened.
The door can be opened half-way, however.
With a mechanical door, close the fuel filler
flap to regain use of the door.
►  Unscrew and remove the filler cap, then
With an electric door, to be able to use it
place it on the holder located on the fuel filler
correctly, close the fuel filler flap and then
flap.
press an opening control.
►  Insert the nozzle and push it in fully (while
pushing on the metal valve A). The vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter,
►  Fill the tank. Do not continue past the which helps to reduce the level of harmful When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the
third cut-off of the nozzle, as this may cause emissions in the exhaust gases. fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes
malfunctions. into contact with the flap. The system remains
closed and prevents filling.

179
 Practical information

Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type This label is intended solely for use by
filler nozzle. firefighters and maintenance services in
the event of any work on the vehicle.
It is still possible to use a fuel can to fill
No other person must touch the device shown
the tank slowly.
on this label.
In order to ensure a good flow of fuel, do
not place the nozzle of the fuel can in direct An electric vehicle’s power train can
contact with the flap of the misfuel prevention In the event of an accident or impact
become hot during use and after
device. to the vehicle’s underbody
switching off the ignition.
In these situations, the electrical circuit or the
Observe the warning messages shown on
traction battery can be seriously damaged.
Driving abroad labels, particularly inside the flap.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be All work on or modifications to the vehicle’s
off the ignition.
different in other countries, the presence electrical system (including the traction
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
of the misfuel prevention device may make battery, connectors, orange cables and
workshop.
refuelling impossible. other components visible from the interior or
Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with misfuel exterior) is strictly prohibited - risk of severe
protection, so before travelling abroad, burns or potentially fatal electric shock In the event of exposure to a fire
we recommend that you check with the (short-circuit/electrocution)! Immediately exit and evacuate all
CITROËN dealer network, whether your In the event of a problem, always contact a passengers from the vehicle. Never attempt
vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in the CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. to fight the fire yourself - risk of electrocution!
country in which you intend to travel. You must immediately contact the emergency
services, informing them that the incident
involves an electric vehicle.

Charging system When washing

(Electric) Before washing the vehicle, always
check that the charging flap is closed
400 V electrical system correctly.
The electrical traction system, which operates at Never wash the vehicle while the battery is
a voltage of approximately 400 V, is identified by on charge.
orange cables, and its components are marked
with this symbol:

180
 Practical information

High-pressure washing
To avoid damaging the electrical
In the event of damage to the traction
battery
3. Nozzle locking indicator lamp
Fixed red: nozzle positioned correctly and
7
components, it is expressly prohibited to It is strictly prohibited to work on the vehicle locked in the connector.
use high-pressure washing in the engine yourself. Flashing red: nozzle incorrectly positioned or
compartment or under the body. Do not touch liquids coming from the battery, locking not possible.
Do not use a pressure greater than 80 bar and in the event of skin contact with these 4. Charging indicator lamp
when washing the bodywork. products, wash abundantly with water and
contact a doctor as soon as possible.
Never allow water or dust to enter the Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
connector or charging nozzle - risk of workshop to have the system checked.
electrocution or fire!
Never connect / disconnect the charging
nozzle or cable with wet hands - risk of
Charging connectors and
electrocution! indicator lamps State of charging Meaning
indicator lamp
Fixed white Guide lighting
Traction battery on opening the
This battery stores the energy that powers charging flap and
the electric motor and the thermal comfort disconnecting the
equipment in the passenger compartment. It is charging cable.
discharged during use, and must therefore be
regularly recharged. There is no need to wait Fixed blue Deferred charging.
for the traction battery to fall to its reserve level Flashing green Charging.
before recharging.
Battery life may vary according to the type of
driving, the route, thermal comfort equipment
usage and battery component ageing.

The traction battery ageing process is 1. Charging connectors

influenced by multiple factors, including 2. Deferred charging activation button
climate conditions, the distance travelled and
how often it has been fast-charged.

181
 Practical information

State of charging Meaning

Charging cables, sockets Standard charging, mode 2
indicator lamp and chargers Domestic socket
Fixed green Charging complete. The charging cable supplied with the vehicle (domestic charging - alternating current (AC))
The charging (depending on version) is compatible with the
indicator lamp goes electrical systems in the country of sale. When
off after about 2 travelling abroad, check the compatibility of local
minutes as the electrical systems with the charging cable.
vehicle's functions go A full range of charging cables is available from
your dealer. Mode 2 with a standard socket A: 8 A
into standby.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified maximum charging current.
The indicator lamp
comes back on workshop for more information and to obtain
when the vehicle is suitable charging cables.
unlocked using the
Keyless Entry and
Starting or when Mode 2 with a Green'Up socket B: 16 A
a door is opened, maximum charging current.
to indicate that To have this type of socket installed, call a
the battery is fully professional installer.
charged.
Specific domestic charging cable - mode
Fixed red Malfunction. 2 (AC)

Do not dismantle or modify the charging

connector - risk of electrocution and/or
fire!
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.

182
 Practical information

Specific domestic charging cable

(mode 2)
If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
4. The weight of the control unit must not be
borne by the electrical socket, plug and
7
You must not damage the cable. Upon plugging the charging cable into a cables.
In the event of damage, do not use it and domestic socket, all of the indicator lamps come 5. Never use this charging cable if it is
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified on briefly. defective or in any way damaged.
workshop to replace it. If no indicator lamps come on, check the 6. Never attempt to repair or open this
domestic socket's circuit-breaker: charging cable. It contains no repairable
Control unit (mode 2) –  If the circuit-breaker has tripped, contact a parts - replace the charging cable if it is
professional to check that the electrical system damaged.
is compatible and/or carry out any necessary 7. Never immerse this charging cable in water.
repairs. 8. Never use this charging cable with an
–  If the circuit-breaker has not tripped, stop extension cable, a multi-plug socket, a
using the charging cable and contact a conversion adaptor or on a damaged
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. electrical socket.
Control unit label - Recommendations 9. Do not unplug the plug from the wall as a
Refer to the handbook before use. means of stopping charging.
10. Immediately stop charging, by locking and
then unlocking the vehicle using the remote
control key, if the charging cable or wall
socket feel burning hot to the touch.
POWER 11. This charging cable includes components
Green: electrical connection established; liable to cause electrical arcing or sparks.
charging can begin. 1. Incorrect use of this charging cable may Do not expose to flammable vapours.
CHARGE result in fire, property damage and serious 12. Only use this charging cable with CITROËN
Flashing green: charging in progress or injury or death by electrocution! vehicles.
temperature pre-conditioning activated. 2. Always use a correctly earthed power 13. Never plug the cable into the wall socket (or
Fixed green: charging complete. socket, protected by a 30 mA residual unplug it) with wet hands.
FAULT current device. 14. Do not force the connector if it is locked into
Red: fault; charging not permitted or must 3. Always use an electrical socket protected the vehicle.
be stopped immediately. Check that everything by a circuit-breaker appropriate for the
is connected correctly and that the electrical electrical circuit’s current rating.
system is not faulty.

183
 Practical information

Control unit label - State of indicator

State of the State of the
lamps
indicator lamp indicator lamp
State of the On Flashing
indicator lamp
Off
   

POWER CHARGE FAULT Symbol Description

Not connected to the power supply or power is not
available from the infrastructure.

The control unit is currently performing a self-test.

(green) (green) (red)

Connected only to the infrastructure or to the
infrastructure and to the Electric Vehicle (EV) but
no charging in progress.
(green)
Connected to the power supply and to the Electric
Vehicle (EV).
The EV is on charge or in a temperature pre-
(green) (green)
conditioning sequence.

Connected to the power supply and to the Electric

Vehicle (EV).
The EV is waiting for charging or the charging of
(green) (green)
the EV is completed.

184
 Practical information

POWER CHARGE FAULT Symbol Description 7

Control unit malfunction. No charging allowed.
If an error indicator reappears after a manual reset,
the control unit must be checked by a CITROËN
(red)
dealer before the next charge.

The control unit is in diagnostic mode.

(green) (green) (red)

Manual reset procedure
The control unit can be reset by simultaneously disconnecting the charging connector and the wall socket.
Then, reconnect the wall socket first. For more information, refer to the handbook.

Accelerated charging, mode 3 Charging cable, mode 3 (AC) Fast charging, mode 4
Accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) Public fast charger
(accelerated charging - single-phase or three- (superfast charging - direct current (DC))
phase alternating current (AC))

Accelerated charging unit (Wallbox)

Do not disassemble or modify the
Depending on version, in mode 3 with an charging unit - risk of electrocution and/or fire!
accelerated charging unit (Wallbox): 32 A Refer to the charging unit manufacturer's user
maximum charging current. manual for the operating instructions.

185
 Practical information

It is also possible to monitor the charging about every 3 months in order to recharge the
Charging cable, mode 4 (DC)
progress using the MyCitroën accessory battery and maintain an operating
(integrated into the public fast charger)
application. voltage.
For more information on Remote functions,
refer to the corresponding section.
Precautions
Electric vehicles were developed in accordance
As a safety measure, the engine will not
with the guidelines on maximum electromagnetic
start if the charging cable is plugged into
fields issued by the International Commission
the connector on the vehicle. A warning is
on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP -
Only use public fast chargers where the cable displayed on the instrument panel.
1998 Guidelines).
length does not exceed 30 metres.
Cooling the traction battery Wearers of pacemakers or equivalent
The cooling fan in the engine devices
Charging the traction compartment comes on during charging to The electric vehicles have been

battery (Electric) cool the on-board charger and the traction

battery.
developed in accordance with the
guidelines on the maximum levels for
To recharge, connect the vehicle to a domestic electromagnetic fields issued by the International
electricity supply (domestic or accelerated Vehicle immobilised for 1 to 12 Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
charging) or to a fast public charger (superfast months Protection (ICNIRP - 1998 Guidelines).
charging). Discharge the traction battery down to 2 or If in doubt
For a full charge, follow the desired charging 3 bars on the charge level indicator on the Domestic or accelerated charging: do
procedure without pausing it, until it ends instrument panel. not remain inside or near the vehicle, or near
automatically. Charging can be either immediate Do not connect the charging cable. the charging cable or charging unit, even for
or deferred (except fast public charger, mode 4). Always park the vehicle in a place with a short time.
You can stop domestic or accelerated charging temperatures between -10°C and 30°C Superfast charging: do not use the system
at any time by unlocking the vehicle and (parking in a place with extreme temperatures yourself and avoid approaching public fast
removing the nozzle. For superfast charging, can damage the traction battery). charging points. Leave the area and ask a
refer to the fast public charger. Disconnect the cable from the (+) terminal third party to recharge the vehicle.
For more information on the charging displays of the accessory battery in the engine
on the Instrument panel and the Touch screen, compartment.
refer to the corresponding section. Connect a 12 V battery charger to the (+)
and (-) terminals of the accessory battery

186
 Practical information

For domestic or accelerated charging

Before charging
Do not leave the cable connected to the
domestic power socket - risk of short-circuit
Domestic charging, mode 2
7
or electrocution in the event of contact with or
Depending on the context: immersion in water!
►  Have a professional check that the
electrical system to be used complies with
applicable standards and is compatible with For superfast charging
the vehicle.
Before charging
►  Have a professional electrician install
Check that the fast public charging
a dedicated domestic power socket or
station and its charging cable are compatible
accelerated charging unit (Wallbox)
with the vehicle.
compatible with the vehicle.
If the exterior temperature is below:
You should preferably use the charging cable
–  0°C, charging times may be extended.
available as an accessory.
–  -20°C, charging is still possible, but
For more information, contact a CITROËN
charging times may be extended even further ►  Connect the charging cable from the control
dealer or a qualified workshop.
(the battery has to be heated first). unit to the domestic socket.
When the connection is made, all of the indicator
(During charging) lamps on the control unit light up, then only the
After charging
While charging is in progress, unlocking POWER indicator lamp remains on in green.
Check that the charging flap is closed.
the vehicle will cause the charging to stop. ►  Remove the protective cover from the
If no action is taken on one of the openings charging nozzle.
(door or boot) or on the charging nozzle, the Connection ►  Insert the nozzle into the charging connector.
vehicle will lock again after 30 seconds and ►  Before charging, check that the drive selector The start of charging is confirmed by the flashing
charging will resume automatically. is in mode P, otherwise charging is not possible. green CHARGE indicator lamps in the flap, then
Never work under the bonnet: ►  Open the charging flap by pressing the those on the control unit.
–  Some areas remain very hot, even an hour push-button, and check that there are no foreign If this is not the case, charging has not
after charging ends - risk of burns! bodies on the charging connector. started; restart the procedure, ensuring that all
–  The fan may start at any time - risk of cuts connections are properly established.
or strangulation! The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to
indicate that the nozzle is locked.
After charging
When charging is complete and while the
Check that the charging flap is closed.
charging cable is still connected, opening

187
 Practical information

the driver's door will display the charge level ►  Follow the instructions for use of the fast ►  Set the charging start time.
on the instrument panel for about 20 seconds. public charger and connect the cable from the ►  Press OK.
fast public charger to the vehicle's connector. The setting is saved in the system.
Accelerated charging, mode 3 The start of charging is confirmed by the flashing Activation
green charging indicator lamp in the flap.
If this is not the case, charging has not started; Deferred charging is only possible with
restart the procedure, ensuring that the modes 2 and 3.
connection is properly established.
The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to ►  After programming the deferred charging,
indicate that the nozzle is locked. connect your vehicle to the desired charging
equipment.
►  Follow the accelerated charging unit Deferred charging
(Wallbox) user instructions.
Settings
►  Remove the protective cover from the
charging nozzle. At a CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop,
►  Insert the nozzle into the charging connector. with Bluetooth® audio system
The start of charging is confirmed when the By default, the deferred charging start time is set
charging indicator lamp in the flap flashes green. to midnight (vehicle time).
If this is not the case, charging has not started; You can have the deferred charging start time
modified. ►  Press this button in the flap within one
restart the procedure, ensuring that the
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified minute to activate the system (confirmed by the
connection has been properly established.
workshop. charging indicator lamp coming on in blue).
The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to
On a smartphone or tablet (GSM), with
indicate that the nozzle is locked.
CITROËN Connect Radio or CITROËN
Disconnection
Superfast charging, mode 4
Connect Nav
You can programme the deferred
charging function at any time via the
MyCitroën application.
For more information on Remote functions,
refer to the corresponding section. Before disconnecting the nozzle from the
In the vehicle, with CITROËN Connect Nav charging connector:
►  In the Energy touch screen menu, ►  If the vehicle is unlocked, lock it and then
►  Depending on version, remove the protective
select the Charge page. unlock it.
cover from the lower part of the connector.

188
 Practical information

►  If the vehicle is locked, unlock it.

The red indicator lamp in the flap goes out to
Superfast charging, mode 4
The end of charging is indicated by the charger
Exiting the mode
These functions are automatically reactivated the
7
confirm that the charging nozzle is unlocked. and by the fixed lighting of the green indicator next time the vehicle is used.
►  Within 30 seconds, remove the charging lamp in the flap. To restore the use of these functions
nozzle. ►  You can also pause charging by immediately, start the engine and let it run:
The charging indicator lamp comes on in white. pressing this button in the flap (in mode 4 –  For less than 10 minutes, to use the
With selective door unlocking activated, only). equipment for approximately 5 minutes.
press the unlocking button twice to ►  Hang up the nozzle on the charger. –  For more than 10 minutes, to use the
disconnect the charging nozzle. ►  Depending on version, replace the protective equipment for approximately 30 minutes.
cover on the lower section and close the Let the engine run for the specified duration to
charging flap. ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.
When charging is complete, the green
charging indicator lamp in the flap goes To recharge the battery, avoid repeatedly or
out after about 2 minutes. Energy economy mode continuously restarting the engine.

This system manages the duration of use of A flat battery prevents the engine from
Domestic charging, mode 2 starting.
certain functions, in order to conserve a sufficient
The end of charging is confirmed when the green level of charge in the battery with the ignition off. For more information on the 12 V battery,
CHARGE indicator lamp on the control unit and After switching off the engine, you can still refer to the corresponding section.
the green charging indicator lamp in the flap use functions such as the audio and telematic
come on fixed. system, the wipers and the dipped beam
►  Replace the protective cover on the charging headlamps or courtesy lamps, for a combined Load reduction mode
nozzle and close the charging flap. duration of approximately 40 minutes. This system manages the use of certain
►  Disconnect the control unit end of the
functions according to the level of charge
charging cable from the domestic socket. Selecting the mode remaining in the battery.
Accelerated charging , mode 3 A confirmation message is displayed when When the vehicle is being driven, the load
The end of charging is indicated by the charging energy economy mode is entered, and the active reduction function temporarily deactivates certain
control unit and by the fixed lighting of the green functions are placed on standby. functions, such as the air conditioning and the
indicator lamp in the flap. If a telephone call is in progress at the heated rear screen.
►  Hang up the nozzle on the charging unit and time, it will be maintained for around 10 The deactivated functions are reactivated
close the charging flap. minutes via the audio system’s hands-free automatically as soon as conditions permit.
system.

189
 Practical information

Snow chains ►  Fit the snow chains following the instructions

provided by the manufacturer.
recommend having them fitted by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve ►  Move off gently and drive for a few moments, If not fitted by a CITROËN dealer, they must
traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle without exceeding 31 mph (50 km/h). still be fitted in accordance with the vehicle
when braking. ►  Stop the vehicle and check that the snow manufacturer's instructions.
Snow chains must be fitted only to the chains are correctly tightened. Certain driving or manoeuvring aid functions
front wheels. They must never be fitted to are automatically deactivated while an
It is strongly recommended that you
"space-saver" type spare wheels. approved towing system is in use.
practise fitting the snow chains on a level
and dry surface before setting off.
Observe the legislation in force in your Comply with the maximum authorised
country relating to the use of snow towable weight, as indicated on your
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads
chains and maximum authorised speeds. vehicle's registration certificate, on the
that have been cleared of snow to avoid
manufacturer's label and in the Technical
damaging the vehicle's tyres and the road
Only use chains that have been designed for the data section of this guide.
surface. If the vehicle is fitted with alloy
type of wheel fitted to your vehicle. Complying with the maximum authorised
wheels, check that no part of the chain or its
Original tyre size Type of chain nose weight (towball weight) also includes
fixings is in contact with the wheel rim.
the use of accessories (bicycle carriers,
215/65 R16 12 mm link tow boxes, etc.).
215/60 R17 KONIG K-SUMMIT
VAN K84
Towing device Observe the legislation in force in the
225/55 R17
Load distribution country where you are driving.
You can also use snow socks. ►  Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
For more information, contact a CITROËN dealer heaviest items are as close as possible to the Electric motor
or a qualified workshop. axle, and the nose weight approaches the An electric vehicle may be fitted with a
maximum permitted without exceeding it. towing device.
Installation tips Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing It is therefore possible to tow a trailer or
►  To fit the snow chains during a journey, stop engine performance. The maximum towable load caravan.
the vehicle on a flat surface at the side of the must be reduced by 10% per 1,000 metres of Contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified
road. altitude. workshop for more information and to obtain a
►  Apply the parking brake and position any suitable towing device.
Use genuine towing devices and wiring
wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent
harnesses approved by CITROËN. We
movement of the vehicle.

190
 Practical information

Roof bars/Roof rack Be sure to refer to national legislation in order

to comply with the regulations for transporting 7
As a safety measure and to avoid objects that are longer than the vehicle.
damaging the roof, it is essential to use
the roof bars and roof racks approved for your Roof bars
vehicle. A maximum of 3 roof bars (or 2 bars for the
Observe the instructions on fitting and use version with panoramic sunroof) can be installed
contained in the guide supplied with the roof - use the positions marked in green.
bars and racks.

Recommendations
Distribute the load uniformly, taking care Max. authorised load weight:
to avoid overloading one of the sides. –  over 2 roof bars: 100 kg,
Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close –  distributed over 3 roof bars: 150 kg.
as possible to the roof.
To install the transverse roof bars, use the fixing
Secure the load firmly.
points provided for this purpose:
Drive gently: the vehicle will be more
►  Open the fixing covers on each bar.
susceptible to the effects of side winds and its
►  Put each fixing point in place and lock them
stability may be affected.
to the roof one by one.
Regularly check the security and tight
►  Ensure that the roof bars are correctly fitted
fastening of the roof bars, at least before each
(by shaking them).
trip.
►  Close the fixing covers on each bar.
Remove the roof bars once they are no longer
With panoramic sunroof The bars can be interchanged and are adaptable
needed.
to each pair of fixing points.
Roof racks
As this value may change, please verify
the maximum load quoted in the guide Max. authorised load weight:
supplied with the roof bars. –  XS: 140 kg,
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed –  M and XL: 170 kg.
of the vehicle to the profile of the road to
avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings To fit a roof rack, use the fixing points provided
on the vehicle. for this purpose:

191
 Practical information

►  Place the roof rack on the roof aligned with The location of the interior bonnet ►  Pull the release lever 1, located at the bottom
the fixing points and secure each one to the roof release lever prevents the bonnet being of the door frame, towards you.
in turn. opened when the left-hand front door is ►  Tilt the safety catch 2 upwards, then raise the
►  Ensure that the roof rack is correctly fitted (by closed. bonnet.
shaking it). ►  Unclip the stay 3 from its housing and place it
When the engine is hot, handle the in the support slot to hold the bonnet open.

Bonnet exterior safety catch and the bonnet stay

with care (risk of burns), using the protected Closing
Stop & Start area. ►  Hold the bonnet and pull out the stay from the
Before doing anything under the bonnet, When the bonnet is open, take care not to support slot.
you must switch off the ignition to avoid any damage the safety catch. ►  Clip the stay in its housing.
risk of injury resulting from an automatic Do not open the bonnet under very windy ►  Lower the bonnet and release it near the end
change to START mode. conditions. of its travel.
►  Pull on the bonnet to check that it is locked
Cooling of the engine when stopped correctly.
The engine cooling fan may start after Because of the presence of electrical
the engine has been switched off. equipment under the bonnet, it is strongly
Take care with objects or clothing that recommended that exposure to water (rain,
Electric motor could be caught in the blades of the fan! washing, etc.) be limited.
Take care with objects or clothing that
could be caught in the blades of the cooling
Opening
fan or in certain moving components - risk of
strangulation and serious injury! ►  Open the door.
Engine compartment
Before carrying out any work under the The engine shown here is an example for
bonnet, you must switch off the ignition, check illustrative purposes only.
that the READY indicator lamp is off on the The locations of the following components may
instrument panel and disconnect the charging vary:
nozzle if it is plugged in. –  Air filter.
–  Engine oil dipstick.
–  Engine oil filler cap.
–  Priming pump.

192
 Practical information

Diesel engine Electric motor The fluids must comply with the
manufacturer's requirements and with 7
the vehicle's engine.

Take care when working under the

bonnet, as certain areas of the engine
may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the
cooling fan could start at any time (even with
1. Screenwash fluid reservoir
the ignition off).
1. Screenwash fluid reservoir 2. Engine coolant reservoir (level only)
2. Engine coolant reservoir 3. Brake fluid reservoir
3. Brake fluid reservoir 4. Battery/Fuses Used products
4. Battery 5. Remote earth point (-)
6. Fusebox Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
5. Remote earth point (-)
7. 400 V electrical circuit fluids with the skin.
6. Fusebox
8. Emergency circuit-breaker for emergency Most of these fluids are harmful to health and
7. Air filter
services and maintenance technicians very corrosive.
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Engine oil dipstick 9. Power steering fluid reservoir
10. Priming pump* Do not discard used oil or fluids into
For more information on the Charging system
11. Power steering fluid reservoir sewers or onto the ground.
(Electric), refer to the corresponding section.
Empty used oil into the containers reserved
Diesel fuel system for this purpose at a CITROËN dealer or a
This system is under very high pressure. Checking levels qualified workshop.
All work must be carried out only by a Check all of the following levels regularly in
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. accordance with the manufacturer's service Engine oil
schedule. Top them up if required, unless
The level is checked, with the engine
otherwise indicated.
having been switched off for at least 30
If a level drops significantly, have the
minutes and on level ground, either using the oil
corresponding system checked by a CITROËN
level indicator in the instrument panel when the
dealer or a qualified workshop.

* Depending on engine.

193
 Practical information

ignition is switched on (for vehicles equipped –  below mark B: top up the engine oil Brake fluid
with an electric gauge), or using the dipstick. immediately.
The level of this fluid should be close to
It is normal to top up the oil level between two
Oil grade the "MAX" mark. If not, check the brake
services (or oil changes). It is recommended
Before topping up or changing the pads for wear.
that you check the level, and top up if necessary,
engine oil, check that the oil is suitable To know how often the brake fluid should be
every 3,000 miles (5,000 km).
for your engine and complies with the replaced, refer to the manufacturer's servicing
In order to maintain the reliability of the recommendations in the service schedule schedule.
engine and emissions control system, supplied with the vehicle (or available from
Clean the cap before removing it to refill.
never use additives in the engine oil. your CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop).
Use only DOT4 brake fluid from a sealed
Use of non-recommended oil may invalidate
container.
your warranty in the event of engine failure.
Checking using the dipstick
For the location of the dipstick, please refer
Topping up the engine oil level
Power steering fluid
to the illustration of the corresponding engine
The level of this fluid should be close to
compartment. For the location of the engine oil filler cap, please
the "MAX" mark. Check it, with the
►  Grasp the dipstick by its coloured grip and refer to the corresponding engine compartment
vehicle parked on level ground and with the
pull it out completely. illustration.
engine cold, by reading the level on the filler
►  Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean, ►  Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any spills
neck.
lint-free cloth. on engine components (risk of fire).
►  Wait a few minutes before checking the level
again using the dipstick.
Engine coolant
►  Top up the level if necessary. (Diesel)
►  After checking the level, carefully screw the It is normal to top up this fluid between
oil filler cap back on and replace the dipstick in two services.
its tube. The check and top-up must only be done with
The oil level indication displayed on the the engine cold.
►  Reinsert the dipstick and push fully down,
instrument panel when the ignition is A level of coolant that is too low risks causing
then pull it out again to visually check the oil
switched on is not valid for 30 minutes major damage to the engine; the coolant level
level: the correct level is between marks A (max)
following an addition of oil. must be close to the "MAX" mark without ever
and B (min).
going above it.
Do not start the engine if the level is:
If the level is close to or below the "MIN" mark, it
–  above mark A: contact a CITROËN dealer or a
is essential to top it up.
qualified workshop.

194
 Practical information

When the engine is hot, the temperature of the

coolant is regulated by the fan.
In winter (temperatures below zero), a fluid
containing an anti-freeze agent which is
For more information on AdBlue® (BlueHDi),
and in particular the supply of AdBlue, refer to 7
As the cooling system is pressurised, wait at appropriate for the temperature conditions the corresponding section.
least one hour after switching off the engine must be used in order to protect the system's
before carrying out any work.
In order to avoid the risk of scalding if you need
components (pump, tank, ducts, jets).
Checks
Filling with pure water is prohibited in all
to top up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around Unless otherwise indicated, check these
circumstances (risk of freezing,
the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to components in accordance with the
limescale, etc.).
allow the pressure to drop. manufacturer's service schedule and according
Once the pressure has dropped, remove the cap to your engine.
and top up to the required level. Diesel fuel additive (Diesel Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
(Electric) with particle filter)
or On reaching the minimum level Only use products recommended by
Do not top up the coolant. CITROËN or products of equivalent
in the particle filter additive tank,
this warning lamp comes on fixed, accompanied quality and specification.
by an audible signal and a warning message. In order to optimise the operation of
components as important as those in the
Topping up braking system, CITROËN selects and offers
The topping up of this additive must be carried very specific products.
If the level is close to or below out quickly.
the "MIN" mark, it is essential to contact a Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified 12 V battery
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. workshop.
The battery does not require any
AdBlue® (BlueHDi) maintenance.
Screenwash fluid An alert is triggered when the reserve level is
Check regularly that the terminals are correctly
tightened (versions without quick-release
Top up to the required level when reached.
terminals) and that the connections are clean.
necessary. For more information on the Indicators and in
particular the AdBlue range indicators, refer to For more information on the precautions
Fluid specification the corresponding section. to take before any work on the 12 V
The fluid must be topped up with a pre-mixed To avoid the vehicle being immobilised in battery, refer to the corresponding section.
product. accordance with regulations, you must top up the
AdBlue tank.

195
 Practical information

Versions equipped with Stop & Start are lighting of this warning lamp, accompanied by an Drive selector (Electric)
fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of alert message.
The drive selector does not require any
specific technology and specification. As soon as the traffic conditions permit,
maintenance.
Its replacement should be carried out only by regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp Manual parking brake
goes off.
If you notice excessive brake lever travel
Passenger compartment If the warning lamp stays on, this or decreased effectiveness, the parking
indicates a low Diesel additive level. brake must be adjusted, even between two
filter For more information on Checking levels, services.
Depending on the environment and the refer to the corresponding section. This system must be checked by a CITROËN
use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere, dealer or a qualified workshop.
city driving), change it twice as often, if
Following prolonged operation of the
necessary.
vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you Electric parking brake
A clogged passenger compartment filter may, in exceptional circumstances, notice This system does not require any routine
can adversely affect air conditioning water vapour coming from the exhaust while servicing. However, in the event of a
system performance and generate accelerating. These emissions have no problem, do not hesitate to have the system
undesirable odours. impact on the vehicle’s behaviour and the checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
environment. workshop.

Air filter For more information on the Electric

New vehicle parking brake, refer to the
Depending on the environment and the
During the first few particle filter corresponding section.
use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere,
regeneration operations, you may notice a
city driving), change it twice as often, if
"burning" smell. This is perfectly normal.
necessary. Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the style of
Oil filter Manual gearbox driving, particularly in the case of vehicles
Change the oil filter each time the engine The gearbox does not require any used in town, over short distances. It may be
oil is changed. maintenance (no oil change). necessary to have the condition of the brakes
checked, even between vehicle services.
Particle filter (Diesel) Automatic gearbox Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the
The start of clogging of the particle The gearbox does not require any brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads
filter is indicated by the temporary maintenance (no oil change). are worn.

196
 Practical information

After washing the vehicle, moisture, or in

wintry conditions, ice can form on the
When the wear indicators no longer appear set
back from the tread, the depth of the grooves is
A faulty timing or accessory kit can damage
the engine, rendering it unusable. Observe the 7
brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may less than 1.6 mm; replace the tyres as soon as recommended replacement frequency, stated in
be reduced. Gently dab the brakes to dry and possible. distance travelled or time elapsed, whichever is
defrost them. Using different size wheels and tyres from those reached first.
specified can affect the lifetime of tyres, wheel

Brake disc/drum wear

rotation, ground clearance, the speedometer
reading and have an adverse effect on road
AdBlue® (BlueHDi)
For any information on checking brake holding. To respect the environment and ensure
disc/drum wear, contact a CITROËN Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without
dealer or a qualified workshop. can cause the ESC to mistime. adversely affecting the performance or fuel
Always mark the direction of rotation on the tyres consumption of its Diesel engines, CITROËN
Wheels and tyres that will be stored when fitting winter or summer has taken the decision to equip its vehicles with
The inflation pressure of all tyres, tyres. Store them in a cool, dry place and away a system that combines SCR (Selective Catalytic
including the spare wheel, must be from direct exposure to the sun's rays. Reduction) with a Diesel Particle Filter (DPF) for
checked on "cold” tyres. Winter or 4-seasons tyres can be the treatment of exhaust gases.
The pressures indicated on the tyre pressure identified by this symbol on their
label are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have driven sidewalls. SCR system
for more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles Using a liquid called AdBlue® that contains
(10 kilometres) at over 31 mph (50 km/h), add Shock absorbers urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of
0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the values indicated on the It is not easy for drivers to detect when the nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and
label. shock absorbers are worn. Nevertheless, water, which are harmless to health and the
the shock absorbers have a major impact on environment.
Under-inflation increases energy
road holding and braking performance. The AdBlue® is contained in a special
consumption. Non-compliant tyre
For your safety and driving comfort, it is tank holding about 20 litres.
pressures cause tyres to wear prematurely
important to have them regularly checked by a Its capacity allows a driving range of
and have an adverse effect on the vehicle's
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. approximately 3,000 miles (5,000 km) (which
road holding - risk of accident!
may vary considerably depending on your
Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces the Timing and accessory kits driving style and the vehicle). An alert system
braking and road holding performance of the The timing and accessory kits are used is automatically triggered when the remaining
vehicle. Regularly check the condition of the from the time the engine is started until it range reaches 1,500 miles (2,400 km), i.e. once
tyres (tread and sidewalls) and rims as well as is switched off. It is normal for them to wear over the reserve level has been reached.
the presence of the valve caps. time.

197
 Practical information

Several alerts are triggered successively during The SCR system includes a heater for the If the fluid has frozen, it can be used once it has
the remaining 1,500 miles (2,400 km) until the AdBlue® tank, allowing you to continue driving completely thawed out at room temperature.
tank is empty and the vehicle is immobilised. in very cold conditions.
Never store AdBlue® containers in your
If the estimated distance travelled by the vehicle
vehicle.
between two services is greater than 3,000 miles
(5,000 km), it will be necessary to top up the
Supply of AdBlue®
AdBlue. It is recommended that the AdBlue® be topped Precautions for use
up as soon as the first alert is issued indicating
For more information on the Warning AdBlue® is a urea-based solution. This fluid is
that the reserve level has been reached.
and indicator lamps and the associated non-flammable, colourless and odourless (when
alerts, or the Indicators, please refer to the For the correct operation of the SCR kept in a cool place).
corresponding sections. system: In the event of contact with the skin, wash the
–  Use only AdBlue® fluid that meets the ISO affected area with soap and running water. In the
22241 standard. event of contact with the eyes, immediately rinse
Once the AdBlue® tank is empty, a device
–  Never transfer AdBlue® to another container the eyes with large amounts of water or with an
required by law prevents the engine from
as it would lose its purity. eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. Seek
being restarted.
–  Never dilute AdBlue® with water. medical attention if you feel a persistent burning
If the SCR system is faulty, the level of
sensation or irritation.
emissions from the vehicle will no longer meet You can obtain AdBlue® from a CITROËN dealer If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth
the Euro 6 standard and the vehicle starts or a qualified workshop, as well as service with clean water and then drink plenty of water.
polluting the environment. stations equipped with AdBlue® pumps specially In certain conditions (high temperature, for
In the event of a confirmed SCR system designed for passenger vehicles. example), the risk of release of ammonia cannot
malfunction, it is essential to visit a CITROËN
Never top up from an AdBlue® dispenser be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. Ammonia
dealer or a qualified workshop. After 685
reserved for heavy goods vehicles. vapours have an irritant effect on mucous
miles (1,100 km), a device is automatically
membranes (eyes, nose and throat).
activated to prevent the engine from starting.
In both cases, a range indicator indicates
the distance that can be travelled before the
Recommendations on Store AdBlue® out of the reach of
children, in its original container.
vehicle is stopped. storage
AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C and deteriorates
Freezing of the AdBlue ® above +25°C. Containers should be stored in a Procedure
AdBlue® freezes at temperatures below cool area and protected from direct sunlight. Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure that
around -11°C. Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept for the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface.
at least a year.

198
 Practical information

In wintry conditions, ensure that the temperature

of the vehicle is above -11°C. Otherwise the
►  With Keyless Entry and Starting, press the
"START/STOP" button to switch off the engine. 7
AdBlue® may be frozen and so cannot be poured
into the tank. Park the vehicle in a warmer area Accessing the AdBlue® tank
for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried
out.

Never pour the AdBlue® into the Diesel

fuel tank.
►  Refit the black cover, starting
If any AdBlue® is splashed, or if there are at the top.
any spillages on the bodywork, rinse
immediately with cold water or wipe with a ►  To access the AdBlue® tank, open the front In order not to overfill the AdBlue® tank:
damp cloth. left-hand door. –  Add between 10 and 13 litres using
If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off using a ►  From below, pull the black AdBlue® containers.
sponge and hot water. cover. –  Stop after the nozzle’s first automatic cut-
out, if you are refilling at a service station.
Important: in the event of a top-up after ►  Turn the blue cap a 6th of a turn The system only registers AdBlue® top-ups of
a breakdown because of a lack of anti-clockwise. 5 litres or more.
AdBlue, it is essential to wait around 5 ►  Release the cap upwards.
minutes before switching on the ignition, ►  With a container of AdBlue®: after checking If the AdBlue® tank is completely empty
without opening the driver’s door, the expiry date, read the instructions on the – which is confirmed by the message
unlocking the vehicle, inserting the key label carefully before pouring the contents of the "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible" – it is
into the ignition switch, or bringing the container into the vehicle's AdBlue tank. essential to add at least 5 litres.
key for the "Keyless Entry and Starting" ►  With an AdBlue® pump: insert the nozzle and
system into the passenger compartment. fill the tank until the nozzle automatically cuts
Switch on the ignition, then wait for 10
seconds before starting the engine.
out.
►  After filling, perform the same sequence of
Free-wheeling
operations in reverse order. In certain situations, you must allow the vehicle
►  Switch off the ignition and remove the key to free-wheel (while being towed, on a rolling
from the switch to switch off the engine. road, in an automatic car wash, or being
or transported by rail or sea freight, etc.).

199
 Practical information

The procedure varies according to the type of ►  Release the brake pedal, then switch on the With drive selector (Electric)
gearbox and parking brake. ignition again.
►  While depressing the brake pedal, press the
and electric parking brake
With manual or automatic control lever to release the parking brake. /

gearbox and manual parking ►  Release the brake pedal, then switch off the
ignition. Release procedure
brake Reverting to normal operation ►  With the vehicle stationary and the engine
►  While depressing the brake pedal, restart the running, depress the brake pedal and select
/

engine. mode N.
To release them Within 5 seconds:
►  With the vehicle stationary and engine With an automatic gearbox ►  Depress and hold the brake pedal, then
running, depress the brake pedal. and electric parking brake observe this order: switch off the ignition and
►  With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever move the push selector forwards or backwards.
into neutral.
/

►  Release the brake pedal, then switch on the

►  With an automatic gearbox, place the gear ignition again.
selector to mode N. To release them ►  Place your foot on the brake and press the
►  Release the parking brake. ►  With the engine running and while depressing electric parking brake control to release it.
►  Release the brake pedal, then switch off the the brake pedal, set the gear selector to N. ►  Release the brake pedal, then switch off the
ignition. ►  While depressing the brake pedal, switch off ignition.
the ignition. A message is displayed on the
With a manual gearbox and ►  Release the brake pedal, then switch on the instrument panel to confirm the unlocking
electric parking brake ignition again. of the wheels for 15 minutes.
►  While depressing the brake pedal, press the In Wash mode, a message may appear on
control lever to release the parking brake. the instrument panel to indicate that the audio
/

►  Release the brake pedal, then switch off the system cannot be updated.
To release them ignition.
►  With the engine running and while depressing Reverting to normal operation Reverting to normal operation
the brake pedal, move the gear selector to the
►  While depressing the brake pedal, restart the ►  While depressing the brake pedal, restart the
neutral position.
engine. engine.
►  While depressing the brake pedal, switch off
the ignition.

200
 Practical information

Keyless Entry and Starting

You must not depress the brake pedal
Promptly clean up any stains containing
chemicals liable to damage the vehicle's paint
Bodywork
High-gloss paint
7
while switching the ignition on again, then (including tree resin, bird droppings, insect
switching it off. If you do, the engine will start, secretions, pollen and tar).
Do not use abrasive products, solvents,
requiring you to restart the procedure. If justified by the environment, clean the
petrol or oil to clean the bodywork.
vehicle frequently to remove salty deposits (in
Never use an abrasive sponge to clean
coastal areas), soot (in industrial areas) and
stubborn stains - risk of scratching the
Advice on care and mud (in wet or cold areas). These substances
paintwork!
can be highly corrosive.
maintenance Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
Do not apply polish in strong sunshine, or to
plastic or rubber parts.
workshop for advice on removing stubborn
General recommendations stains requiring special products (such as tar
or insect removers). Use a soft cloth and soapy water or a pH
Observe the following recommendations to avoid
Preferably, have paint touch-ups performed neutral product.
damaging the vehicle.
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Gently wipe the bodywork with a clean
Exterior microfibre cloth.
workshop.
Apply polish with the vehicle clean and dry.
Never use a high-pressure jet wash in
Interior Comply with the instructions for use stated on
the engine compartment - risk of
the product.
damaging the electrical components!
When washing the vehicle, never use a
Do not wash the vehicle in bright sunshine or Textured paint
water hose or high-pressure jet to clean
extremely cold conditions.
the interior. This type of paint reacts under the effect of
Liquids carried in cups or other open light, through variations in appearance and
When washing the vehicle in an containers can spill, presenting a risk of finish that highlight the lines and contours of the
automatic roller-brush car wash, be sure damage to the instruments and controls and vehicle. Its varnish is enriched with particles that
to lock the doors and, depending on version, the controls located on the centre console. Be remain visible and create a unique satin effect
move the electronic key away and deactivate vigilant! with relief. Its slightly granular texture gives it a
the “hands-free” function (Hands-Free
surprising touch.
Access).
When using a pressure washer, hold the Never attempt to clean without water.
lance at least 30 cm from the vehicle Never clean your vehicle in an automatic
(particularly when cleaning areas containing roller-brush car wash.
chipped paint, sensors or seals).

201
 Practical information

Never select the programme with hot wax Leather

finish.
Leather is a natural product. Appropriate regular
Never use high-pressure lances equipped
care is essential for its durability.
with brushes - risk of scratching paint!
It must be protected and nourished using a
Never apply glossy polish or preservatives to
specific leather product, to keep it supple and
the bodywork or alloy wheels; these products
preserve its original appearance.
irreversibly reveal glossy or spotted areas.
Do not clean leather using unsuitable
Choose high-pressure wash, or at least cleaning agents such as solvents,
high-flow water jet. detergents, petrol or pure alcohol.
Rinse the vehicle with demineralised water. When cleaning items partly made from
Only a clean microfibre cloth is recommended leather, take care not to damage the other
for wiping the vehicle; pass it over the vehicle materials with the specific leather product.
without rubbing.
Carefully wipe off any fuel spilt on the Before cleaning greasy stains or liquids,
bodywork using a soft cloth, then allow to dry. quickly mop up any surplus.
Clean off minor marks (for example, finger Before cleaning, wipe off any residues liable
marks), using a maintenance product to scuff the leather, using a cloth that has
recommended by CITROËN. been dampened with demineralised water
and thoroughly wrung out.
Decals Clean leather using a soft cloth moistened
(Depending on version) with soapy water or a pH-neutral product.
Dry with a soft, dry cloth.
Do not use a high-pressure washer to
clean the vehicle - risk of damaging or
detaching the decals!

Use a high-flow hose (temperature

between 25°C and 40°C).
Place the jet of water perpendicular to the
surface to be cleaned.
Rinse the vehicle with demineralised water.

202
 In the event of a breakdown

Warning triangle
This reflective and dismantlable device is to be
Running out of fuel
(Diesel)
2.0 BlueHDi engines
►  Switch on the ignition (without starting the
8
engine).
installed on the side of the road when a vehicle
With Diesel engines, the fuel system must be ►  Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the
is broken down or damaged.
primed if you run out of fuel. ignition.
Before getting out of the vehicle Before starting to prime the system, it is ►  Repeat the operation 10 times.
Turn on the hazard warning lamps, then essential to put at least 5 litres of Diesel into the ►  Operate the starter motor to start the engine.
put on the safety vest to assemble and install fuel tank. If the engine does not start at the first attempt,
the triangle. do not keep trying, but restart the procedure.
For more information on Refuelling and
on Misfuel prevention (Diesel), refer to 2.0 HDi engines
Assembling and placing the the corresponding section. ►  Open the bonnet and then, if necessary,
triangle For non-BlueHDi versions, the fuel system
unclip the cover to access the priming pump.
►  Loosen the degassing bolt.
components are located in the engine
►  Operate the priming pump until fuel
compartment, possibly under the removable
appears in the transparent tube.
cover.
►  Retighten the degassing bolt.
For more information on the Engine ►  Operate the starter motor until the engine
compartment, in particular the location starts (if the engine does not start at the first
of these components under the bonnet, refer attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying
to the corresponding section. again).
►  If the engine does not start after a few
1.5 BlueHDi engines attempts, operate the priming pump again, then
►  Switch on the ignition (without starting the the starter motor.
engine). ►  Put the cover back in place and clip it in, then
For versions supplied with a triangle as original close the bonnet.
►  Wait around 1 minute and switch off the
equipment, refer to the illustration above.
ignition.
For other versions, refer to the assembly
►  Operate the starter motor to start the engine.
instructions provided with the triangle.
If the engine does not start at the first attempt,
►  Put the triangle in place behind the vehicle,
do not keep trying, but restart the procedure.
as required by local legislation.

203
 In the event of a breakdown

Tool box Removing Opening

Access

►  Unclip fixings B on the cover, then open it for

access to the tools.

Storage
►  Press latches A and slide them inwards to ►  Refit the cover on the box and clip fixings B.
release the box.
►  To take it past bar 1, raise the box slightly
The tool box is located under the left-hand front
then pull it as far as it will go.
seat.

►  Position the box with the front inclined

upwards.
►  To take it past bar 2, push the box in and
►  Then, lift the box upwards to take it past bar down.
As a safety measure, bars 1 and 2 2. ►  To take it past bar 1, raise the box slightly
prevent the box escaping from its then push it fully in.
housing, if it is not correctly secured.

204
 In the event of a breakdown

Access to the kit

This kit is stowed in a tool box.
Tyre inflation pressures are indicated on
this label. 8
For more information on Identification
For more information on the Tool box, markings, particularly this label, refer to the
refer to the corresponding section. corresponding section.

List of tools
These tools are specific to the vehicle and may
►  Once the box is fully home in its housing,
vary according to the level of equipment. Do not
push it against the floor carpet then slide latches
A outwards to secure it.
use them for any other purpose. Composition of the kit
Pull on the box to check that it is secure
in its housing.

Temporary puncture
repair kit
Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view
explanatory videos.

Made up of a compressor and a sealant 1. 12 V compressor. A. "Repair" or "Inflation" position selector.
cartridge, it allows you to carry out a temporary Contains a sealant cartridge for the B. On I/off O switch.
repair of the tyre so that you can drive to the temporary repair of a tyre and can also be C. Deflation button.
nearest garage. used for adjusting tyre pressures. D. Pressure gauge (in bars and psi).
It is designed to repair most punctures located 2. Towing eye.
on the tyre tread.
For more information on Towing, please
Its compressor can be used to check and
refer to the corresponding section.
adjust the pressure of the tyre.

205
 In the event of a breakdown

►  Switch off the ignition. ►  Start the vehicle and leave the engine
►  Turn the selector A to the "Repair" running.
position.
Do not start the compressor before
►  Check that switch B is in position "O".
connecting the white pipe to the tyre
Avoid removing any foreign bodies which valve: the sealant product would be expelled
have penetrated the tyre. through the pipe.

►  Switch on the compressor by moving switch

B to position I until the tyre pressure reaches
2.0 bars. The sealant product is injected under
pressure into the tyre; do not disconnect the
E. Compartment housing a cable with an
pipe from the valve during this operation (risk of
adaptor for a 12 V socket.
blowback).
F. Sealant cartridge.
G. White pipe with cap for repair and inflation. If after approximately seven minutes this
H. Speed limit sticker. pressure is not reached, this indicates
that the tyre is not repairable; contact a
The vehicle's electrical system allows the CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop for
connection of the compressor for long assistance.
enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture ►  Uncoil the white pipe G fully.
repair. ►  Unscrew the cap from the white pipe. ►  Remove the kit and screw the cap back on
Only use the two 12 V sockets, located at the ►  Connect the white pipe to the valve of the the white pipe. Take care to avoid contaminating
front, to connect your compressor. tyre to be repaired. the vehicle with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to
►  Connect the compressor's electrical plug to hand.
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Repair and sealing ►  Affix the speed limit sticker.
Take care, the sealant product is harmful
if swallowed and causes irritation to the
procedure eyes.
►  Park the vehicle without obstructing any The speed limit sticker must be secured Keep this product out of the reach of children.
traffic and apply the parking brake. to the interior of the vehicle in the driver's The use-by date of the fluid is marked on the
►  Follow the safety instructions (hazard field of vision, to remind you that a wheel is in bottle.
warning lamps, warning triangle, wearing high temporary use. After use, do not discard the bottle in
visibility vest, etc.) according to the legislation in standard waste, take it to a CITROËN dealer
force in the country where you are driving. or an authorised waste disposal site.

206
 In the event of a breakdown

Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of

sealant, available from a CITROËN dealer or
Inflating, adjusting and
checking tyre pressures
"I"; to deflate: set switch B to position "O" and
press button C), according to the vehicle's tyre 8
a qualified workshop. pressure label located by the driver's door.
A subsequent loss of pressure indicates that the
puncture has not been fully sealed; contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop to have
your vehicle repaired.
►  Remove the kit and stow it.
►  Drive at reduced speed (50 mph
(80 km/h) max.), limiting the distance
travelled to approximately 125 miles (200 km).

The compressor can also be used,

►  Drive immediately for approximately three without injecting sealant, to check and
miles (five kilometres), at reduced speed adjust the tyre pressures.
►  Turn selector A to the "Inflation"
(between 12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), to position.
plug the puncture. If after approximately 7 minutes the
►  Uncoil the white pipe G fully.
►  Stop to check the repair and measure the required pressure is not reached, this
►  Connect the white pipe to the valve on the
tyre pressure using the kit. indicates that the tyre is irreparably damaged;
repaired tyre.
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
►  Reconnect the compressor's electric plug to
workshop for assistance.
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
►  Start the vehicle and leave the engine
running. Do not drive more than 125 miles (200
km) with a repaired tyre; see a CITROËN
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified dealer or a qualified workshop to have the
workshop as soon as possible. tyre changed.
You must tell the technician that the kit has
been used. After inspection, the technician
Should the pressure of one or more tyres
will advise you on whether the tyre can be
be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise
repaired or if it must be replaced.
the under-inflation detection system.
►  Adjust the tyre pressure using the For more information on Tyre under-inflation
compressor (to inflate: set switch B to position detection, refer to the corresponding section.

207
 In the event of a breakdown

Removing the pipe and ►  Remove the pipe assembly 2. List of tools
►  Hold the compressor up vertically.
cartridge ►  Unscrew the cartridge 4 from the bottom.
To fit the new cartridge and new pipe, carry out
these operations in reverse order.

Beware of fluid discharge.

The expiry date of the fluid is indicated
on the cartridge.
The sealant cartridge is designed for single
use; it must be replaced even if only partly
used.
After use, do not discard the cartridge in
standard waste, take it to a CITROËN dealer 1. Wheelbrace.
or an authorised waste disposal site. Used to remove the wheel bolts and raise/
►  Turn the pipe assembly 2 to the left until it lower the jack.
Do not forget to obtain a new cartridge,
comes into contact with the unit. 2. Jack.
available from a CITROËN dealer or a
►  Disconnect the connector 1 from the cartridge Used to raise the vehicle.
qualified workshop.
by turning it a quarter turn anti-clockwise. 3. Wheel bolt cover/wheel trim removal tool.
►  Pull the pipe assembly 2 out slightly, then Depending on the vehicle's equipment, this is
disconnect the connector 3 from the air intake
pipe by turning it a quarter turn anti-clockwise.
Spare wheel used to remove the wheel bolt covers on alloy
wheels or the wheel trim on steel wheels.
Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view 4. Socket for "anti-theft" wheel bolts.
explanatory videos. Used to adapt the wheelbrace to the special
"anti-theft" bolts.
5. Towing eye.
Access to the tools
The tools are stowed in a tool box. For more information on Towing, please
refer to the corresponding section.
For more information on the Tool box,
refer to the corresponding section.

208
 In the event of a breakdown

These tools are specific to the vehicle

and may vary according to the level of 8
equipment.
Do not use them for any other purpose.

The jack must only be used to change a ►  If the vehicle is fitted with a towing device,
wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre. raise the rear of the vehicle using the jack (must
Do not use any jack other than the one be at jacking point B) to allow sufficient space to
supplied with the vehicle. remove the spare wheel.
If the vehicle does not have its original jack,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Remove the spare wheel from the ►  Release the carrier from the hook, take the
workshop to obtain the one that was intended carrier spare wheel and place it next to the wheel to be
by the manufacturer.
changed.
The jack meets European standards, as
defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/ Refit the spare wheel in the carrier
CE.
The jack does not require any maintenance.

Access to the spare wheel

►  Access to the spare wheel is from the rear.
►  Depending on version, open the side-hinged
doors or the tailgate. ►  Access the carrier bolt, located on the rear
To avoid any unwanted opening of the door sill.
electric side door(s), deactivate the ►  Slacken the bolt using the wheelbrace (about
Hands-Free Access function in the vehicle 14 turns) until the carrier is low enough to allow
configuration menu. the carrier hook to be disengaged.
►  Position the wheel facing the carrier.
For more information on the Hands-Free
►  Progressively return the wheel to the carrier
Sliding Side Door, refer to the corresponding
by pushing alternately at the left and right until it
section.
is clear of the hook fixing area.

209
 In the event of a breakdown

►  Engage the carrier on the hook, then tighten With an automatic gearbox, place the gear ►  With an alloy wheel, remove the cover from
the bolt using the wheelbrace until the bolt is fully selector in position P then switch off the each of the bolts using tool 3.
tightened. ignition to block the wheels. ►  If the vehicle is so equipped, fit security bolt
Tyre in the carrier With a drive selector, place the gear selector socket 4 to wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security
You can change the size of the tyre on the spare in position P then switch off the ignition to bolt.
wheel by following the instructions below. block the wheels. ►  Slacken (without removing) the other wheel
Apply the parking brake, unless it is bolts using just wheelbrace 1.
Original tyre XS-M XL
programmed to automatic mode (for an
size
electric parking brake), and check that the
215/65 R16 Placing a There is no indicator lamp lights up on the instrument
225 wheel in restriction. panel.
215/60 R17
the carrier is Ensure that the occupants have left the
215/60 R17 prohibited. vehicle and are located in a safe place.
M&S
Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a ►  Place the foot of the jack on the ground and
225/55 R17 Placing a jack; use an axle stand. ensure that it is directly below the A or B jacking
215 wheel in With an electric parking brake, place a chock point provided on the underbody, whichever is
the carrier is against the wheel diagonally opposite to the closest to the wheel to be changed.
not recom- one being replaced.
mended (risk
of noise).

A punctured tyre of size 215 or 225 can

be placed in the carrier.

Removing a wheel
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it does
not obstruct traffic: the ground must be level,
stable and non-slippery.
With a manual gearbox, engage first gear ►  With a steel wheel, remove the bolt cover
then switch off the ignition to block the using tool 3 or the wheel trim by hand.
wheels.

210
 In the event of a breakdown

►  Pre-tighten the other bolts using the

wheelbrace 1 only. 8

►  Use the knob to extend the jack 2 until its ►  Remove the bolts and store them in a clean
head comes into contact with jacking point A or place.
B, whichever is used; contact surface A or B on ►  Remove the wheel.
the vehicle must be correctly engaged with the ►  Lower the vehicle again fully.
central part of the head of the jack. Fitting the wheel ►  Fold jack 2 and remove it.
►  Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
space between the wheel and the ground to
admit the spare (not punctured) wheel easily.

Risk of injury!
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the
ground is slippery or loose, the jack may slip
or collapse.
Ensure that the jack is positioned strictly at ►  If fitted to your vehicle, tighten the anti-theft
one of the jacking points A or B under the bolt using the wheelbrace 1 fitted with the anti-
vehicle, making sure that the vehicle's contact theft socket 4.
surface is correctly centred on the head of the ►  Tighten the other bolts using the
jack. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to ►  Fit the wheel on the hub. wheelbrace 1 only.
the vehicle and/or of the jack collapsing. ►  Screw in the bolts by hand as far as possible. ►  Stow the tools in the tool box.
►  If fitted to your vehicle, pre-tighten the anti-
theft bolt using the wheelbrace 1 fitted with the
anti-theft socket 4.

211
 In the event of a breakdown

Fitting a steel or "space-saver" type Tyre under-inflation detection Changing a bulb must only be done with
spare wheel The steel spare wheel does not have a the ignition off and after the headlamp /
sensor. lamp has been switched off for several
minutes - risk of serious burns!
Wheel with wheel trim Do not touch the bulb directly with your
When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel fingers; use a lint-free cloth.
trim, starting by aligning the cutout with the It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet
valve and then pushing the trim into place all (UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the
If the vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, the round its edge with the palm of your hand. headlamp.
washers A do not make contact with the steel Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb
or "space-saver" type spare wheel. The wheel of the same type and specification. To avoid
is held in place by the conical contact surface Changing a bulb lighting imbalance, replace the bulbs in pairs.
B of each bolt.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low Halogen bulbs (Hx)
After changing a wheel temperature or humidity), misting on the To ensure good quality lighting, check
Stow the punctured wheel in the carrier. internal surface of the glass of the headlamps that the bulb is correctly positioned in its
Go promptly to a CITROËN dealer or a and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear housing.
qualified workshop. after the lamps have been on for a few
Have the punctured tyre examined. After minutes. Opening the bonnet/Accessing the
inspection, the technician will advise you on bulbs
whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must The headlamps have polycarbonate Proceed with caution when the engine is hot -
be replaced. lenses with a protective coating: risk of burns!
–  Do not clean them with a dry or abrasive Take care with objects or clothing that could
Some driving aid functions should be cloth, nor with detergent or solvent be caught in the blades of the cooling fan -
disabled, e.g. the Active Safety Brake. products. risk of strangulation!
–  Use a sponge and soapy water or a pH
If your vehicle has tyre under-inflation neutral product. After changing a bulb
detection, check the tyre pressures and –  When using a high-pressure washer on To refit, carry out the operations in
reinitialise the system. persistent marks, do not keep the lance reverse order to removal.
For more information on Tyre under-inflation directed towards the headlamps, lamps or Close the protective cover very carefully to
detection, refer to the corresponding section. their edges for too long, so as not to damage guarantee the sealing of the lamps.
their protective coating and seals.

212
 In the event of a breakdown

Model with halogen

headlamps
Be aware of the zone behind the right
lamp (vehicle direction), which may be
Do not touch the Xenon lamps (D8S)
– risk of electrocution! 8
hot with a risk of burning (degassing hoses). If you need to replace this type of bulb, you
must contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Accessing the bulbs

Daytime running lamps

1. Sidelamps (W5W-5W)
2. Main beam headlamps (H1-55W)
►  Press the upper clip on the cover then tilt it
3. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W)
backwards to remove it.
4. Daytime running lamps (W21W LL-21W)
►  Press the two side clips on the connector and
5. Direction indicators (PY21W-21W amber) Dipped beam headlamps remove the assembly of connector and bulb.
►  Pull out the bulb and replace it.
Model with Xenon
Sidelamps
headlamps

►  Press the lower clip on the connector and

remove the assembly of connector and bulb.
►  Pull out the bulb and replace it.
►  Press the two side clips on the connector and
When refitting the connector and bulb in
remove the assembly of connector and bulb.
the lamp unit, correctly position the
1. Main beam headlamps (H1-55W) ►  Pull out the bulb and replace it.
assembly in its housing until it clicks into
2. Dipped beam headlamps (D8S-25W)
place.
3. Direction indicators (PY21W-21W amber)

213
 In the event of a breakdown

Main beam headlamps Daytime running lamps/ ►  Underneath the front bumper, slacken the
bolts on deflector A, then remove it.
sidelamps

►  Press the lower clip on the connector and

remove the assembly of connector and bulb.
►  Pull out the bulb and replace it.
►  Press the locking clip and disconnect the
Direction indicators connector.
►  Unscrew the bulb holder a quarter turn anti-
clockwise and remove it.
For the replacement of these bulbs, contact a ►  Replace the faulty bulb.
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
You can also contact a CITROËN dealer
A replacement kit for the LEDs is available from
or a qualified workshop to replace these
CITROËN dealers.
bulbs.
►  Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn
anti-clockwise.
Front foglamps (H11-55W)
►  Remove the bulb holder and replace the Direction indicator side
faulty bulb. repeater
Rapid flashing of a direction indicator
lamp (left or right) indicates that one of
the bulbs on the corresponding side has
failed.

Amber-coloured bulbs must be replaced

by bulbs with identical specifications and
colour. –  Push the repeater towards the rear and
release it.

214
 In the event of a breakdown

–  When refitting, engage the repeater towards

the front and then bring it back towards the rear. 8
Amber-coloured bulbs (direction indicators and
side repeaters) must be replaced with bulbs of
identical specification and colour.

Rear lamps

►  With side-hinged doors, unscrew the 2 fixing ►  Spread the 3 lugs slightly, then extract the
screws from the outside. bulb holder.
►  With the tailgate, unclip the plastic trim from ►  Remove the faulty bulb by pressing lightly on
the outside and then tilt it outwards to remove it. it, then turning it a quarter turn clockwise.
Then unscrew the 2 fixing screws. ►  Replace the bulb.

1. Brake lamps/Sidelamps (P21/5W-21/5W) Third brake lamp (W5W - 5W)

2. Direction indicators (PY21W-21W amber)
3. Reversing lamps (P21W-21W)
4. Foglamps/Sidelamps (P21/4W-21/4W)

For vehicles with interior trim, contact a

CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
to have the work done. ►  From the inside, and depending on the
version, remove the ventilation grille.
►  Identify the defective lamp and then,
►  While holding the lamp in place, press the
depending on the version, open the rear doors or
clip on the inside then carefully remove the lamp.
the tailgate. ►  Depending on version, open the rear left-
►  Disconnect the electrical connector.
hand door or tailgate.

215
 In the event of a breakdown

Number plate lamps (W5W-W) For the replacement of these bulbs, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
A replacement kit for the LEDs is available from
CITROËN dealers.
Courtesy lamps with bulb
W5W-5W

►  With side-hinged doors, remove the plastic

cover with the aid of a screwdriver.
►  With a tailgate, unclip the trim at each end, ►  Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the cut-
rotating it from bottom to top, then unclip the outs on the exterior of the lens.
centre clips to remove it. ►  Push it outwards to unclip it.
►  Using a screwdriver through the aperture, ►  Remove the lens and replace the faulty bulb.
push the lamp towards the outside. To refit, press the lens to clip it in.
►  Disconnect the electrical connector and then
remove the lamp. Courtesy lamps (front and ►  Unclip the lens by inserting a thin screwdriver
►  Unscrew the bulb holder a quarter turn anti- rear) into the slots at each side of the courtesy lamp.
clockwise and replace the faulty bulb. ►  Remove the bulb and change it.
To refit, press on the lamp to clip it into place. LED courtesy lamps
To refit, clip the lens in place and ensure that it
is secure.

216
 In the event of a breakdown

Platform cab (rear lamps) Changing a fuse Changing a fuse

Before changing a fuse:
8
Access to tools and to the ►  Identify the cause of the fault and fix it.
►  Switch off all power consumption.
dashboard fusebox ►  Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the
ignition.
►  Identify the defective fuse using the current
allocation tables and diagrams.
To replace a fuse, it is essential to:
1. Direction indicators (P21W-21W). ►  Use the special tweezers to extract the fuse
2. Brake lamps (P21W-21W). from its housing and check the condition of its
3. Sidelamps (R10W-10W). filament.
4. Reversing lamps (P21W-21W). ►  Always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of
5. Foglamps (P21W-21W). the same rating (same colour); use of a different
rating may cause malfunctions - risk of fire!
►  Locate the faulty bulb. If the fault recurs soon after replacing a fuse,
►  Unscrew the 4 fixing screws from the lens have the electrical system checked by a
unit and remove it. CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
►  Remove the faulty bulb by pressing lightly on
it, then turning it a quarter turn clockwise. Complete fuse allocation tables and
►  Change the bulb. corresponding diagrams
For more information, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.

The replacement of a fuse not shown in

The extraction tweezers and the fuses are
the allocation tables could cause a
located behind the fusebox cover.
serious malfunction of the vehicle.
►  Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left, then
Consult a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
right.
workshop.
►  Remove the cover completely.

217
 In the event of a breakdown

For more information on installing a

Fuse N° Rating Functions
towbar or TAXI type equipment, contact a
(Amps)
CITROËN dealer.
F10/ 30 Internal/external locks,
F11 front and rear.
Version 1 (Eco)
F14 5 Alarm, emergency and
Good Faulty
assistance calls.
F24 5 Touch screen, reversing
camera and parking
Tweezers sensors.
F29 20 Audio system, touch
Installing electrical accessories
screen, CD player,
The vehicle's electrical system is
navigation.
designed to operate with standard or optional
equipment. F32 15 Front 12 V accessory
Before fitting other electrical equipment socket.
or accessories to your vehicle, contact a The fuses described below vary according to the
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. equipment in your vehicle. Version 2 (Full)
Fuse N° Rating Functions
CITROËN accepts no responsibility for
(Amps)
the cost incurred in repairing the vehicle
or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from F4 15 Horn.
the installation of accessories not supplied or F5 20 Front/rear screenwash
not recommended by CITROËN and not pump.
installed in accordance with its
recommendations, in particular when the F6 20 Front/rear screenwash
combined power consumption of all of the pump.
additional equipment connected exceeds 10 F7 10 Rear 12 V accessory
milliamperes. socket.
F8 20 Single or double rear The fuses described below vary according to the
wipers. equipment in your vehicle.

218
 In the event of a breakdown

Fuse N° Rating
(Amps)
Functions
Accessing the fuses
Fuse N° Rating
(Amps)
Functions 8
F5 5 Touch screen, reversing F23 15 Right-hand main beam
camera and parking headlamp.
sensors.
F24 15 Left-hand main beam
F8 20 Single or double rear headlamp.
wipers.
F10/
F11
30 Internal/external locks,
front and rear.
12 V battery / Accessory
F12 3 Alarm. battery
F17 10 Rear 12 V accessory ►  Release the two latches A. Procedure for starting the engine using another
socket. ►  Remove the cover. battery or for charging a discharged battery.
►  Replace the fuse.
F33 15 Front 12 V accessory
►  When you have finished, close the cover Lead-acid starter batteries
socket.
carefully, then engage the two latches A to
Batteries contain harmful substances
F36 20 Audio system, touch ensure that the fusebox is properly sealed.
such as sulphuric acid and lead.
screen, CD player, The fuses described below vary according to the
They must be disposed of in accordance
navigation. equipment in your vehicle.
with regulations and must not, in any
Fuse N° Rating Functions circumstances, be discarded with household
Engine compartment fuses (Amps) waste.
The fusebox is placed in the engine Take used remote control batteries and
F14 25 Front and rear
compartment near the battery. vehicle batteries to a special collection point.
screenwash pump.
F19 30 Windscreen wiper Protect your eyes and face before
motor. handling the battery.
F20 15 Front and rear All operations on the battery must be carried
screenwash pump. out in a well ventilated area and away from
naked flames and sources of sparks, so as to
F22 15 Horn.
avoid the risk of explosion or fire.
Wash your hands afterwards.

219
 In the event of a breakdown

Electric motor at least equal to that of the discharged

battery.
Flat accessory battery The two vehicles must not be in contact with
It is no longer possible to start the motor each other.
or recharge the traction battery. Switch off all electricity-consuming equipment
on both vehicles (audio system, wipers,
Precautions before working on the lighting, etc.).
accessory battery Make sure that the jump leads are well away
Select mode P, switch off the ignition, check from the engine’s moving parts (fan, belt,
that the instrument panel is off and that the etc.).
vehicle is not plugged in. Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while the
►  Remove the plastic cover to access the (+)
engine is running.
terminal, if your vehicle has one.
Jump-starting another vehicle
The battery (-) terminal is not accessible.
Do not use the accessory battery to
A remote earth point is provided at the front of
jump-start another vehicle or to charge
the vehicle.
another vehicle's battery.
For more information on the Bonnet and
Always replace the battery with one of the Engine, refer to the corresponding
equivalent specification. sections.

Access to the battery Starting using another

The battery is located under the bonnet. battery
►  Open the bonnet using the interior release If the vehicle's battery is flat, the engine can be
lever, then the exterior safety catch. started using a backup battery (either external or ►  Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the
►  Secure the bonnet stay. from another vehicle) and jump leads or using a vehicle has one.
battery booster. ►  Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of
flat battery A (at the metal elbow), then to the
Never start the engine by connecting a (+) terminal of the backup battery B or of the
battery charger. booster.
Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster. ►  Connect one end of the green or black cable
Check beforehand that the backup battery to the (-) terminal of the backup battery B or of
has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity

220
 In the event of a breakdown

the booster (or to an earth point on the assisting

vehicle).
Charging the battery using a
battery charger
8
►  Connect the other end of the green or black
cable to the earth point C. For optimum service life of the battery, it is
►  Start the engine on the assisting vehicle and essential to maintain an adequate state of
leave it running for a few minutes. charge.
►  Operate the starter on the broken down In some circumstances, it may be necessary to
vehicle and let the engine run. charge the battery:
If the engine does not start immediately, switch –  When using the vehicle mainly for short
off the ignition and wait a few moments before journeys.
trying again. –  If the vehicle is to be taken off the road for
several weeks. ►  Switch off charger B before connecting
►  Wait for it to return to idle.
Consult a CITROËN dealer or a qualified the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any
►  Disconnect the jump leads in reverse order.
workshop. dangerous sparks.
►  Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
►  Ensure that the charger cables are in good
the vehicle has one. To charge the vehicle's battery yourself, condition.
►  Allow the engine to run for at least use only a charger compatible with ►  Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the
30 minutes, with the vehicle stationary, so that lead-acid batteries with a nominal voltage of vehicle has one.
the battery reaches an adequate state of charge. 12 V. ►  Connect the cables of charger B as follows:
Driving immediately without having •  the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal
reached a sufficient level of charge may Follow the instructions provided by the of battery A,
affect some of the vehicle's functionalities. manufacturer of the charger. •  the negative (-) black cable to earth point C
Never reverse polarities. on the vehicle.
To disconnect, proceed in reverse order. ►  At the end of the charging operation, switch
It is not necessary to disconnect the off charger B before disconnecting the cables
battery. from battery A.
Automatic gearbox
►  Switch the ignition off.
Never try to start the engine by pushing
►  Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
the vehicle.
system, lighting, wipers, etc.).

221
 In the event of a breakdown

If this label is present, use only a 12 V Quick-release terminal clamp ►  Push clamp B fully down.
charger to avoid causing irreversible ►  Lower lever A to lock clamp B.
Disconnecting the (+) terminal
damage to the electrical components. ►  Depending on equipment, lower the plastic
cover on the (+) terminal.
24V Do not force the lever, as it will not lock
in place if the clamp is not positioned
correctly; start the procedure again.
12V

Following reconnection
Never try to charge a frozen battery - risk After reconnecting the battery, turn on the
of explosion! ignition and wait 1 minute before starting the
If the battery has frozen, have it checked by a engine, to enable the electronic systems to
CITROËN dealer or by a qualified workshop initialise.
who will verify that the internal components ►  Depending on equipment, lift the plastic cover If minor problems nevertheless persist following
have not been damaged and that the case on the (+) terminal. this operation, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
has not cracked, which would mean a risk of ►  Raise lever A fully to release clamp B. qualified workshop.
toxic and corrosive acid leaking. ►  Remove clamp B by lifting it off. Referring to the relevant section, reinitialise
Reconnecting the (+) terminal certain equipment:
–  Remote control key or electronic key
Disconnecting the battery (depending on version).
In order to maintain an adequate state of –  Electric windows.
charge for starting the engine, we recommend –  Date and time.
disconnecting the battery if the vehicle is to be –  Preset radio stations.
unused for an extended period.
The Stop & Start system may not be
Before disconnecting the battery:
operational during the trip following the
►  Close all openings (doors, tailgate, windows).
first engine start.
►  Switch off all electricity-consuming devices
In this case, the system will only be available
(audio system, wipers, lamps, etc.).
again after a continuous period with the
►  Switch off the ignition and wait for 4 minutes.
vehicle immobilised, the duration of which
After accessing the battery, it is only necessary
►  Raise lever A fully. depends on the exterior temperature and the
to disconnect the (+) terminal.
►  Refit open clamp B on the (+) terminal.

222
 In the event of a breakdown

state of charge of the battery (up to about 8

hours).
The towing vehicle must move off gently.
When the vehicle is towed with its engine
Before towing the vehicle, it is essential
to put the vehicle in free-wheeling mode. 8
off, there is no longer braking and steering For more information on Free-wheeling, refer
assistance. to the corresponding section.
Towing
A professional towing service must be Electric motor
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or
called if: An electric vehicle cannot under any
for towing another vehicle using a removable
–  Broken down on a motorway or main road. circumstances be used to tow another
mechanical device.
–  Not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, vehicle.
General recommendations unlock the steering, or release the parking However, it may be used, for example, to exit
Observe the legislation in force in the brake. a rut.
country where you are driving. –  Not possible to tow a vehicle with an
Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is automatic gearbox, with the engine running. With a manual gearbox, place the gear
higher than that of the towed vehicle. –  Towing with only two wheels on the ground. lever in neutral.
The driver must remain at the wheel of the –  Four-wheel drive vehicle. With an automatic gearbox, place the gear
towed vehicle and must have a valid driving –  No approved towbar available. selector in position N.
licence. Failure to adhere to this instruction may lead
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on to damage to some braking components and
the ground, always use an approved towing the lack of braking assistance on restarting
arm; rope and straps are prohibited. the engine.

Towing constraints
Type of vehicle Front wheels on the Rear wheels on the Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground
(engine/gearbox) ground ground with towbar
Internal combustion/Manual

Internal combustion/Automatic

223
 In the event of a breakdown

Towing constraints
Type of vehicle Front wheels on the Rear wheels on the Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground
(engine/gearbox) ground ground with towbar
Electric

In case of battery or electric parking brake failure, it is essential to call a professional using flatbed recovery vehicles (excluding manual gearbox).

Accessing the eye ►  Install the towbar.

►  Switch on the hazard warning lamps of the
►  Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the
vehicle being towed.
The towing eye is stowed in the tool box.
vehicle being towed. ►  Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a
For more information on the Tool box, ►  Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a short distance.
refer to the corresponding section. short distance.

Towing another vehicle

Towing your vehicle

►  On the rear bumper, press the cover (as

►  In the front bumper, slide a finger from the shown above) to unclip it.
centre of the cover plate to the upper corner (as ►  Screw the towing eye in fully.
shown above) to unclip it. ►  Install the towbar.
►  Screw the towing eye in fully.

224
 Technical data

Engine technical data and

towed loads
must be reduced by 10% for each additional
1,000 metres of altitude. 9
The maximum authorised nose weight
corresponds to the weight permitted on the
Engines towball.
The engine characteristics are given in the When exterior temperatures are high, the
vehicle's registration document, as well as in vehicle performance may be limited in
sales brochures. order to protect the engine. When the exterior
Only the values available at the time of temperature is higher than 37°C, reduce the
publication are presented in the tables. towed weight.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to obtain missing values.
Towing even with a lightly loaded vehicle
The maximum power corresponds to the can adversely affect its road holding.
value type-approved on a test bed, under Braking distances are increased when towing
conditions defined by European legislation a trailer.
(Directive 1999/99/EC). When using a vehicle to tow, never exceed
a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) (observe the
For more information, contact a CITROËN dealer local legislation in force).
or a qualified workshop.

Weights and towed loads

The weights and towed loads relating to
the vehicle are indicated on the registration
document, as well as in sales brochures.
These values are also indicated on the
manufacturer's plate or label.
For more information, contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
The GTW (Gross Train Weight) and towed load
values indicated are valid up to a maximum
altitude of 1,000 metres. The towed load value

225
 Technical data

Engines and towed loads - Diesel EURO 4/5

Engines HDi 150 BVM6 HDi 150 EAT6/EAT8 BlueHDi 150 BVM6 BlueHDi 150 EAT6/
EAT8
Gearboxes Manual 6-speed Automatic 6/8-speed Manual 6-speed Automatic 6/8-speed
Code DW10F DW10FD
Cubic capacity (cc) 1,997 1,997
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 110 110
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Length XS, M, XL M*, XL* XS, M, XL M*, XL* XS, M, XL M*, XL* XS, M, XL M*, XL*
(L1/L2/L3) (L2/L3)* (L1/L2/L3) (L2/L3)* (L1/L2/L3) (L2/L3)* (L1/L2/L3) (L2/L3)*
Braked trailer 6-7-8-9 seats 1,100 800 1,100 800
(within the GTW
limit) (kg)
on a 10% or 12%
gradient
Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750
(kg)
Maximum 44 32 44 32
authorised nose
weight (kg)

*  Increased payload.

226
 Technical data

Engines and towed loads - Diesel EURO 6.2 9

Engines BlueHDi 100 S&S BVM6 BlueHDi 120 S&S BVM6 BlueHDi 120 S&S EAT8
Gearboxes Manual 6-speed Manual 6-speed Automatic 8-speed
Code DV5RUCd - ML6 - STT DV5RUC - ML6 - STT DW10FEU - AMN8 - STT
Cubic capacity (cc) 1,499 1,499 1,997
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 75 88 88
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Length XS/M/XL M*/XL* XS/M/XL M*/XL* XS/M/XL M*/XL*
(L1/L2/L3) (L2/L3)* (L1/L2/L3) (L2/L3)* (L1/L2/L3) (L2/L3)*
Braked trailer (within the 6-7-8-9 seats 1,800 2,000 1,800 2,000 2,300 2,500
GTW limit) (kg)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 750 750 750 750 750 750
Maximum authorised nose 72 80 72 80 92 100
weight (kg)

*  Increased payload.

227
 Technical data

Engines BlueHDi 150 S&S BVM6 BlueHDi 180 S&S EAT8

Gearboxes Automatic 6-speed Automatic 8-speed
Code DW10FD - ML6 - STT DW10FDCU - AMN8 - STT
Cubic capacity (cc) 1,997 1,499
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 110 130
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Length XS/M/XL M*/XL* XS/M/XL M*/XL*
(L1/L2/L3) (L2/L3)* (L1/L2/L3) (L2/L3)*
Braked trailer (within the 6-7-8-9 seats 2,300 2,500 2,300 2,500
GTW limit) (kg)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 750 750 750 750
Maximum authorised nose 92 100 92 100
weight (kg)

228
 Technical data

Engines and towed loads - Diesel EURO 6.3 9

Engines BlueHDi 100 S&S BVM6 BlueHDi 120 S&S BVM6 BlueHDi 140 S&S BVM6
Gearboxes Manual 6-speed Manual 6-speed Manual 6-speed
Code DV5RUCd - ML6 - STT DV5RUC - ML6 - STT DW10FDDU - ML6 - STT
Cubic capacity (cc) 1,499 1,499 1,997
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 75 88 103
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Length XS/M/XL M*/XL* XS/M/XL M*/XL* XS/M/XL M*/XL*
(L1/L2/L3) (L2/L3)* (L1/L2/L3) (L2/L3)* (L1/L2/L3) (L2/L3)*
Braked trailer (within the 6-7-8-9 seats 1,400 1,400 1,900 1,800
GTW limit) (kg)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 750 750 750 750
Maximum authorised nose 84 84 84 84
weight (kg)

*  Increased payload.

229
 Technical data

Engines BlueHDi 140 S&S EAT8 BlueHDi 180 S&S EAT8

Gearboxes Automatic 8-speed Automatic 8-speed
Code DW10FDDU - AMN8 - STT DW10FDCU - AMN8 - STT
Cubic capacity (cc) 1,997 1,499
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 103 130
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Length XS/M/XL M*/XL* XS/M/XL M*/XL*
(L1/L2/L3) (L2/L3)* (L1/L2/L3) (L2/L3)*
Braked trailer (within the 6-7-8-9 seats 1,900 1,800 1,900 1,800
GTW limit) (kg)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 750 750 750 750
Maximum authorised nose 84 84 84 84
weight (kg)

230
 Technical data

Motor and towed loads - Electric

Electric motor
9
Electric motor
Technology Synchronous with permanent magnets
Max. power : EC standard (kW)/(hp) 100/136
Traction battery
Technology Lithium-Ion
Battery pack S: 18 modules (L1/L2/L3)
XL: 27 modules (L2/L3)*
Installed capacity (kWh) 50 or 75
Domestic charging Mode 2
Alternating current (AC) voltage 230
Rating (A) 8 or 16
Accelerated charging Mode 3
Alternating current (AC) voltage 230 (single-phase or three-phase)
Rating (A) 16 or 32
Superfast charging Mode 4
Direct current (DC) voltage 400

* Battery pack not available for right-hand drive Combi, Business, Feel, Shine, Business Lounge vehicles.

231
 Technical data

Towed loads

Model codes: ZZKXZ

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,000
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 750
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 60

Model codes: V1ESZ/V1EZZ/VZESZ/VZEZZ

Code: MEL ZAE BATT S/
MEL ZAE BATT XL
Length XS, M, XL
(L1/L2/L3)
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 5-6-7-8-9 seats 1,000
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 750
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 60

232
 Technical data

Dimensions (mm)
These dimensions have been measured on an
Tailgate XL
9
unladen vehicle.

Mirrors folded

XS * Increased payload.
** Increased payload with high body.
*** Depending on country of sale.

Side-hinged doors

233
 Technical data

XS

Mirrors folded

XL

Side-hinged doors

* With Moduwork, flap removed.

** Vehicle empty and not loaded.

234
 Technical data

Tailgate XL
9

XS * Increased payload.
** Increased payload with high body.
*** Depending on country of sale.
Platform cab

235
 Technical data

Identification markings –  Gross vehicle weight (GVW).

–  Gross train weight (GTW).
Various visible markings for the identification and –  Maximum weight on the front axle.
research of your vehicle. –  Maximum weight on the rear axle.
D. Tyres/paint code label.

Affixed to the driver's door.

Bears the following information about the tyres:
–  Tyre pressures, unladen and laden.
–  Tyre specification, made up of the dimensions
and type as well as the load and speed indices.
–  Spare tyre pressure.
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), under Also indicates the paint colour code.
the bonnet.
Stamped on the chassis. The vehicle may be originally equipped
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on the with tyres with higher load and speed
dashboard. indices than those indicated on the label,
Engraved on a label, visible through the without affecting tyre pressure (on cold tyres).
windscreen. In the event of a change in the type of tyres,
C. Manufacturer's label. contact a CITROËN dealer for the tyre fits
Affixed to the centre pillar. approved for the vehicle.
Bears the following information:
–  Manufacturer’s name.
–  European whole vehicle type approval
number.
–  Vehicle Identification number (VIN).

236
 Bluetooth® audio system

Bluetooth® audio system To avoid discharging the battery, the

audio system may switch off after a few
Short press: select the preset radio station.
Long press: preset a radio station. 10
minutes if the engine is not running. Radio:
Automatic step by step search up/down
for radio stations.
First steps Media:
Select previous/next CD, USB, streaming track.
Press: On/Off.
Scroll in a list.
Rotate: adjust volume.
Radio:
Short press: change audio source (radio;
Manual step by step search up/down for
USB; AUX (if equipment connected); CD;
radio stations.
streaming).
Select previous/next MP3 folder.
The different functions and settings Long press: display the Telephone menu (if a
Media:
described vary according to the version telephone is connected).
Select previous/next folder/genre/artist/playlist
and configuration of your vehicle. Adjust audio settings:
on the USB device.
Front/rear fader; left/right balance; bass/
Scroll in a list.
As a safety measure and because it treble; loudness; audio ambience.
Cancel the current operation.
requires sustained attention by the driver, Activate/Deactivate automatic volume
Go up one level (menu or folder).
the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone adjustment (based on the vehicle’s speed).
Access the main menu.
with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your Radio :
audio system must be done with the vehicle Short press: display the list of radio
Activate/Deactivate TA function (traffic
stationary and the ignition on. stations.
announcements).
Long press: update the list.
Long press: select type of announcement.
Media :
Your audio system is coded in such a Selection of FM/DAB/AM wavebands.
Short press: display the list of folders.
way that it will only operate in your
Long press: display the available sorting options.
vehicle.
Select the screen display mode, between:
All work on the system must be carried out
Date; Audio functions; Trip computer;
exclusively by a dealer or qualified workshop,
Telephone.
to avoid any risk of electrocution, fire or
Confirm or display contextual menu.
mechanical faults.

Buttons 1 to 6.

237
 Bluetooth® audio system

Steering mounted controls During a telephone call:

Short press: open the contextual telephone
In the event of a telephone call:
Short press: accept the call.
menu. Long press: reject the call.
Steering mounted controls - Long press: end the call. During a telephone call:
Type 1 Confirm a selection. Short press: open the contextual telephone
menu.
Increase volume. Long press: end the call.
Start voice recognition on your
Radio:
Decrease volume. smartphone via the system.
Select the previous / next preset radio
Radio:
station.
Mute / Restore sound by simultaneously Short press: display the list of radio
Select the previous / next item in a menu or a
pressing the increase and decrease stations.
list.
volume buttons. Long press: update the list.
Media:
Media:
Select the previous / next track.
Select the previous / next item in a menu or a
Steering mounted controls - Short press: display the list of folders.
list. Type 2 Long press: display the available sorting options.
Radio:
Radio:
Select the previous / next preset radio
Short press: display the list of radio
station.
stations. Access to the main menu. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a
Long press: update the list.
list.
Media: Increase volume. Media:
Short press: display the list of folders.
Select the previous / next track.
Long press: display the available sorting options. Mute / Restore the sound. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a
Other than telephone call:
list.
Short press: changing audio source Decrease volume. Press the thumbwheel: confirm.
(radio; USB; AUX (if equipment connected); CD;
streaming), confirmation if the "Telephone" Other than telephone call:
menu is open. Short press: changing audio source Menus
Long press: open the "Telephone" menu. (radio; USB; AUX (if equipment connected); CD; Depending on version.
In the event of a telephone call: streaming), confirmation if the "Telephone" "Multimedia": Media settings, Radio
Short press: accept the call. menu is open. settings.
Long press: reject the call. Long press: open the "Telephone" menu.

238
 Bluetooth® audio system

"Telephone": Call, Directory

management, Telephone management,
Press this button to display the list of
stations received locally.
Long procedure
Press the MENU button.
10
Hang up. To update this list, press for more than two
"Trip computer". seconds. The sound is cut while updating. Select "Audio functions".

"Maintenance": Diagnosis, Warning log, RDS Press OK.

etc.
The external environment (hills,
"Connections": Manage connections, Select the "FM waveband preferences"
buildings, tunnels, basement car parks,
search for devices. function.
etc.) may block reception, including in RDS
"Personalisation-configuration": Define Press OK.
mode. This is a normal effect of the way in
the vehicle parameters, Choice of
which radio waves are transmitted and does
language, Display configuration, Choice of units, Select "Frequency tracking (RDS)".
not indicate any failure of the audio
Date and time adjustment.
equipment.
Press the "MENU" button. Press OK, RDS is displayed on the
screen.
Move from one menu to another. If RDS is not available, the RDS symbol
appears struck out in the screen. Play TA messages
Enter a menu.
The RDS, if activated, enables you to The TA (Traffic Announcement) function
continue listening to the same station by gives priority to TA alert messages. To
operate, this function needs good reception of
Radio automatic retuning to alternative frequencies.
However, in certain conditions, coverage of a radio station that carries this type of
an RDS station may not be assured message. When a traffic report is transmitted,
Selecting a station throughout the entire country as radio stations the current audio source (Radio, CD, etc.) is
Press the SOURCE button repeatedly do not cover 100% of the territory. This interrupted automatically to play the TA
and select the radio. explains the loss of reception of the station message. Normal play of the media
Press this button to select a waveband during a journey. previously playing is resumed at the end of
(FM / AM / DAB). the message.
Press one of the buttons for an automatic
Short procedure
search for radio stations. Take care when increasing the volume
Press one of the buttons to carry out a In "Radio" mode, press the OK button to activate while listening to TA messages. The
manual search up / down for radio or deactivate RDS directly. volume may prove too high on return to the
frequencies. original audio source.

239
 Bluetooth® audio system

Press the TA button to activate or

deactivate traffic messages.
DAB (Digital Audio
Broadcasting) radio
Receiving INFO messages Depending on version
The INFO function gives priority to TA If the current DAB radio station is not
alert messages. To be active, this available on FM, "DAB FM" is struck out. Full list of radio stations and "multiplexes".
function needs good reception of a radio
station that transmits this type of message.
When a message is transmitted, the current Terrestrial digital radio
audio source (Radio, CD, USB, etc.) is
Digital radio provides a superior audio
interrupted automatically to receive the INFO
quality and also additional categories of
message. Normal play of the media
traffic announcements (TA INFO).
previously playing is resumed at the end of
The different "multiplex / ensemble” services
the message.
offer a choice of radio stations in alphabetical
Make a long press on this button to order.
display the list of categories. 1 Options display: if active but not available, the Change of band (FM1, FM2, DAB, etc.)
Select or deselect categories. display will be struck out.
2 Display showing the name of the current Change of station within the same
Activate or deactivate the reception of the station. "multiplex / ensemble".
corresponding messages. 3 Preset stations, buttons 1 to 6. Starting of a search for the previous / next
Short press: select the preset radio station.
Display TEXT INFOS Long press: memorise a radio station.
"multiplex / ensemble".
Long press: selection of the categories of
4 Display showing the name of the “multiplex” news desired among Transport, News,
Radio text is information transmitted by
service being used. Entertainment and Special Flash (available
the radio station related to the station's
5 RadioText (TXT) display for the current radio depending on the station).
current programme or song.
station.
When the radio station is displayed in the 6 Represents the signal strength for the band
screen, press OK to display the being listened to.
contextual menu.
Select "RadioText (TXT) display" and When changing region, updating the list
confirm OK to save. of preset radio stations is recommended.

240
 Bluetooth® audio system

When the radio station is displayed in the

screen , press "OK" to display the
If the "DAB" station you are listening to is
not available on FM ("DAB/FM" option
When the USB port is used, the portable
device charges automatically. 10
contextual menu. struck out), or if "DAB / FM auto tracking" is
(Frequency search (RDS), DAB / FM auto not on, the sound will be cut when the digital
Play mode
tracking, RadioText (TXT) display, Information signal is too weak.
on the station, etc.) The play modes available are:
–  Normal: the tracks are played in order,

DAB / FM station tracking Media depending on the classification of the selected

files.
–  Random: the tracks in an album or folder are
"DAB" does not have 100% coverage of USB port played in a random order.
the country.
Insert the USB memory stick into the USB –  Random on all media: all of the tracks saved
When the digital signal is weak, "DAB / FM
port or connect the USB device to the in the media are played in random order.
auto tracking" allows you to continue
USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). –  Repeat: the tracks played are only those from
listening to the same station, by automatically
The system changes automatically to "USB" the current album or folder.
switching to the corresponding analogue FM
source. Press this button to display the contextual
station (if it exists).
menu for the Media function.
When the "DAB / FM auto tracking" is active, To protect the system, do not use a USB
Press this button to select the chosen
the DAB station will be selected automatically. hub.
play mode.
Press the MENU button. Press this button to confirm.
Any additional devices connected to the
system must comply with the standard The choice made is displayed at the top of the
Select "Multimedia" and confirm.
applicable to the product and/or the standard screen.
IEC 60950-1.
Select "DAB / FM auto tracking" and
Choosing a track to play
confirm. The system builds playlists (in temporary
Press one of these buttons to go to the
memory); this operation can take from a
If "DAB / FM auto tracking" tracking is previous / next track.
few seconds to several minutes at the first
enabled, there is a lag of a few seconds Press one of these buttons to go to the
connection.
when the system switches to the analogue previous / next folder.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
FM station sometimes with a change in
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
volume. File classification
Playlists are updated every time a new USB
Make a long press on this button to
memory stick is connected.
display the different classifications.

241
 Bluetooth® audio system

Select by "Folder" / "Artist" / "Genre" / applicable to the product and/or the standard Press the LIST button to display the list of
"Playlist". IEC 60950-1. tracks on the CD.
Depending on availability and type of device Press and hold one of these buttons for
used. Press the SOURCE button several times fast forward or rewind.
Press OK to select the desired in succession and select "AUX".
classification, then press OK again to First adjust the volume on your portable device Playing an MP3 compilation
confirm. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume on your
Insert an MP3 compilation in the CD player.
audio system. Controls are managed via the
The audio equipment searches for all of the
Playing files portable device.
music tracks, which may take anything between
Make a short press on this button to Do not connect the same device to both a few seconds and several tens of seconds,
display the chosen classification. the auxiliary jack socket and the USB before play begins.
Navigate in the list using the left / right port at the same time.
On a single disc, the CD player can read
and up / down buttons.
up to 255 MP3 files spread over 8
Confirm the selection by pressing OK.
CD player directory levels.
However, it is advisable to keep to a limit of
Press one of these buttons to go to the Insert circular compact discs only.
two levels to reduce the access time before
previous / next track in the list. Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs
the CD is played.
Press and hold one of these buttons for fast or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may
The folder structure is not observed during
forward or rewind. cause faults which are no reflection on the
playback.
Press one of these buttons to go to the quality of the original player.
All of the files are displayed on a single level.
previous / next "Folder" / "Artist" / Insert a CD in the player, play begins
"Genre" / "Playlist"* in the list. automatically. To play a disc which has already been
inserted, press the SOURCE button
Input AUX socket (AUX) External CD players connected via the
USB port are not recognised by the several times in succession and select "CD".
Depending on equipment Press one of the buttons to select a folder
system.
Connect a portable device (MP3 player, on the CD.
etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an To play a disc which has already been Press one of the buttons to select a track
audio cable (not supplied). inserted, press the SOURCE button on the CD.
several times in succession and select "CD". Press the LIST button to display the list of
Any additional devices connected to the
Press one of the buttons to select a track directories of the MP3 compilation.
system must comply with the standard
on the CD.

* Depending on availability and the type of device used.

242
 Bluetooth® audio system

Press and hold one of these buttons for

fast forward or rewind.
Information and advice
The CD player can play files with “.mp3”, “.wma”,
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet standard is recommended. 10
To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.
“.wav” and “.aac” file extensions, with a bit rate of
Bluetooth® audio streaming 32 to 320 Kbps. Use only USB memory sticks formatted
Streaming allows music files on the telephone to It also supports TAG mode (ID3 tag, WMA TAG). FAT 32 (File Allocation Table).
be played via the vehicle's loudspeakers. No other file types (“.mp”4, etc.) can be read.
Connect the telephone. Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma 9 It is recommended that you use genuine
(Refer to the "Pairing a Bluetooth® telephone" standard. Apple® USB cables for correct operation.
section). The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 and
Activate the streaming source by pressing 48 kHz.
SOURCE.
In certain cases, play of the audio files must be
Via the USB port, the system can play audio files
with the extension ".mp3”, “.wma”, “.wav”, “.cbr”,
Telephone
initiated from the keypad. “.vbr" with a bit rate of 32 to 320 Kbps.
Audio files can be selected using the buttons on No other file types (“.mp4”, etc.) can be read. Pairing a Bluetooth®
the audio system control panel and the steering
mounted controls. The contextual information
Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma 9 telephone
standard.
can be displayed in the screen. The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 and As a safety measure and because they
If the telephone supports the function. The audio 48 kHz. require prolonged attention on the part of
quality depends on the quality of transmission by File names should have fewer than 20 the driver, the operations for pairing of the
the telephone. characters, avoiding special characters (e.g. Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth
« ? ; ù) so as to avoid any reading or display hands-free system of your audio system must
Connecting Apple® players problems. be carried out with the vehicle stationary
Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using In order to be able to play a burned CDR or and the ignition on.
a suitable cable (not supplied). CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2, or
Play starts automatically. Joliet, if possible, when burning the CD. Activate the telephone's Bluetooth
Control is via the audio system. If the disc is burned in another format, it may not function and ensure that it is "visible to
The classifications available are those of the be played correctly. all" (telephone configuration).
portable device connected (artists / albums / It is recommended that the same burning
genres / playlists). standard be always used on an individual disc,
The version of software in the audio system may with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum) for
not be compatible with the generation of your the best acoustic quality.
Apple® player.

243
 Bluetooth® audio system

The services available depend on the from the system), ensure that the code is the Press OK to confirm.
network, the SIM card and the same in the system and in the telephone.
compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Select "Bluetooth Connections
Check the instructions for your telephone and If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not management" and confirm. The list of
with your service provider for the services to restricted. paired telephones is displayed.
which you have access. A message appears in the screen confirming the Press OK to confirm.
pairing.
Indicates that a device is connected.
Procedure from the telephone Information and advice
Select the name of the system in the list The "Telephone" menu gives access to the
of devices detected. following functions in particular: "Directory", if A number indicates the profile of the
your telephone equipment is fully compatible, connection with the system:
Procedure from the system "Call log", "View paired devices". –  1 for media or 1 for telephone.
Press the MENU button. Depending on the type of telephone, you may be –  2 for media and telephone.
asked to accept or confirm access by the system
Indicates connection of the audio
Select "Connections". to each of these functions.
steaming profile.
Go to the Brand's website for more Indicates connection of the hands-free
Confirm with OK.
information (compatibility, more help, telephone profile.
etc.). Select a telephone.
Select "Search for a device".

Press OK to confirm.
Confirm with OK. Managing connections
The telephone connection automatically Then select and confirm:
A window is displayed with a search in progress
message. includes hands free operation and audio
streaming. – "Connect telephone" / "Disconnect
In the list of devices detected, select a telephone
The ability of the system to connect to just telephone" : to connect / disconnect the
to pair. Only one telephone can be paired at a
one profile depends on the telephone. Both telephone or the hands-free kit only.
time.
profiles may connect by default. – "Connect media player" / "Disconnect
Completing the pairing media player" : to connect / disconnect
Press the MENU button. streaming only.
To complete the pairing, whichever – "Connect telephone + media player" /
procedure is used (from the telephone or Select "Connections". "Disconnect telephone + media player" : to

244
 Bluetooth® audio system

connect / disconnect the telephone (hands-free

kit and streaming).
Press this button for more than two
seconds for access to your directory, then
Confirm with OK.
10
– "Delete connection": to delete the pairing. navigate using the thumb wheel.
Microphone off
When you delete a pairing in the system,
remember to delete it from your
Ending a call (so that the caller cannot hear)
In the "Telephone" menu. In the contextual menu:
telephone as well.
Select "End call".
Press OK to confirm. Confirm with OK to end the call. –  select "Micro OFF" to switch off the
During a call, press one of these buttons microphone.
for more than two seconds. –  deselect "Micro OFF" to switch the
Receiving a call The system accesses the telephone's
microphone on.
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a Confirm with OK.
contacts directory, depending on its
superimposed display in the screen. compatibility, and while it is connected via
Select the "YES" tab in the screen using Bluetooth. Telephone mode
the buttons.
Confirm with OK. In the contextual menu:
With certain telephones connected by
Bluetooth you can send a contact to the –  select "Telephone mode" to transfer the
Press this button at the steering mounted
directory of the audio system. call to the telephone (for example, to leave the
controls to accept the call.
Contacts imported in this way are saved in a vehicle while continuing a conversation).
Making a call permanent directory visible to all, whatever
the telephone connected.
–  deselect "Telephone mode" to transfer the
call to the vehicle.
In the "Telephone" menu.
The menu for the directory is not accessible if Confirm with OK.
Select "Call".
it is empty.
Select "Dial".
If the contact has been cut off, when you
Or
Select "Directory". Managing calls reconnect on returning to the vehicle,
the Bluetooth connection will be restored
Or During a call, press OK to display the
automatically and sound returned to the
Select "Calls list". contextual menu.
system (depending on the compatibility of the
Confirm with OK.
telephone).
End call
In some cases, the Telephone mode must be
In the contextual menu, select "Hang up"
activated from the telephone.
to end the call.

245
 Bluetooth® audio system

Interactive voice response compatibility, and while it is connected via With the engine off, the audio system
From the contextual menu, select "DTMF Bluetooth. switches off after a few minutes of use.
tones" and confirm to use the digital With certain telephones connected by When the engine is switched off, the audio
keypad to navigate in the interactive voice Bluetooth you can send a contact to the system operating time depends on the state of
response menu. directory of the audio system. charge of the battery.
Confirm with OK. Contacts imported in this way are saved in a The switch-off is normal: the audio system
permanent directory visible to all, whatever the switches to economy mode and switches off to
telephone connected. avoid discharging the vehicle's battery.
Consultation call The menu for the directory is not accessible if it ►  Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the
From the contextual menu, select is empty. charge of the battery.
"Switch" and validate to return to a call The message "the audio system is
left on hold. Voice recognition overheated" is displayed onscreen.
Confirm with OK. This function allows you to use your To protect the installation if the ambient
smartphone's voice recognition via the system. temperature is too high, the audio system
To start voice recognition, depending on the type switches to an automatic thermal protection
Directory of steering mounted controls: mode, in which the volume may be decreased or
To access the directory, press and hold Make a long press on the end of the lighting the CD player stopped.
SRC/TEL. control stalk. ►  Switch the audio system off for a few minutes
Select "Directory" to see the list of OR to allow the system to cool.
contacts. Press this button.
Confirm with OK.
Radio
There is a difference in sound quality
Voice recognition requires the use of a
To modify the contacts saved in the between the different audio sources (radio,
compatible smartphone first connected to
system, press MENU then select CD, etc.).
the vehicle by Bluetooth.
"Telephone" and confirm. For optimal listening quality, the audio settings
Select "Directory management" and confirm. (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience and Loudness)
can be adjusted to different audio sources,
You can:
– "Consult an entry",
Frequently asked resulting in audible differences when switching
– "Delete an entry", questions between sources (radio, CD, etc.).
– "Delete all entries". ►  Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
The following information groups together the
The system accesses the telephone's Treble, Ambience and Loudness) are appropriate
answers to the most frequently asked questions
contacts directory, depending on its to the sources being listened to. We recommend
concerning your audio system.
setting the audio functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re

246
 Bluetooth® audio system

balance and Le-Ri balance) to the middle

position, setting the musical ambience to "None",
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for
example when going through an automatic car
►  Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too badly damaged. 10
setting loudness correction to "Active" in CD wash or in an underground car park). ►  Check the content in the case of a burned
mode and "Inactive" in Radio mode. ►  Have the aerial checked by a dealer. CD: read the recommendations in the "Audio"
The preset stations do not function (no The sound intermittently cuts out for 1 or 2 section.
sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, etc.). seconds in radio mode. Due to poor quality, certain burned CDs will not
The wrong waveband is selected. During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS be played by the audio system.
►  Press the BAND button to return to the searches for another frequency giving better The CD audio quality is is poor.
waveband (FM, FM2, DAB, AM) on which the reception of the station. The CD is scratched or of poor quality.
stations are preset. ►  Switch off the RDS function if the ►  Insert good quality CDs and store them in
Traffic announcement (TA) is shown but I phenomenon occurs too frequently and always suitable conditions.
receive no traffic information. on the same route. The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are
The radio station is not part of the regional traffic unsuitable.
information network. Media ►  Return bass and treble settings to 0, without
►  Tune to a radio station that broadcasts traffic The Bluetooth connection is cut. selecting an ambience.
information. The battery in the peripheral device may not be I am unable to play the music files on my
The reception quality of the tuned radio sufficiently charged. smartphone via the USB port.
station gradually deteriorates or the station ►  Charge the battery in the peripheral device. Depending on the smartphone, access by the
presets are inoperative (no sound, 87.5 MHz The message "USB device error" is displayed audio system to music on the smartphone may
is displayed, etc.). in the screen. have to be approved on the latter.
The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s The USB stick has not been recognised, or may ►  Manually activate the MTP profile on the
transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the be corrupted. smartphone (USB settings menu).
geographical area. ►  Reformat the USB memory stick.
►  Activate the RDS function to allow the system The CD is systematically ejected or is not Telephone
to check for a more powerful transmitter in the played. I am unable to access my voicemail.
area. The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does Few telephones or service providers allow the
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, not contain audio files or contains audio files of a use of this function.
basement car parks, etc.) may block reception, format not recognised by the audio system. ►  Call your voicemail, via the telephone menu,
including in RDS mode. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system using the number provided by your operator.
This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is not recognised by the audio system. I am unable to access my directory of
not indicative of an audio system malfunction. ►  Check that the CD is inserted in the player contacts.
the right way up. ►  Check the compatibility of your telephone.

247
 Bluetooth® audio system

You did not grant access to your contacts when

pairing the telephone.
►  Accept or confirm access by the system to
the contacts on your telephone.
I am unable to continue a conversation when
getting into my vehicle.
Handset mode is activated.
►  Deselect handset mode to transfer the call to
the vehicle.
I am unable to pair my telephone by
Bluetooth.
Telephones (models, versions of operating
systems) have their own specificities in the
pairing procedure and some telephones are not
compatible.
►  Before starting the pairing procedure, delete
the telephone pairing from the system and the
system pairing from the telephone, in order to
view the compatibility of the telephones.

248
 CITROËN Connect Radio

CITROËN Connect Radio –  Changing the system settings and

configuration.
At all times it is possible to display the rolling
menus by pressing the screen briefly with three 11
fingers.
The system is protected so that it only All touch-sensitive areas on the screen are
operates in the vehicle. white.
The message Energy economy mode is On pages with multiple tabs at the bottom of the
displayed when the system is about to go into screen, you can switch between pages either
standby. by tapping the tab for the desired page or by
swiping the pages to the left or right with your
finger.
The system’s Open Source Software
Press in the shaded area to go back up a level
(OSS) source codes are available at the
or confirm.
following addresses:
Press the back arrow to go back a level or
Multimedia audio system - [Link]
[Link]
confirm.
Applications - Bluetooth® The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
telephone type.
First steps To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive
The functions and settings described cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional
vary according to the vehicle version and With the engine running, a press mutes
product.
configuration, as well as the country of sale. the sound.
Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
With the ignition off, a press turns the system on.
Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
Increase or decrease the volume using
For safety reasons and because they
the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons Certain information is displayed permanently in
require sustained attention by the driver,
(depending on the equipment). the upper bar of the touch screen:
the following operations must be carried out
Use the buttons on either side of or below the –  Air conditioning status information (depending
with the vehicle stationary and the ignition
touch screen to access the menus, then press on version), and direct access to the
on:
the virtual buttons on the touch screen. corresponding menu.
–  Pairing the smartphone with the system via
Depending on the model, use the "Source" and –  Radio Media and Telephone menu status
Bluetooth.
"Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen to information.
–  Using the smartphone.
access the menus, then press the virtual buttons –  Privacy status information.
–  Connecting to the CarPlay® or Android
on the touch screen. –  Access to the touch screen and digital
Auto applications (certain applications stop
displaying when the vehicle is moving). instrument panel settings.

249
 CITROËN Connect Radio

Audio source selection (depending on enter standby mode (with the screen and Increase volume.
equipment): sound off) for 5 minutes or more.
–  FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on The system will resume normal operation Decrease volume.
equipment). when the temperature in the passenger
–  Telephone connected via Bluetooth and compartment has dropped. Mute/restore sound by simultaneously
Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). pressing the increase and decrease
–  USB Memory stick. volume buttons.
–  Media player connected via the auxiliary Steering mounted controls Steering mounted controls -
socket (depending on equipment).

Steering mounted controls - Type 2

Type 1
Voice commands:
This control is located on the steering
Radio:
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk
Select the previous/next preset radio
(depending on equipment).
station.
Short press, smartphone voice commands via
Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list.
the system.
Media:
Increase volume.
Select the previous/next track.
In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list.
create a profile for an individual or for a Decrease volume.
Radio:
group of people with shared interests, and Mute by pressing the volume increase
Short press: display the list of radio
configure a wide range of settings (radio and decrease buttons simultaneously
stations.
presets, audio settings, ambiences, etc.). (depending on equipment).
Long press: update the list.
Settings are applied automatically. Restore the sound by pressing one of the two
Media:
volume buttons.
Short press: display the list of folders.
Media (short press): change the
In very hot conditions, the volume may Long press: display the available sorting options.
multimedia source.
be limited to protect the system. It may Change audio source (radio; USB; AUX if
Telephone (short press): start telephone
equipment connected; CD; streaming).
call.
Confirm a selection.
Call in progress (short press): access
telephone menu.

250
 CITROËN Connect Radio

Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call,

end call; when no call is in progress, access
Radio Media Settings 11
telephone menu.
Radio (rotate): automatic search for the
previous/next station.
Media (rotate): previous/next track, move in a
list.
Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing
selected, access to presets.
Radio: display the list of stations.
Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio (press and hold): update the list of
stations received. Select an audio source or radio station. Configure a personal profile and/or
configure the sound (balance, ambience,

Menus Telephone
etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time,
etc.).

Applications Driving

Connect a mobile phone via Bluetooth®.

Run certain applications from a
Access configurable equipment. smartphone connected via CarPlay® or Android Activate, deactivate or configure certain
Auto. vehicle functions.

251
 CITROËN Connect Radio

Navigation Applications Press this button to search and select a

recipient.
Select the "Quick messages” tab.
Viewing photos
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. Press this button to select the display
To protect the system, do not use a USB settings for messages.
hub. Press this button to write a new message.

The system can read folders and image files in Press the bin alongside the selected
the formats: .tiff; .gif; .jpg/jpeg; .bmp and .png. message to delete it.
Press Applications to display the main Press this button alongside the selected
page. message to display the secondary page.
Configure the navigation and select your Press "Photos". Press this button to edit and modify the
destination via CarPlay® or Android Auto. existing text.
Select a folder. Press this button to write a new message.
Air conditioning
Select an image to view. Press the bin to delete the message.

Press this button to display the details of

the photo.
Radio
18,5 21,5 Press the back arrow to go back a level.

Selecting a station
Managing messages Press Radio Media to display the main
Press Applications to display the main page.
page. Press one of the buttons to perform an
Manage various temperature and air flow Press "SMS". automatic search for radio stations.
settings. Or
Select the "SMS” tab. Move the slider to manually search for
frequencies up or down.
Press this button to select the display Or
settings for messages. Press the frequency.

252
 CITROËN Connect Radio

Enter the FM and AM waveband values

using the virtual keypad.
Or
Select a radio station or frequency.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
secondary page. 11
Press "OK" to confirm. Press "Preset". Activate/deactivate "News".
Make a long press on one of the buttons
to preset the station. Press in the shaded area to confirm.
Radio reception may be affected by the
use of electrical equipment not approved
Activating/Deactivating RDS
by the Brand, such as a USB charger
connected to the 12 V socket.
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Playing TA messages
listening to the same station by automatically The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives
The exterior environment (hills, buildings,
retuning to alternative frequencies. priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may
Press Radio Media to display the main function needs good reception of a radio station
block reception, including in RDS mode.
page. that transmits this type of message. While traffic
This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the information is being broadcast, the current
context of radio wave transmission, and
secondary page. media is automatically interrupted so that the
in no way indicative of an audio system
Activate/deactivate "RDS". TA message can be heard. Normal play of the
malfunction.
previously playing media resumes at the end of
Press in the shaded area to confirm. the message.
Changing the waveband Press Radio Media to display the main
Press Radio Media to display the main page.
RDS station tracking may not be
page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
available nationwide, as many radio
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the secondary page.
stations do not cover 100 % of the country.
secondary page. Activate/deactivate "TA".
This explains the loss of reception of the
Press "Band" to change waveband. station during a journey.
Press in the shaded area to confirm.
Press in the shaded area to confirm.
Displaying text information
The "Radio Text" function displays information
Audio settings
Presetting a station transmitted by the radio station relating to the Press Radio Media to display the main
Select a radio station or frequency. station or the currently playing song. page.
Make a short press on the star outline. If Press Radio Media to display the main Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
the star is solid, the radio station is page. secondary page.
already preset. Press "Audio settings".

253
 CITROËN Connect Radio

Select the "Tone", "Balance", "Sound",

"Voice" or "Ringtones" tab to configure
DAB (Digital Audio Press in the shaded area to confirm.

the sound settings. Broadcasting) radio

If "FM-DAB Follow-up" is activated, there
Press the back arrow to confirm.
may be a time offset of a few seconds
Terrestrial Digital Radio when the system switches to "FM" analogue
In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience, Bass, Digital radio provides higher quality sound. radio, and in some cases a change in volume.
Medium and Treble sound settings are The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a When the digital signal quality is restored, the
different and independent for each audio choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical system automatically changes back to "DAB".
source. order.
In the "Balance” tab, the All passengers, Press Radio Media to display the main
If the "DAB" station being listened to is
Driver and Front only settings are common page.
not available on "FM", or if "FM-DAB
to all sources. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Follow-up" is not activated, the sound will cut
In the "Sound” tab, activate or deactivate secondary page.
out while the digital signal is too weak.
"Volume linked to speed", "Auxiliary input" Press "Band" to select "DAB band".
and "Touch tones".
Press in the shaded area to confirm.
Media
The balance/distribution (or spatialisation
with the Arkamys© system) uses audio
processing to adjust the sound quality
FM-DAB Follow-up USB port
according to the number of passengers in the "DAB" does not cover 100 % of the country. Insert the USB memory stick into the USB
vehicle. When the digital radio signal is poor, the port or connect the USB device to the
"FM-DAB Follow-up" enables you to continue USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
listening to the same station by automatically
Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging© To protect the system, do not use a USB
switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue
optimises the sound distribution inside hub.
station (if there is one).
the passenger compartment.
Press Radio Media to display the main The system builds playlists (in temporary
page. memory); this operation can take from a
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the few seconds to several minutes at the first
secondary page. connection.
Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up". Reduce the number of non-music files and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.

254
 CITROËN Connect Radio

Playlists are updated whenever the ignition

is switched off or a USB memory stick is
If play does not start automatically, it may be
necessary to start the audio playback from the
Information and advice
The system supports USB mass storage
11
connected. The audio system memorises these smartphone.
devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players
lists, which will subsequently load faster if they Control is from the portable device or by using
via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not
have not been changed. the system's touch buttons.
supplied.
Devices are managed using the audio system
Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket Once connected in Streaming mode, the
smartphone is considered to be a media controls.
Depending on equipment Other devices, not recognised on connection,
source.
Connect a portable device (MP3 player, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using
etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth
audio cable (not supplied). Connecting Apple® players streaming, if compatible.
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" Connect the Apple® player to the USB socket
has been selected in the audio settings. To protect the system, do not use a USB
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
First adjust the volume on the portable device hub.
Play starts automatically.
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the Control is via the audio system. The audio system will only play audio files with
audio system.
The classifications available are those of ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file
Controls are managed via the portable device.
the portable device connected (artists/ extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and
Selecting the source albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
podcasts). It is also possible to use a
Press Radio Media to display the main
classification structured in the form of a No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
page.
library. All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files.
Press the "SOURCES" button.
The default classification used is by artist. To The supported sampling rates are 11, 22, 44 and
Select the source.
modify the classification used, return to the 48 KHz.
To avoid reading and display problems, we
Bluetooth Streaming® first level of the menu then select the desired
recommend choosing file names less than 20
classification (playlists for example) and
Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed characters long that do not contain any special
confirm to go down through the menu to the
from your smartphone. characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù).
desired track.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated. Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
First adjust the volume on the portable device The version of software in the audio system may (File Allocation Table).
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the not be compatible with the generation of the
system. We recommend using the original USB
Apple® player.
cable for the portable device.

255
 CITROËN Connect Radio

Telephone On connecting the USB cable, the

CarPlay® function deactivates the
Android Auto smartphone
USB sockets system's Bluetooth® mode.
connection
The "CarPlay" function requires the use of Depending on country.
Depending on equipment, for more information
a compatible smartphone and compatible On the smartphone, download the
on the USB sockets compatible with CarPlay® or
applications. Android Auto application.
Android Auto applications, refer to the "Ease of
use and comfort" section. The "Android Auto" function requires the
Connect the USB cable. The smartphone
use of a compatible smartphone and
For the list of compatible smartphones, charges when connected by the USB
applications.
visit the Manufacturer's website in your cable.
country. From the system, press Telephone to
display the CarPlay® interface. Telephone not connected by
Synchronising a smartphone enables Or Bluetooth®
users to display applications that support If the smartphone has already connected
Connect a USB cable. The smartphone
the smartphone’s CarPlay® or Android Auto by Bluetooth®.
charges when connected by a USB cable.
technology on the vehicle’s screen. For Connect the USB cable. The smartphone
From the system, press "Telephone" to
CarPlay® technology, the CarPlay® function charges when connected by the USB
display the main page.
must first be activated on the smartphone. cable.
Press "Android Auto" to start the
Unlock the smartphone for the communication From the system, press "Telephone" to
application in the system.
process between the smartphone and the display the main page.
Depending on the smartphone, it may be
system to work. Press the "PHONE" button to go to the
necessary to activate the "Android Auto"
As principles and standards are constantly secondary page.
function.
changing, we recommend keeping the Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay®
During the procedure, several screen
smartphone's operating system up-to- interface.
pages relating to certain features are
date, together with the date and time on When the USB cable is disconnected displayed.
the smartphone and the system. and the ignition is switched off then back Accept to start and complete the connection.
on, the system will not automatically switch to When connecting a smartphone to the
CarPlay® smartphone Radio Media mode; the source must be system, we recommend enabling
Bluetooth® on the smartphone.
changed manually.
connection
Depending on country. The CarPlay® navigation can be accessed Telephone connected by Bluetooth®
at any time by pressing the system's From the system, press "Telephone" to
Navigation button. display the main page.

256
 CITROËN Connect Radio

Press the "PHONE" button to display the

secondary page.
If the pairing procedure fails, we
recommend deactivating and then
Depending on the type of telephone, you may by
prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and 11
Press "Android Auto" to start the reactivating the Bluetooth function on the messages.
application in the system. telephone.
The ability of the system to connect just
Access to the different audio sources remains
one profile depends on the telephone.
available in the margin of the Android Auto
Procedure from the telephone All three profiles may connect by default.
display, using the touch buttons located in the
upper bar. Select the name of the system in the list
Access to the menus for the system is possible of detected devices. The profiles compatible with the system
at any time using the dedicated buttons. In the system, accept the connection request are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
from the telephone. MAP and PAN.
There may be a pause before
applications become available, Procedure from the system Visit the Brand's website for more information
depending on the quality of the network. Press Telephone to display the main (compatibility, additional help, etc.).
page.
Automatic reconnection
Pairing a Bluetooth® Press "Bluetooth search".
The list of detected telephones is On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone
telephone displayed. connected is present again, it is automatically
Select the name of the chosen telephone recognised and within about 30 seconds
The services available depend on the after switching on the ignition, the pairing is
in the list.
network, the SIM card and the established automatically (Bluetooth activated).
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Connection sharing To modify the connection profile:
Consult the telephone user guide and the Press Telephone to display the main
The system offers to connect the telephone with
service provider to check which services are page.
3 profiles:
available. Press the "PHONE" button to access the
– "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only),
–  “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of secondary page.
The Bluetooth function must be activated audio files on the telephone), Press "Bluetooth connection" to
and the telephone configured as "Visible – "Mobile internet data". display the list of paired devices.
to all” (in the telphone settings). Select one or more profiles. Press the "Details" button for a paired
device.
To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is Select one or more profiles.
Press "OK" to confirm.
used (from the telephone or from the system),
ensure that the code is the same in the system
and in the telephone.

257
 CITROËN Connect Radio

Press "OK" to confirm. on the steering mounted PHONE button Press "Call".
to reject the call.
Or
Managing paired telephones Press "End call". Calling a recently used
This function lets you connect or disconnect a number
device or delete a pairing.
Press Telephone to display the main Making a call Press Telephone to display the main
page.
page.
Using the telephone is not recommended Or
Press the "PHONE" button to access the
while driving. Press and hold
secondary page.
Parking the vehicle.
Press "Bluetooth connection" to
Make the call using the steering mounted the steering mounted button.
display the list of paired devices.
controls.
Press on the name of the telephone
Press "Recent calls".
selected in the list to disconnect it.
Select the desired contact from the displayed list.
Press again to connect it. Calling a new number
Press Telephone to display the main It is always possible to make a call
Deleting a telephone directly from the telephone; as a safety
page.
Press the basket at the top right of the Enter the phone number using the digital measure, first park the vehicle.
screen to display a basket alongside the keypad.
telephone chosen.
Press the basket alongside the telephone
Press "Call" to start the call. Setting the ringtone
chosen to delete it. Press Telephone to display the main
Calling a contact page.
Receiving a call Press Telephone to display the main
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a secondary page.
page.
superimposed display in the screen. Press "Ring volume" to display the
Or press and hold
Make a short press on the steering volume bar.
mounted PHONE button to accept an Press the arrows or move the slider to set
the steering mounted PHONE button.
incoming call. the ring volume.
And Press "Contacts".
Make a long press Select the desired contact from the displayed list.

258
 CITROËN Connect Radio

Settings Modifying system settings

Press Settings to display the main page.
Press Settings to display the main page.
11
Press "Configuration" to access the
Configuring profiles secondary page.
Press "Configuration" to access the
Press Settings to display the main page. Press "Screen configuration".
secondary page.
Press "System configuration".
Press "Profiles". Press "Brightness".
Move the slider to adjust the brightness of
Press the "Units" tab to change the units of
Select "Profile 1", "Profile 2", "Profile 3” or the screen and/or the instrument panel
distance, fuel consumption and temperature.
"Common profile". (depending on version).
Press the "Factory settings" tab to restore the
Press this button to enter a name for the Press the back arrow to confirm.
initial settings.
profile using the virtual keypad.
Press "OK" to save. Returning the system to factory settings Press "Animation".
activates the English language by default Activate or deactivate: “Automatic
Press the back arrow to confirm. (depending on version). scrolling”.
Select "Animated transitions".
Press this button to activate the profile. Press the "System info" tab to display the
versions of the various modules installed in the
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press the back arrow again to confirm. system.
Press the "Privacy" tab,
Press this button to reset the selected or Selecting the language
profile. Press Settings to display the main page.
Press Settings to display the main page.

Adjusting the brightness Press "Privacy" to activate or deactivate

Press "Configuration" to access the
Press Settings to display the main page. the private data mode.
secondary page.
Activate or deactivate:
Select "Language" to change the
Press Brightness. language.
– "No sharing (data, vehicle position)".
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Move the slider to adjust the brightness of – "Only data sharing”
the screen and/or the instrument panel – "Data and vehicle position sharing"
(depending on version). Press the back arrow to confirm.
Setting the time
Press in the shaded area to confirm. Press Settings to display the main page.

259
 CITROËN Connect Radio

Press "Configuration" to access the Press this button to set the date. The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels,
secondary page. basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception,
Press "Date and time". Press the back arrow to save the date. including in RDS mode.
This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is
Select "Time". Select the display format for the date. not indicative of an audio system malfunction.
Press this button to set the time using the The aerial is missing or has been damaged
virtual keypad. Press the back arrow again to confirm. (for example while entering a car wash or
Press "OK" to save the time. underground car park).
►  Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
Time and date setting is only available if
Press this button to set the time zone. I cannot find some radio stations in the list of
"GPS Synchronisation:" is deactivated.
received stations.
Select the display format for the time The name of the radio station changes.
(12h/24h). The station is no longer received or its name has
Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 Frequently asked changed in the list.
hour). questions ►  Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the
Activate or deactivate GPS "Radio" page.
The following information groups together the
synchronisation (UTC). Some radio stations send other information
answers to the most frequently asked questions
Press the back arrow to save the settings. in place of their name (the title of the song for
concerning the system.
example).
The system interprets these details as the station
The system may not automatically Radio name.
manage the change between winter and The reception quality of the tuned radio ►  Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the
summer time (depending on the country of station gradually deteriorates or the station "Radio" page.
sale). presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz
is displayed, etc.). Media
Setting the date The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s
transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only
Press Settings to display the main page. after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes).
geographical area.
Some files supplied with the memory stick may
►  Activate the "RDS" function in the upper bar
Press "Configuration" to access the greatly slow down access to reading the memory
to enable the system to check whether there is
secondary page. stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing
a more powerful transmitter in the geographical
Press "Date and time". time).
area.

Select "Date".

260
 CITROËN Connect Radio

►  Delete the files supplied with the memory

stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the
Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the
USB cables are of poor quality.
Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and
bass settings, and vice versa. 11
file structure on the memory stick. ►  Use genuine USB cables to ensure ►  Modify the treble and bass or ambience
Some characters in information about the compatibility. settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.
currently playing media are not displayed Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. When the balance settings are changed, the
correctly. Android Auto and CarPlay are not available in all distribution is deselected.
The audio system is unable to process certain countries. When the distribution setting is changed, the
types of character. ►  Check the Google Android Auto or Apple balance settings are deselected.
►  Use standard characters to name tracks and website to see which countries are supported. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the
folders. The volume of the telephone connected in balance settings, and vice versa.
Playback of streaming files does not start. Bluetooth mode is inaudible. ►  Modify the balance setting or the distribution
The connected device does not automatically The volume depends on both the system and the setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
launch playback. telephone. There is a difference in sound quality
►  Start playback from the device. ►  Increase the volume of the audio system, to between audio sources.
Track names and playing times are not maximum if required, and increase the volume of To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound
displayed on the audio streaming screen. the telephone if necessary. settings can be tailored to different audio
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer Ambient noise affects the quality of the sources, which can generate audible differences
of this information. telephone call. when changing source.
►  Reduce ambient noise (close windows, turn ►  Check that the sound settings are appropriate
Telephone down ventilation, slow down, etc.). to the sources listened to. Adjust the sound
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The contacts are not listed in alphabetical functions to the middle position.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be order. When the engine is off, the system switches
switched off or the device may not be visible. Some telephones offer display options. off after several minutes of use.
►  Check that the telephone has Bluetooth Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can When the engine is switched off, the system's
switched on. be transferred in a specific order. operating time depends on the state of charge of
►  Check in the telephone settings that it is ►  Modify the telephone directory display the battery.
"visible to all". settings. The switch-off is normal: the system
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with automatically goes into energy economy mode
the system. Settings and switches off to maintain an adequate charge
►  Check the compatibility of the telephone on When the treble and bass settings are in the battery.
the Brand's website (services). changed, the ambience is deselected. ►  Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the
Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. When the ambience is changed, the treble charge of the battery.
and bass settings are reset.

261
 CITROËN Connect Nav

CITROËN Connect Nav –  Connecting to the CarPlay® or Android

Auto applications (certain applications stop
With the ignition off, a press turns the system on.
Increase or decrease the volume using
displaying when the vehicle is moving). the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons
–  Watching a video (the video stops when the (depending on the equipment).
vehicle starts to move again). Use the menu buttons on either side of or below
–  Changing the system settings and the touch screen for access to the menus, then
configuration. press the virtual buttons in the touch screen.
Depending on the model, use the "Source" or
AM and DAB radio are not available on "Menu" buttons to access the rolling menus, then
Hybrid vehicles. press the virtual buttons in the touch screen.
Display the rolling menus at any time by pressing
the screen briefly with three fingers.
The system is protected so that it only
All of the touch areas of the screen are white.
GPS navigation - operates in the vehicle.
The message Energy economy mode is
Press the back arrow to go back a level.
Applications - Multimedia displayed when the system is about to go into
Press "OK" to confirm.

audio system - Bluetooth® standby. The touch screen is of the "capacitive"

type.
telephone System and map updates can be To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive
The functions and settings described downloaded from the Brand's website. cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional
vary according to the vehicle version and The update procedure is also available there. product.
configuration, as well as the country of sale. Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
The system’s Open Source Software Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
For safety reasons and because they (OSS) source codes are available at the
Certain information is displayed permanently
require sustained attention by the driver, following addresses:
in the side bars or in the upper bar of the touch
the following operations must be carried out [Link]
screen (depending on equipment):
with the vehicle stationary and the ignition [Link]
–  Air conditioning status information (depending
on: on version), and direct access to the
–  Pairing the smartphone with the system via corresponding menu.
Bluetooth. First steps –  Go directly to the audio source selection
–  Using the smartphone. option, to view the list of radio stations (or list of
With the engine running, a press mutes
the sound. titles depending on the source).

262
 CITROËN Connect Nav

–  Go to the "Notifications" of messages, emails,

map updates and, depending on the services,
In very hot conditions, the volume may
be limited to protect the system. It may
Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call,
end call; when no call is in progress, access 12
the navigation notifications. enter standby mode (with the screen and telephone menu.
–  Go to the settings for the touch screen and the sound off) for 5 minutes or more. Radio (rotate): automatic search for the
digital instrument panel. The system will resume normal operation previous/next station.
Audio source selection (depending on when the temperature in the passenger Media (rotate): previous/next track, move
equipment): compartment has dropped. through a list.
–  FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing
equipment). selected, access presets.
–  Telephone connected via Bluetooth and Steering mounted controls Radio: display the list of stations.
Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). Media: display the list of tracks.
Voice control:
–  USB memory stick. Radio (press and hold): update the list of
This control is located on the steering
–  Media player connected via the auxiliary detected stations.
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk
socket (depending on equipment).
(depending on equipment).
–  Video (depending on equipment).
Short press, system voice control. Menus
Long press, voice commands from smartphone
or CarPlay®, Android Auto via the system. Connected navigation
Increase volume.

Decrease volume.
Mute by pressing the volume increase
and decrease buttons simultaneously
(depending on equipment).
Restore the sound by pressing one of the two
volume buttons.
In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to Media (short press): change the
create a profile for an individual or for a multimedia source.
group of people with shared interests, and Telephone (short press): start telephone
call. Enter navigation settings and choose a
configure a wide range of settings (radio
Call in progress (short press): access destination.
presets, audio settings, navigation history,
telephone menu. Use real-time services, depending on equipment.
favourite contacts, etc.). Settings are applied
automatically.

263
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Applications Telephone Vehicle

Run certain applications from a Connect a telephone via Bluetooth®, read Activate, deactivate or configure certain
smartphone connected via CarPlay® or messages and emails and send quick vehicle functions.
Android Auto. messages.
Check the status of the Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi Air conditioning
connections. Settings
Radio Media

18,5 21,5
FM 87.5 MHz

Manage various temperature and air flow

Configure a personal profile and/or settings.
configure the sound (balance, ambience,
Select an audio source or radio station, or etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time,
display photographs. etc.).

264
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Voice commands Example of a "voice command" for the radio and

media: 12
"Play artist Madonna"
Steering wheel-mounted Example of a "voice command" for the
controls telephone:
Voice commands: "Call David Miller"
Voice commands can be issued from any The voice commands, with a choice of 17
screen page after a short press on the "Voice languages (Arabic, Brazilian, Czech,
commands" button located on the steering Danish, Dutch, English, Farsi, French,
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk German, Italian, Norwegian, Polish, A number of commands are available when a
(depending on equipment), as long as there is no Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, menu is selected.
telephone call in progress. Turkish), are made using the language
To ensure that voice commands are previously chosen and set in the system.
always recognised by the system, please For some voice commands, there are
follow these recommendations: alternative synonyms.
–  use natural language in a normal tone Example: Guide to / Navigate to / Go to / ...
without breaking up words or raising your The voice commands in Arabic for: "Navigate
voice. to address" and "Display POI in the city", are
–  always wait for the "beep" (audible signal) not available.
before speaking.
–  for best results, closing the windows and
sunroof is recommended, to avoid extraneous
Information - Using the
Press the Push To Talk button and tell me
interference (depending on version). system what you'd like after the tone. Remember
–  before issuing a voice command, ask any When voice commands are activated, by you can interrupt me at any time by pressing this
other passengers to refrain from speaking. briefly pressing the button, help is button. If you press it again while I'm waiting for
displayed on the touch screen, offering various you to speak, it'll end the conversation. If you
menus and enabling voice-based interaction with
First steps the system.
need to start over, say "cancel". If you want to
undo something, say "undo". And to get
Example of a "voice command" for information and tips at any time, just say "help".
navigation: If you ask to me do something and there's some
"Navigate to address 11 regent street, information missing that I need, I'll give you
London" some examples or take you through it step by

265
 CITROËN Connect Nav

step. There's more information available in To plan a route, say "navigate to" followed by the distance" or "arrival time". To learn more
"novice" mode. You can set the dialogue mode to address, the contact name or an intersection. For commands, try saying "help with navigation".
"expert" when you feel comfortable. example, "navigate to address 11 Regent Street, Voice commands
London", "navigate to contact, John Miller",
Global voice commands or "navigate to intersection of Regent Street, Show POI ''hotel'' at the destination
Voice commands London". You can specify if it's a preferred Show nearby POI petrol station
address, or a Point of Interest. For example, say Navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London
Set dialogue mode as novice - expert "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", or Navigate to POI petrol station along the route
Select user 1 / Select profile John "navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London". Help messages
Increase temperature Or, you can just say, "navigate home". To see
Decrease temperature Points of Interest on a map, you can say things To see points of interest on a map, you can
Help messages like "show POI hotels in Banbury". For more say things like "show hotels in Banbury", "show
information say "help with points of interest" or nearby parking", "show hotel at the destination"
There are lots of topics I can help you with. "help with route guidance". or "show petrol station along the route". If you
You can say: "help with phone", "help with To choose a destination, say something like prefer to navigate directly to a point of interest,
navigation", "help with media" or "help with "navigate to line three" or "select line two". If you you can say "navigate to nearby petrol station".
radio". For an overview on how to use voice can't find the destination but the street's right, If you feel you are not being well understood,
controls, you can say "help with voice controls". say for example "select the street in line three". try to say the word "POI" in front of the point
Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" To move around a displayed list, you can say of interest. For example say "navigate to POI
and we'll start that again. "next page" or "previous page". You can undo restaurant at the destination".
your last action and start over by saying "undo", To choose a POI, say something like "select
"Navigation" voice or say "cancel" to cancel the current action. line 2". If you've searched for a Point of Interest
commands Voice commands and don't see the one you're after, you can filter
further by saying something like "select POI in
Voice commands
Tell me the remaining distance line 2", or "select the city in line 3". You can also
Tell me the remaining time scroll through the list by saying "next page" or
Navigate home
Tell me the arrival time "previous page".
Navigate to work
Stop route guidance
Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club Depending on the country, give
Help messages
Navigate to contact, John Miller destination (address) instructions in the
Navigate to address 11 regent street, London language configured for the system.
You can say "stop" or "resume route guidance".
Help messages
To get information about your current route, you
can say "tell me the remaining time", "remaining

266
 CITROËN Connect Nav

"Radio Media" voice

commands
Voice commands Media voice commands are available
only with a USB connection. 12
What's playing?
Voice commands Help messages
"Telephone" voice
Turn on source radio - Streaming Bluetooth To choose what you'd like to play, start by saying commands
-… "play" and then the item. For example, say "play
Help messages song Hey Jude", "play line 3" or "select line 2". If there is no telephone connected by
You can undo your last action and start over Bluetooth, a voice message announces:
You can select an audio source by saying "turn by saying "undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the "Please first connect a telephone", and the
on source" followed by the device name. For current action. voice session is closed.
example, "turn on source, Streaming Bluetooth", Voice commands
Voice commands
or "turn on source, radio". Use the command
"play" to specify the type of music you'd like to Play song Hey Jude
Call David Miller*
hear. You can choose between "song", "artist", Play artist Madonna
Call voicemail*
or "album". Just say something like "play artist, Play album Thriller
Display calls*
Madonna", "play song, Hey Jude", or "play Help messages
Help messages
album, Thriller".
Voice commands I'm not sure what you'd like to play. Please say
To make a phone call, say "call" followed by
"play" and then a song title, an album title, or
the contact name, for example: "Call David
Tune to channel BBC Radio 2 an artist name. For example, say "play song
Miller". You can also include the phone type, for
Tune to 98.5 FM Hey Jude", "play artist Madonna" or "play
example: "Call David Miller at home". To make
Tune to preset number five album Thriller". To select a line number from the
a call by number, say "dial" followed by the
Help messages display, say "select line two". To move around
phone number, for example, "Dial 107776 835
a displayed list, you can say "next page" or
417". You can check your voicemail by saying
You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" "previous page". You can undo your last action
"call voicemail". To send a text, say "send quick
and the station name or frequency. For example and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel"
message to", followed by the contact, and then
"tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 to cancel the current action.
the name of the quick message you'd like to
FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say for
send. For example, "send quick message to
example "tune to preset number five".

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding
download has been performed.

267
 CITROËN Connect Nav

David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of From the list of quick messages, say the name of Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the phone menu
calls, say "display calls". For more information on the one you'd like to send. To move around the for the names of the supported messages.
SMS, you can say "help with texting". list you can say "go to start", "go to end", "next
The system only sends pre-recorded
To choose a contact, say something like "select page" or "previous page". You can undo your last
"Quick messages".
line three". To move around the list say "next action and start over by saying "undo", or say
page" or "previous page". You can undo your last "cancel" to cancel the current action.
action and start over by saying "undo", or say Voice commands
"cancel" to cancel the current action. Navigation
Send SMS to John Miller, I'm just arriving
"Text message" voice Send SMS to David Miller at the office, don't Choice of a destination
commands wait for me
Help messages To a new destination
If there is no telephone connected by Intuitive method:
Bluetooth, a voice message announces: Please say "call" or "send quick message to", Press Navigation to display the main
"Please first connect a telephone", and the and then select a line from the list. To move page.
voice session is closed. around a list shown on the display, you can Press "Search…".
say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or
The "Text messages" voice commands "previous page". You can undo your last action Enter an address or the key words for the
function allows you to dictate and send and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" destination.
an SMS. to cancel the current action. Press "OK" to select the "Guidance
Dictate the text, taking care to pause briefly Voice commands criteria".
between each word. Or
When you have finished, the voice recognition Listen to most recent message* Guided method:
system will automatically generate an SMS. Help messages
In order to be able to use the navigation,
Voice commands To hear your last message, you can say "listen to you must enter the "City", the "Street"
most recent message". When you want to send (suggestions are displayed automatically
Send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late a text, there's a set of quick messages ready for when you begin typing), then enter the
Help messages you to use. Just use the quick message name "Number" using the virtual keypad, or select
and say something like "send quick message to

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding
download has been performed.

268
 CITROËN Connect Nav

an address from the "Contact" list or the

address "History".
To a recent destination
Press Navigation to display the main
To a contact
Press Navigation to display the main
12
page. page.
If you do not confirm the number, the Press the "MENU" button to access the Press the "MENU" button to access the
navigation system will show one end of secondary page. secondary page.
the street. Select "My destinations". Select "My destinations".
Press the "MENU" button to access the
Select the "Recent” tab. Select the "Contact” tab.
secondary page.
Select the address chosen in the list to display Select a contact in the list to start guided
Select "Enter address".
the "Guidance criteria”. navigation.
Press "OK" to start guided navigation.
Then
To points of interest (POI)
Select the "Country".
Guided method:
Select "Position" to see the point of
Points of interest (POI) are listed in different
Select the keyboard “language”. arrival on the map.
categories.
Press Navigation to display the main
Change the keyboard "type" according to
the selected "language": ABCDE;
To "Home" or "My work" page.
Press Navigation to display the main Press the "MENU" button to access the
AZERTY; QWERTY or QWERTZ.
page. secondary page.
Enter the "City", the "Street" and the
Press the "MENU" button to access the Select "Points of interest".
"Number", and confirm by pressing on
the displayed suggestions. secondary page.
Select "My destinations". Select the "Travel", "leisure",
Press "OK" to select the "Guidance
"Commercial", "Public" or "Geographic”
criteria".
Select the "Preferred” tab. tab.
And/or
Select "Home". Or
Select "See on map" to choose the
Select "Search" to enter the name and
"Guidance criteria".
Or address of a POI.
Press "OK" to start guided navigation.
Select "My work". Press "OK" to calculate the route.

Zoom in/out using the touch buttons or Or Or

with two fingers on the screen. Select a preset favourite destination. Intuitive method:

269
 CITROËN Connect Nav

You can only select this method of To a point on the map A marker is displayed in the middle of the
using the service if a network connection screen, with the "Latitude" and
Press Navigation to display the main
is active; this may be either a "network "Longitude" coordinates.
page.
connection provided by the vehicle", if you Choose the type of coordinates:
Explore the map by sliding a finger on the
use the Citroën Connect Box solution, or else DMS for: Degrees, Minutes, Seconds.
screen.
a "network connection provided by the user" DD for: Degrees, Decimals.
Select the destination by pressing on the map.
via a smartphone, Press this button to start guided
Tap the screen to place a marker and
In both cases, the system is automatically navigation.
display the sub-menu.
connected to the Internet, if network coverage Or
Press this button to start guided
permits. Press this button to save the displayed
navigation.
address.
Press Navigation to display the main Or
OR
page. Press this button to save the displayed
Press this button to enter the "Latitude"
Press the "MENU" button to access the address.
value using the virtual keypad.
secondary page. A long press on a point opens a list of And
Select "Search". nearby POIs. Press this button to enter the "Longitude"
value using the virtual keypad.
Press on the mode shown in the bottom right of
the screen (On-Board or Connected) to change To GPS coordinates TMC (Traffic Message
the "Database". Press Navigation to display the main
Select the "Database" in "On-Board" page.
Channel)
mode (integrated into the map), or in Explore the map by sliding a finger on the Available in some countries.
"Connected" mode (connected to the Internet). screen. TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages
Press the back arrow to confirm. Touch the screen with a finger to go to the next are based on a European standard for traffic
image. information broadcasting via the RDS system on
Enter an address or the key words for the Press this button to display the world FM radio, sending traffic information in real time.
destination (POI). map. The TMC information is then displayed on a GPS
Press "OK" to start the search. Using the grid, select the desired country or Navigation system map and taken into account
region by zooming. straight away when routes are calculated, to
Select the "On the route", "Around the Press this button to display or enter the avoid accidents, traffic jams and closed roads.
vehicle" or "At destination" tab to refine GPS coordinates. Danger zone alerts may or may not be
your search. displayed, depending on the applicable
Select the desired address to calculate the route.

270
 CITROËN Connect Nav

legislation and subscription to the

corresponding service.
update the smartphone operating system
as well as the date and time on the
Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or
"Stored” tab. 12
smartphone and system, to ensure that the Select a network.
communication process between the
Connected navigation smartphone and the system functions Using the virtual keypad, enter the "Key"
correctly. network Wi-Fi and the "Password".
Press "OK" to establish a connection
Connected navigation USB connection between the smartphone and the
connection Connect the USB cable. vehicle’s system.
The smartphone charges when
Depending on version, vehicle trim level and
connected by the USB cable. Usage restrictions:
subscription to online services and options.
Bluetooth connection With CarPlay®, connection sharing is only
Activate the Bluetooth function on the available with a Wi-Fi connection.
Network connection provided by the
telephone and ensure that it is visible to The quality of services depends on the quality
vehicle
all (see the "Connect-App" section). of the network connection.
With the Citroën Connect Box solution,
Wi-Fi connection
the system is automatically connected to
the Internet and connected services, and does
Select a Wi-Fi network detected by the
system and connect to it.
Authorize sending
not require the user to provide a connection via information
their smartphone. This function is only available if it has
Press Settings to display the main page.
OR been activated either via the
"Notifications" or via the "Applications" menu.
Network connection provided by the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Press "Notifications". secondary page.
user
Select "System configuration".
Select Wi-Fi to activate it.
Select the "Private mode" tab.
For the list of compatible smartphones, OR
visit the Brand's website in your country. Press Connect-App to display the main OR
page. Press "Notifications".
Activate and enter settings for sharing the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
smartphone connection. secondary page. Press "Private mode".

As processes and standards are Select "Wi-Fi network connection".

THEN
constantly changing, we recommend you

271
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Activate or deactivate: – "Give an audible warning". Press Navigation to display the main
– "Advise proximity of POI 1". page.
– "No data sharing except for company – "Advise proximity of POI 2". Press the "Declare a new danger zone"
vehicles". Press “OK” to confirm your selection. button located in the side bars or the
– "Only data sharing" upper bar of the touch screen (depending on
– "Sharing data and vehicle position" equipment).
The "Notifications", located in the upper
Select the "Type” option to select the type
Settings specific to bar, can be accessed at any time.
of "Danger area".
connected navigation Danger zone alerts may or may not be
Select the ""Speed" option and enter it
using the virtual keypad.
Press Navigation to display the main displayed, depending on the applicable Press "OK" to save and send the
page. legislation and subscription to the information.
Press the "MENU" button to access the corresponding service.
secondary page.
When "TOMTOM TRAFFIC” appears, the
Displaying fuel information
Select "Settings".
services are available. Press Navigation to display the main
page.
Select the "Map” tab.
The services offered with connected Press this button to display the list of
navigation are as follows. services.
Activate or deactivate:
A Connected Services pack: Press "POI on map" to display the list
– "Allow declaration of danger zones".
– Weather, of points of interest.
– "Guidance to final destination on foot".
–  Filling stations, Press one of the buttons to search for
These settings must be configured for each
–  Car park, "Stations".
profile.
–  Traffic, Activate/deactivate "Stations".
Press “OK” to confirm your selection.
–  POI local search.
A Danger area pack (optional). Press this button to display a secondary
Select the "Alerts” tab.
page.
Activate or deactivate: Declaration: "Risk areas Select the "Settings” tab.

– "Advise of car park nearby".

alert" Select the desired fuel.
– "Filling station alert". To send information about danger zones,
Press "OK" to save.
–  “Risk areas alert" then press the warning icon select the option:Allow declaration of
(triangle) to configure the alerts. danger zones

272
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Displaying charging station

details
Press this button to display basic
information.
As principles and standards are constantly
changing, we recommend keeping the 12
Press this button to display detailed smartphone's operating system up-to-
Press Navigation to display the main weather information. date, together with the date and time on
page. the smartphone and the system.
Press this button to display the list of The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will
services. be the maximum temperature for the day.
Press "POI on map" to display the list The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will be Connectivity
of points of interest. the minimum temperature for the night. Press Applications to display the main
Press one of the buttons to search for page.
"Stations". Press "Connectivity" to access the CarPlay® or
Activate/deactivate "Stations". Applications Android Auto functions.

Press this button to display a secondary

USB sockets CarPlay® smartphone
page. Depending on equipment, for more information
on the USB sockets compatible with CarPlay® or
connection
Select the "Settings" tab.
Android Auto applications, refer to the "Ease of Depending on country.

Select the desired connector type. use and comfort" section. On connecting the USB cable, the
For the list of compatible smartphones, CarPlay® function deactivates the
Press "OK" to save. visit the Manufacturer's website in your system's Bluetooth® mode.
country. The "CarPlay" function requires the use of
a compatible smartphone and compatible
Displaying weather applications.
Synchronising a smartphone enables
information users to display applications that support Connect the USB cable. The smartphone
Press Navigation to display the main the smartphone’s CarPlay® or Android Auto charges when connected by the USB
page. technology on the vehicle’s screen. For cable.
Press this button to display the list of CarPlay® technology, the CarPlay® function Press "Telephone" to display the
services. must first be activated on the smartphone. CarPlay® interface.
Select "View map". Unlock the smartphone for the communication Or
process between the smartphone and the Connect the USB cable. The smartphone
Select "Weather". system to work. charges when connected by the USB
cable.

273
 CITROËN Connect Nav

From the system, press "Applications" to During the procedure, several screen Select the country of residence.
display the main page. pages relating to certain features are
Press "Connectivity" to access the "CarPlay®” displayed. Press "OK" to save and start the browser.
function. Accept to start and complete the connection.
Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® Access to the different audio sources remains
Connection to the internet is via one of
interface. available in the margin of the Android Auto
the network connections provided by the
display, using the touch buttons located in the
When the USB cable is disconnected vehicle or the user.
upper bar.
and the ignition is switched off then back
Access to the menus for the system is possible
on, the system will not automatically switch to
Radio Media mode; the source must be
at any time using the dedicated buttons. Bluetooth connection®
changed manually. In Android Auto mode, the function that The services available depend on the
displays rolling menus by briefly pressing network, the SIM card and the
the screen with three fingers is disabled.
Android Auto smartphone compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used.
Consult the smartphone user guide and the
connection There may be a pause before service provider to check which services are
Depending on country. applications become available, available.
depending on the quality of the network.
Install the "Android Auto" application on
the smartphone via "Google Play". The Bluetooth function must be activated
The "Android Auto" function requires the use Car Apps and the smartphone configured as
of a compatible smartphone and compatible "Visible to all".
Press Applications to display the main
applications. page. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is
Press "Car Apps" to display the applications used (from the smartphone or from the system),
Connect the USB cable. The smartphone
home page. ensure that the code is the same in the system
charges when connected by the USB
cable. and in the smartphone.
From the system, press "Applications" to
Internet Browser
If the pairing procedure fails, we
display the main page. Press Applications to display the main
recommend deactivating and then
Press "Connectivity" to access the "Android page.
reactivating the Bluetooth function on the
Auto” function. Press "Connectivity" to access the "Connected
smartphone.
Press "Android Auto" to start the Apps” function.
application in the system. Press "Connected Apps" to display the browser
home page.

274
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Procedure from the smartphone

Select the name of the system in the list
the vehicle does not have "Emergency and
assistance call" services), after first activating
Press Connect-App to display the main
page. 12
of detected devices. smartphone connection sharing. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
In the system, accept the connection request secondary page.
Select one or more profiles. Select "Share Wi-Fi connection".
from the smartphone.

Procedure from the system Press "OK" to confirm. Select the "Activation" tab to activate or
Press Connect-App to display the main deactivate Wi-Fi connection sharing.
And/or
page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Wi-Fi connection Select the "Settings" tab to change the system’s
Network connection via the smartphone's Wi-Fi. network name and password.
secondary page.
Press Connect-App to display the main Press "OK" to confirm.
Press "Bluetooth connection".
page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Select "Search". To protect against unauthorised access
secondary page.
The list of detected smartphones is and to make all systems as secure as
Select "Wi-Fi network connection".
displayed. possible, the use of a security code or a
Select the name of the chosen complex password is recommended.
Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or
smartphone in the list.
"Stored” tab.
Depending on the type of smartphone,
you may by prompted to accept the
Select a network. Managing connections
Press Connect-App to display the main
transfer of contacts and messages. Using the virtual keypad , enter the Wi-Fi
page.
network "Key" and "Password".
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Press "OK" to establish the connection.
Connection sharing secondary page.
The system offers to connect the smartphone Select "Manage connection".
with 3 profiles: The Wi-Fi connection and Wi-Fi
– "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), connection sharing are exclusive. With this function, you can view the access to
–  “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of connected services, the availability of connected
audio files on the smartphone), services and modify the connection mode.
– "Mobile internet data".
Wi-Fi connection sharing
Depending on equipment.
The "Mobile internet data" profile must Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the system.
be activated for connected navigation (if

275
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Radio This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the

context of radio wave transmission, and
Press "OK" to confirm.

in no way indicative of an audio system

Selecting a station malfunction.
RDS station tracking may not be
Press Radio Media to display the main available nationwide, as many radio
page. stations do not cover 100 % of the country.
Press "Frequency". Presetting a station This explains the loss of reception of the
Press one of the buttons to perform an Select a radio station or frequency. station during a journey.
automatic search for radio stations. (refer to the corresponding section)
Or Press "Presets". Displaying text information
Move the slider to manually search for Make a long press on one of the buttons
The "Radio Text" function displays information
frequencies up or down. to preset the station.
transmitted by the radio station relating to the
Or
Press Radio Media to display the main Changing the waveband station or the currently playing song.
Press Radio Media to display the main
page. Press Radio Media to display the main
page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
secondary page. To change the waveband, press "Band…",
secondary page.
Select "Radio stations" on the secondary displayed at the top right of the screen.
Select "Radio settings".
page.
Press "Frequency". Activating/Deactivating RDS Select "General".
Enter the values using the virtual keypad. RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Activate/deactivate "Display radio text".
First enter the units then click on the listening to the same station by automatic
decimals field to enter the figures after the retuning to alternative frequencies. Press "OK" to confirm.
decimal point. Press Radio Media to display the main
Press "OK" to confirm. page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Playing TA messages
Radio reception may be affected by the secondary page.
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives
use of electrical equipment not approved Select "Radio settings".
priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this
by the Brand, such as a USB charger function needs good reception of a radio station
connected to the 12 V socket. Select "General".
that carries this type of message. While traffic
The exterior environment (hills, buildings, Activate/deactivate "Station follow".
information is being broadcast, the current
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may media is automatically interrupted so that the
block reception, including in RDS mode.

276
 CITROËN Connect Nav

TA message can be heard. Normal play of the

previously playing media resumes at the end of
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
secondary page.
Media 12
the message. Select "Radio settings".
Select "Announcements".
USB port
Activate/deactivate "Traffic Select "General". Insert the USB memory stick into the USB
announcement". Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up". port or connect the USB device to the
Press "OK" to confirm. USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Activate/deactivate "Station follow". To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub.
DAB (Digital Audio Press "OK".
The system builds playlists (in temporary
Broadcasting) radio If “FM-DAB auto tracking" is activated,
memory); this operation can take from a
few seconds to several minutes at the first
there may be a time offset of a few
Terrestrial Digital Radio seconds when the system switches to "FM"
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
Digital radio provides higher quality sound. analogue radio, and in some cases a change
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a in volume.
Playlists are updated whenever the ignition
choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical When the digital signal quality is restored, the
is switched off or a USB memory stick is
order. system automatically changes back to "DAB".
connected. The audio system memorises these
Press Radio Media to display the main
lists, which will subsequently load faster if they
page. If the "DAB" station being listened to is have not been changed.
Press “Band …" at the top right of the screen to not available on “FM” (“FM-DAB" option
display the "DAB" waveband. shaded), or "FM-DAB auto tracking" is not Auxiliary socket (AUX)
activated, the sound will cut out while the
FM-DAB tracking digital signal is too weak.
Depending on equipment
Connect a portable device (MP3 player,
“DAB" does not cover 100 % of the territory.
etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an
When the digital radio signal is poor, “FM-DAB
audio cable (not supplied).
auto follow-up" enables you to continue listening
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"
to the same station by automatically switching to
has been selected in the audio settings.
the corresponding FM analogue station (if there
First adjust the volume on the portable device
is one).
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the
Press Radio Media to display the main
audio system.
page.
Controls are managed via the portable device.

277
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Selecting the source If play does not start automatically, it may be Information and advice
necessary to start the audio playback from the
Press Radio Media to display the main The system supports USB mass storage
smartphone.
page. devices, BlackBerry® devices and Apple® players
Control is from the portable device or by using
Select "SOURCES". via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not
the system's touch buttons.
Select the source. supplied.
Once connected in streaming mode, the Devices are managed using the audio system
Watching a video smartphone is considered to be a media controls.
Depending on equipment/Depending on version/ source. Other devices, not recognised on connection,
Depending on country. must be connected to the auxiliary socket using
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth
Connecting Apple® players streaming, if compatible.
Video control commands are accessible Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using The audio system will only play audio files with
only through the touch screen. a suitable cable (not supplied). ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file
Play starts automatically. extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and
Press Radio Media to display the main
Control is via the audio system. 320 Kbps.
page.
Select "SOURCES". It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
The classifications available are those of
Select Video to start the video. No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
the portable device connected (artists/
All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files.
albums/genres/playlists/audio books/
To remove the USB memory stick, press The supported sampling rates are 32, 44 and
podcasts).
the pause button to stop the video, then 48 KHz.
The default classification used is by artist. To
remove the memory stick. To avoid reading and display problems, we
modify the classification used, return to the
The system can play video files in the MPEG-4 recommend choosing file names less than 20
first level of the menu then select the desired
Part 2, MPEG-2, MPEG-1, H.264, H.263, VP8, characters long that do not contain any special
classification (playlists for example) and
WMV and RealVideo formats. characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù).
confirm to go down through the menu to the
Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
desired track.
Streaming Bluetooth® (File Allocation Table).
Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed The version of software in the audio system may
We recommend using the original USB
from your smartphone. not be compatible with the generation of the
cable for the portable device.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated. Apple® player.
First adjust the volume on the portable device (to
a high level).
Then adjust the volume of the audio system.

278
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Telephone Procedure from the system

Press Telephone to display the main
The ability of the system to connect just
one profile depends on the telephone. 12
All three profiles may connect by default.
Pairing a Bluetooth® page.
Press "Bluetooth search".
telephone The profiles compatible with the system
Or are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
The services available depend on the
Select "Search". MAP and PAN.
network, the SIM card and the
The list of detected telephones is
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Visit the Brand's website for more information
displayed.
Consult the telephone user guide and the (compatibility, additional help, etc.).
Select the name of the chosen telephone
service provider to check which services are
in the list.
available. Automatic reconnection
Connection sharing On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone
The Bluetooth function must be activated The system offers to connect the telephone with connected is present again, it is automatically
and the telephone configured as "Visible 3 profiles: recognised and within about 30 seconds
to all” (in the telphone settings). – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), after switching on the ignition, the pairing is
–  “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of established automatically (Bluetooth activated).
To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is To modify the connection profile:
audio files on the telephone),
used (from the telephone or from the system), Press Telephone to display the main
– "Mobile internet data".
ensure that the code is the same in the system page.
and in the telephone. The "Mobile internet data" profile must Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
be activated for connected navigation, secondary page.
If the pairing procedure fails, we
after first activating smartphone connection Select "Bluetooth connection" to display
recommend deactivating and then
sharing. the list of paired devices.
reactivating the Bluetooth function on the
telephone. Press the "Details" button.
Select one or more profiles.

Select one or more profiles.

Procedure from the telephone Press "OK" to confirm.
Select the system name in the list of Press "OK" to confirm.
Depending on the type of telephone, you may by
detected devices.
prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and
In the system, accept the connection request
messages.
from the telephone.

279
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Managing paired telephones Select "End call" on the touch screen. Calling a recently used
This function lets you connect or disconnect a
device or delete a pairing.
number
Press Telephone to display the main
Making a call Press Telephone to display the main
page.
page. Using the telephone is not recommended Or
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the while driving. Press and hold
secondary page. Park the vehicle.
Select "Bluetooth connection" to display Make the call using the steering mounted the steering mounted telephone button.
the list of paired devices. controls.
Press on the name of the telephone
Select "Calls".
selected in the list to disconnect it.
Press again to connect it. Calling a new number Select the desired contact from the displayed list.

Press Telephone to display the main It is always possible to make a call

Deleting a telephone page. directly from the telephone; as a safety
Select the basket at top right of the Enter the phone number using the digital measure, first park the vehicle.
screen to display a basket alongside the keypad.
telephone chosen. Press "Call" to start the call.
Press the basket alongside the telephone Managing contacts/entries
chosen to delete it. Press Telephone to display the main
Calling a contact page.
Receiving a call Press Telephone to display the main Select "Contact".
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a page. Select "Create" to add a new contact.
superimposed display in the screen. Or press and hold
Make a short press on the steering Press the "Telephone" tab to enter the
mounted telephone button to accept an the steering mounted telephone button. contact’s telephone number(s).
incoming call. Press the "Address" tab to enter the
And Select "Contact". contact’s address(es).
Make a long press Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Press the "Email" tab to enter the
Select "Call". contact’s email address(es).
on the steering mounted telephone button Press "OK" to save.
to reject the call.
Or

280
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Press this button to sort contacts by

Surname+first name or by First
Managing quick messages
Press Telephone to display the main
Access to email messages depends on
the compatibility between the 12
name+surname. smartphone and the onboard system.
page.
The "Email" function allows email Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
addresses to be entered for a contact, secondary page.
but the system is not able to send emails. Select "Quick messages" to display the Settings
list of messages.
Select the "Delayed", "My arrival", "Not Audio settings
Managing messages available" or "Other" tab, enabling you to Press Settings to display the main page.
Press Telephone to display the main create new messages.
page. Press "Create" to write a new message. Select "Audio settings".
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
secondary page. Select the message chosen in one of the Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound",
Select "Messages" to display the list of lists. "Voice" or "Ringtone".
messages. Press "Transfer" to select one or more Press "OK" to save the settings.
Select the "All", "Incoming" or "Sent” recipients.
tab. Press "Play" to start playing the message.
Select the details of the message chosen The balance/distribution (or spatialisation
in one of the lists. with the Arkamys© system) uses audio
Press "Answer" to send a quick message Managing email processing to adjust the sound quality
stored in the system. Press Telephone to display the main according to the number of passengers in the
Press "Call" to start the call. page. vehicle.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Available only with the front and rear speaker
Press "Play" to listen to the message. secondary page. configuration.
Select "Email" to display the list of
messages. The Ambience setting (choice of 6
Access to "Messages" depends on the
Select the "Incoming", "Sent" or "Not ambiences) and the Bass, Medium and
compatibility between the smartphone
read” tab. Treble sound settings are different and
and the onboard system.
Select the message chosen in one of the lists. independent for each audio source.
Some smartphones retrieve messages or
Press "Play" to start playing the message. Activate or deactivate "Loudness".
email messages more slowly than others.

281
 CITROËN Connect Nav

The "Position” settings (All passengers, Press "OK" again to save the settings. Move the slider to adjust the brightness of
Driver and Front only) are common to all the screen and/or the instrument panel.
sources. Press Settings to display the main page.
The location for the photograph is
Activate or deactivate "Touch tones",
square; the system reshapes the original
"Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
photograph if in another format.
input". secondary page.
Press this button to reset the selected Select "System settings".
Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging© profile.
optimises the sound distribution inside Select "Units" to change the units of distance,
Resetting the selected profile activates fuel consumption and temperature.
the passenger compartment.
the English language by default. Select "Factory settings" to restore the initial
settings.
Configuring profiles Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to link "Audio
settings" with it. Resetting the system to "Factory
Press Settings to display the main page.
Select "Audio settings". settings" activates English and degrees
Fahrenheit and deactivates summer time.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound",
secondary page. Select "System info" to display the versions of
"Voice" or "Ringtone".
Select "Setting of the profiles". the various modules installed in the system.
Press "OK" to save the selected profile’s
settings.
Select "Profile 1", "Profile 2", "Profile 3” or Selecting the language
"Common profile". Modifying system settings Press Settings to display the main page.
Press this button to enter a name for the
Press Settings to display the main page.
profile using the virtual keypad. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Press "OK" to confirm. secondary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
secondary page. Select "Languages" to change the
Press this button to add a photograph to language.
Select "Screen configuration".
the profile.
Insert a USB memory stick containing the
Select "Animation". Setting the date
photograph in the USB port.
Activate or deactivate:Automatic Press Settings to display the main page.
Select the photograph.
scrolling
Press "OK" to accept the transfer of the
Select "Brightness". Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
photograph.
secondary page.

282
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Select "Setting the time-date". Press "OK" to confirm. Navigation

I cannot enter the navigation address.
12
Select "Date".
The system may not automatically The address is not recognised.
Press this button to set the date.
manage the change between winter and ►  Use the "intuitive method" by pressing
summer time (depending on the country of the "Search…" button at the bottom of the
Press "OK" to confirm.
sale). "Navigation” page.
The route calculation is not successful.
Select the display format for the date.
The route settings may conflict with the current
Colour schemes location (for example, if toll roads are excluded
Time and date setting is only available if Depending on equipment/Depending on version. but the vehicle is on a toll road).
"GPS synchronisation" is deactivated. ►  Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
As a safety measure, the procedure for
menu.
changing the colour scheme is only
I do not receive "Danger zone” alerts.
Setting the time possible when the vehicle is stationary.
You have not subscribed to the online services
Press Settings to display the main page. Press Settings to display the main page. option.
►  If you have subscribed to the option:
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Select "Color schemes". - a few days may elapse before the service is
secondary page. activated,
Select "Setting the time-date". Select a colour scheme in the list then - services may not be selected in the system
press "OK" to confirm. menu,
Select "Time". - online services are not active ("TOMTOM
Press this button to set the time using the Whenever the colour scheme is
TRAFFIC" not shown on the map).
virtual keypad. changed, the system restarts, temporarily
The POIs do not appear.
Press "OK" to confirm. displaying a black screen.
The POIs have not been selected.
►  Set the zoom level to 600 ft (200 m) or select
Press this button to set the time zone. POIs in the POI list.
Frequently asked The "Danger zone" audible warning feature is
Select the display format for the time
(12h/24h).
questions not working.
The audible warning is not active or the volume
Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 The following information groups together the is too low.
hour). answers to the most frequently asked questions
Activate or deactivate GPS concerning the system.
synchronisation (UTC).

283
 CITROËN Connect Nav

►  Activate the audible warning in the The altitude is not displayed. The aerial is missing or has been damaged
"Navigation" menu and check the voice volume On starting, GPS initialisation may take up to (for example while entering a car wash or
in the sound settings. 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites underground car park).
The system does not suggest a detour correctly. ►  Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
around an incident on the route. ►  Wait until the system has started up The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels,
The route settings do not take account of TMC completely so that there is GPS coverage by at basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception,
messages. least 4 satellites. including in RDS mode.
►  Configure the "Traffic info " function in Depending on the geographical environment This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is
the route settings list (Without, Manual or (tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of not indicative of an audio system malfunction.
Automatic). reception of the GPS signal may vary. I cannot find some radio stations in the list of
I receive a warning about a "Danger area" This behaviour is normal. The system is stations received.
that is not on my route. dependent on the GPS signal reception The name of the radio station changes.
As well as providing guided navigation, the conditions. The station is no longer received or its name has
system announces all "Danger areas" positioned My navigation is no longer connected. changed in the list.
in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may During start-up and in certain geographical Some radio stations send other information
provide an alert for "Danger areas" located on areas, the connection may be unavailable. in place of their name (the title of the song for
nearby or parallel roads. ►  Check that the online services are activated example).
►  Zoom the map to show the exact location (settings, contract). The system interprets these details as the station
of the "Danger area". You can select "On the name.
route" to stop receiving warnings or decrease the Radio ►  Press the "Update list" button in the "Radio
warning duration. The reception quality of the tuned radio stations” secondary menu.
Certain traffic jams along the route are not station gradually deteriorates or the station
indicated in real time. presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz Media
On starting, a few minutes may elapse before is displayed, etc.). Playback of my USB memory stick starts only
the system begins to receive traffic information. The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes).
►  Wait until traffic information is being received transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the Some files supplied with the memory stick may
correctly (traffic information icons shown on the geographical area. greatly slow down access to reading the memory
map). ►  Activate the "RDS" function by means of the stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing
In certain countries, only major routes short-cut menu to enable the system to check time).
(motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic whether there is a more powerful transmitter in ►  Delete the files supplied with the memory
information. the geographical area. stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the
This is perfectly normal. The system is file structure on the memory stick.
dependent on the traffic information available.

284
 CITROËN Connect Nav

There may be an extended pause after

inserting a USB stick.
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with
the system.
The contacts are not listed in alphabetical
order. 12
The system reads a variety of data (folder, title, ►  You can check the compatibility of the Some telephones offer display options.
artist, etc.). This can take from a few seconds to telephone on the Brand's website (services). Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can
a few minutes. Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. be transferred in a specific order.
This is perfectly normal. Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the ►  Modify the telephone directory display
Some characters in information about the USB cables are of poor quality. settings.
currently playing media may not be displayed ►  Use genuine USB cables to ensure The system does not receive SMS.
correctly. compatibility. Bluetooth mode does not allow SMS text
The audio system is unable to process certain Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. messages to be sent to the system.
types of character. Android Auto and CarPlay are not available in all
►  Use standard characters to name tracks and countries. Settings
folders. ►  Check the Google Android Auto or Apple When the treble and bass settings are
Playback of streaming files does not start. website to see which countries are supported. changed, the ambience is deselected.
The connected device does not automatically The volume of the telephone connected in When the ambience is changed, the treble
launch playback. Bluetooth mode is inaudible. and bass settings are reset.
►  Start playback from the device. The volume depends on both the system and the Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and
Track names and playing times are not telephone. bass settings, and vice versa.
displayed on the audio streaming screen. ►  Increase the volume of the audio system, to ►  Modify the treble and bass or ambience
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer maximum if required, and increase the volume of settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.
of this information. the telephone if necessary. When the balance settings are changed, the
Ambient noise affects the quality of the distribution is deselected.
Telephone telephone call. When the distribution setting is changed, the
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. ►  Reduce the ambient noise level (close balance settings are deselected.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be windows, turn down ventilation, slow down, etc.). Selecting a distribution setting imposes the
switched off or the device may not be visible. Some contacts are duplicated in the list. balance settings, and vice versa.
►  Check that the telephone has Bluetooth The options for synchronising contacts are: ►  Modify the balance setting or the distribution
switched on. synchronise the contacts on the SIM card, the setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
►  Check in the telephone settings that it is contacts on the telephone, or both. When both There is a difference in sound quality
"visible to all". synchronisations are selected, some contacts between audio sources.
►  Deactivate then reactivate the telephone’s may be duplicated. To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound
Bluetooth function. ►  Select "Display SIM card contacts" or settings can be tailored to different audio
"Display telephone contacts".

285
 CITROËN Connect Nav

sources, which can generate audible differences

when changing source.
►  Check that the sound settings are appropriate
to the sources listened to. We recommend
setting the sound functions (Bass:, Treble:,
Balance) to the middle position, setting the
musical ambience to "None", setting loudness
correction to "Active" in USB mode and "Inactive"
in Radio mode.
►  In all cases, after applying sound settings,
adjust the volume level on the portable device (to
a high level) first. Then adjust the volume level
on the audio system.
When the engine is off, the system switches
off after several minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's
operating time depends on the state of charge of
the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system
automatically goes into energy economy mode
and switches off to maintain an adequate charge
in the battery.
►  Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the
charge of the battery.
The date and time cannot be set.
Setting of the date and time is only available
if the synchronisation with the satellites is
deactivated.
►  Settings menu / Options / Time-Date setting.
Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS
synchronisation" (UTC).

286
 Alphabetical index

180° rear vision   176 Airbags, lateral   109–110 Blind spot sensors   171
Air conditioning   79–80, 81–84, 82 Blinds, side   75
Air conditioning, digital   83 BlueHDi   20, 195, 203

A
Air conditioning, dual-zone automatic   80–81 Bluetooth (hands-free)   243–244, 257, 279
Air conditioning, manual   80, 82 Bluetooth (telephone)   257–258, 279–280
ABS   101 Air intake   80–82 Bodywork   201
Accelerated charging unit (Wallbox)   182 Air vents   79 Bonnet   192
Accessories   98 Alarm   46–47 Boot   45
Access to the 3rd row   58, 60 Android Auto connection   256, 274 Boot lid   34–35, 36, 45
Access to the spare wheel   209 Anti-lock braking system (ABS)   101 Brake discs   197
Active Safety Brake   166–168 Anti-pinch   75 Brake lamps   215, 217
AdBlue®   20, 197 Antitheft / Immobiliser   30 Brakes   196–197
AdBlue® tank   198 Apple CarPlay connection   256, 273 Braking   150
Additive, Diesel   195–196 Applications   274 Braking assistance system   101
Adjusting head restraints   51 Area, loading   31, 38–39, 73 Braking, automatic emergency   166–168
Adjusting seat   49–51 Armrest, front   51 Braking, dynamic emergency   143–144
Adjusting the air distribution   80–81 Assistance call   99 Brightness   259
Adjusting the air flow   80–81 Assistance, emergency braking   101, 168 Bulbs   212
Adjusting the date   28, 260, 282 Audible warning   100 Bulbs (changing)   212, 215
Adjusting the height and reach of the Audio streaming (Bluetooth)   243, 255, 278
steering wheel   53
Adjusting the lumbar support   49
Adjusting the seat angle   49, 51 C
Adjusting the seat belt height   106 B Cable, audio   277
Adjusting the temperature   80–81 Battery   220 Cable, Jack   277
Adjusting the time   28, 259, 283 Battery, 12 V   189, 195–196, 219–222 Capacity, fuel tank   178–179
Advanced Grip Control   103–104 Battery, ancillaries   219–220 Cap, fuel filler   178–179
Advice on care and maintenance   180, 201 Battery, charging   221–222 Care of the bodywork   201
Advice on driving   8, 136–137 Battery, remote control   36–37, 85 CD   242
Airbags   107–110, 112 Bench seat, one-piece, fixed   58–59 CD, MP3   242
Airbags, curtain   109–110 Blind, panoramic roof   75 Central locking   29, 34, 38
Airbags, front   108, 110, 112 Blind spot monitoring system   172 Changing a bulb   212, 215, 217

287
 Alphabetical index

D
Changing a bulb (side-hinged doors)   215 Closing the doors   29, 34, 44–45
Changing a fuse   217–219 Collision Risk Alert   166–167
Changing a wheel   208 Compressor, tyre inflation   205 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) -
Changing a wiper blade   96 Configuration, vehicle   26 Digital radio   240–241, 254, 277
Changing the remote control battery   36 Connected applications   274 Date (setting)   28, 260, 282
Changing to free-wheeling   223 Connection, Bluetooth   244, 257–258, Daytime running lamps   90, 213–214
Charge level indicator (Electric)   22 274–275, 279–280 Deactivating the passenger airbag   108, 112
Charging cable   183 Connection, Wi-Fi network   275 Deactivation of DSC (ESC)   102
Charging cable (Electric)   182 Connectivity   273 Deadlocking   34–35
Charging connector (Electric)   181, 186–188 Consumption figures   27 Deferred charging   27, 188
Charging flap (Electric)   181, 186–188 Container, AdBlue®   198 Deferred charging (Electric)   26–27, 181, 186
Charging system (Electric)   5, 9, 26, 180, 193 Control, emergency boot release   36 Defrosting   54, 82–83
Charging the traction battery Control, emergency door   29, 35–36 Demisting   82–83
(Electric)   22, 180, 186–188 Control, heated seats   52 Demisting, rear   83
Checking the engine oil level   19 Control stalk, lighting   89 Demisting, rear screen   83
Checking the levels   193–195 Control stalk, wipers   94–95 Dimensions   233
Checking tyre pressures Control unit   182–183 Dipstick   19, 193
(using the kit)   205, 207–208 Courtesy lamp   87 Direction indicators   90, 213–215, 217
Checks   193, 195–197 Courtesy lamp, front   87–88, 216 Display, head-up   155–156
Checks, routine   195–197 Courtesy lamp, rear   87–88, 216 Domestic charging   183
Child lock   134–135 Courtesy lamps   87–88, 216 Domestic charging (Electric)   187–188, 231
Child lock on rear windows   135 Cover, load space   72 Door pockets   70
Children   107, 114, 122–124, Crew cab, fixed   66–68 Doors, rear   44–45
131, 131–133, 131–132 Crew cab, folding   68 Doors, side   40
Children (safety)   134 Cruise control   156, 158–159, 161–163 Doors, side-hinged   34–35, 44–45, 215
Child seats    107, 110–114, 119, 120, 132 Cruise control, adaptive   158, 163, 165–166 Driver’s attention warning   170
Child seats, conventional   113–114, 119, 120 Cruise control by speed limit Drive selector (Electric)   149, 196
Child seats, i-Size   131–132 recognition   158–159 Driving   136–137
Child seats, ISOFIX   122–124, 131, Cruise control, dynamic with Driving aids camera (warnings)   154
131–132, 132 Stop function   158–159 Driving aids (recommendations)   154
Cleaning (advice)   180, 201–202 Driving economically   8
Closing the boot   45 Driving modes   150

288
 Alphabetical index

G
Driving modes (Electric)   150 Filling the AdBlue® tank   195, 198
Dynamic stability control (DSC)   101, 104 Filling the fuel tank   178–179
Filter, air   196 Gauge, fuel   178–179
Filter, oil   196 Gearbox, automatic   145–149, 151, 196, 221

E
Filter, particle   195–196 Gearbox, manual   145, 151, 196
Filter, passenger compartment   79, 196 Gear lever, automatic gearbox   146–148
EBFD   101 Finisher   212 Gear lever, manual gearbox   145
Eco-driving (advice)   8 Fitting a wheel   210–212 Gear shift indicator ~ Gear efficiency
ECO mode   150 Fitting roof bars   191 indicator   145–146
Economy mode   189 Fittings, interior   69, 73 Glove box   69
Electric motor   5, 9, 26, 180, 190, Fittings, rear   73 G.P.S.   270
193, 220, 223, 231 Flap, charging   188
Electric windows   48 Flap, fuel filler   178–179
Flap, removable   54–56
H
Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)   101
Emergency braking assistance (EBA)   101 Flashing indicators   90
Emergency call   99 Floor cab   217 Hazard warning lamps   98, 203
Emergency warning lamps   98, 203 Fluid, brake   194 headlamp adjustment   93
Emissions control system, SCR   21, 197 Fluid, engine coolant   194 Headlamp adjustment   93
Energy economy mode   189 Fluid, power steering   194 Headlamps, automatic dipping   92–93
Energy flows   26 Foglamp, rear   89, 215, 217 Headlamps, automatic illumination   90–91
Energy recovery   22, 150 Foglamps, front   89, 92, 214 Headlamps, dipped beam   89, 213
Engine   197 Foglamps, rear   89 Headlamps, halogen   212–213
Engine compartment   193 Frequency (radio)   276 Headlamps, main beam   89, 213–214
Engine, Diesel   178, 193, 203, 226 Fuel   8, 178 Headlamps, Xenon   213
Engines   225 Fuel consumption   8 Head restraints, front   51
Environment   8, 37, 85, 137 Fuel tank   178 Head-up display   155–156
ESC (electronic stability control)   101 Fusebox, dashboard   217 Heated bench seat   52
Fusebox, engine compartment   217, 219 Heating   79–80, 82–86
Fuses   217–219 Heating, additional   46, 84–86

F
Heating, programmable   27, 46, 84–86
High voltage   180
Fatigue detection   170 Hill start assist   144–145

289
 Alphabetical index

K
Histogramme, fuel consumption   27 Lighting, guide-me home   91
Horn   100 Lighting, interior   87, 93–94
Key   29–33, 35–36 Lighting, mood   93–94
Key, electronic   29, 141 Lighting, welcome   91

I
Keyless Entry and Starting   29–35, 139–140 Loading   73, 191
Key not recognised   141 Loading area fittings   72
Ignition   140–141, 280 Key with remote control   33–34, 138 Load reduction mode   189
Ignition on   141 Kit, hands-free   243–244, 257, 279 Load restraint   72
Immobiliser, electronic   138 Kit, puncture repair   205–208 Locating your vehicle   30
Indicator, AdBlue® range   20 Kit, temporary puncture repair   205–208 Locking   29–30, 33–34
Indicator, coolant temperature   19 Locking from the inside   38–39
Indicator, engine oil level   19 Locking the doors   38

L
Indicator lamps, operation   89 Low fuel level   178–179
Indicators, direction   90 Lumbar   49, 52–53
Inflating tyres   197, 236 Labels   6, 57–58
Inflating tyres and accessories Labels, identification   236

M
(using the kit)   205, 207–208 Lams with Full LED technology   92
Infrared camera   154 Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)   169
Instrument panel   10, 155 Leather (care)   202 Mains socket (domestic network)   182
Intelligent Traction Control   103 Level, AdBlue®   195 Maintenance (advice)   180, 201
Internet browser   271, 274 Level, brake fluid   194 Maintenance, routine   155, 195, 197
ISOFIX   128, 130, 131, 131–132 Level, Diesel additive   195–196 Manoeuvring aids (recommendations)   154
Level, engine coolant   19, 194 Map reading lamps   87
Level, engine oil   19, 193 Markings, identification   236

J
Level, headlamp wash   95 Massage function    52–53
Level, power steering fluid   194 Mat   69, 155
Jack   208–209, 277 Levels and checks   193–195 Memorising a speed   156
Jump starting   220 Level, screenwash fluid   94–95, 195 Menu   256
Lighting   89 Menu, main   26, 238
Lighting, cornering   92 Menus (audio)   251–252, 263–264
Lighting dimmer   23 Menu short cuts   26
Lighting, exterior   89 Messages   281

290
 Alphabetical index

Messages, quick   281 Opening the doors   29–30, 39–40 Profiles   259, 282
Minimum traction battery charge level Opening to 180°   44–45 Protecting children   108, 110–112, 114,
(Electric)   22 122–124, 130, 131–132, 131–133
Mirror, rear view   54 Public fast charging station   182, 187

P
Mirrors, door   53–54, 83, 171–172 Puncture   205–206, 208
Misfuel prevention   179
Mobile application   27, 86, 188 Pads, brake   196–197

R
Moduwork   54–56 Paint   201, 236
Motor, electric   140, 193, 231 Paint colour code   236
Mountings, ISOFIX   120, 128, 130, Paint, matt   201 Radar (warnings)   154
131, 131–132 Panoramic glass sunroof   75 Radio   239–240, 252–253, 276
MP3 CD   242 Parcel shelf, rear   70 Radio, digital (Digital Audio
Parking brake   141, 196 Broadcasting - DAB)   240, 254, 277
Parking brake, electric   142–144, 196 Range, AdBlue®   20, 195

N
Parking sensors, audible and visual   172 RDS   253, 276
Parking sensors, front   173 Rear screen, demisting   83
Navigation   268–270 Parking sensors, rear   172 Recharging the battery   221–222
Navigation, connected   271–273 Passenger compartment temperature Recharging the traction battery   183
Net, cargo   54–56 pre-conditioning (Electric)   27, 86 Recharging the traction battery
Net, high load retaining   73–74 Pedestrian horn (Electric)   101, 137 (Electric)   180, 186–188
Number plate lamps   216 Plates, identification   236 Recirculation, air   80–82
Player, Apple®   243, 255, 278 Recovery   223
Player, MP3 CD   242 Recovery of the vehicle   223

O
Player, USB   241, 254, 277 Reduction of electrical load   189
Port, USB   71, 241, 254, 256, 273, 277 Regeneration of the particle filter   196
Obstacle detection   172 Power   22 Regenerative braking (deceleration
Oil change   193 Power indicator (Electric)   9, 22 by engine braking)   149–150
Oil consumption   193 Power mode   150 Reinitialisation of the under-inflation
OIl, engine   193 Pressures, tyres   197, 205, 207, 236 detection system   153
On-board tools   204 Pre-tensioning seat belts   107 Reinitialising the remote control   37
Opening the bonnet   192 Priming pump   203 Reminder, key in ignition   140
Opening the boot   29–30, 45 Priming the fuel system   203 Reminder, lighting on   90

291
 Alphabetical index

Remote control   29–35, 138 Seat and bench seat, rear, on rails  Speed limiter   156, 158–161
Remote functions   188  57–58, 62–64 Speed limit recognition   157, 160,
Remotely operable functions (Electric)   27, 86 Seat angle   49 162, 165–166
Removing a wheel   210–212 Seat belts   104–107, 113 Speedometer   155
Removing the mat   69 Seat belts, rear   106 Sport mode   150
Replacing bulbs   212–213, 215, 217 Seat, bench front, 2-seat   51, 106 Stability control (ESC)   101, 103–104
Replacing fuses   217–218 Seat, rear bench   57–58 Starting a Diesel engine   178
Replacing the air filter   196 Seats, electric   50–51 Starting the engine   138, 140
Replacing the oil filter   196 Seats, front   49–51 Starting the vehicle   139, 141, 145–148
Replacing the passenger compartment filter   196 Seats, heated   52 Starting using another battery   141, 220
Reservoir, screenwash   195 Seat(s), individual, rear, on rails   64–66, 106 Station, radio   239, 252–253, 276
Resetting the trip recorder   23 Seats, rear   58–64, 111 Stay, bonnet   192
Reversing camera   154, 174, 176 Selector, gear   146 Steering mounted controls,
Reversing lamp   215, 217 Sensors (warnings)   154 audio   238, 250, 263
Roof bars   191 Serial number, vehicle   236 Steering wheel, adjustment   53
Roof rack   191 Service indicator   18 Stickers, customising ~ Stickers,
Running out of fuel (Diesel)   203 Servicing   18, 195, 197 expressive   202
Settings, equipment   26 Stopping the vehicle   140–141, 146–148
Settings, system   259, 282 Stop & Start   25, 79, 150–152,

S
Sidelamps   89, 213–215, 217 178, 192, 196, 222
Side repeater   214 Storage   51, 57, 66–69
Safety, children   108, 110–112, 114, Silent vehicle warning sound Storage compartments   69–70
122–124, 130, 131–132, 131–133 (Electric)   101, 137 Storage wells   66–68, 70
Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel)   196 Sliding side door, electric   34–35, 39–42 Stowing rings   72
Screen, instrument panel   24 Sliding side door, hands-free   43–44 Sunshine sensor   79
Screen menu map   256 Sliding side window   74 Super-fast charging (Electric)   187–188, 231
Screen, multifunction (with audio system)   238 Smartphone   27 Suspension   197
Screenwash   94 Snow chains   153, 190, 210 Switching off the engine   138–140
Screenwash, front   94 Snow chains, link   190, 210 Synchronising the remote control   37
Screenwash, rear   95 Socket, 12 V accessory   70
SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)   21, 197 Socket, 220 V   71
Seat and bench seat, rear, fixed   57–58, 60–61 Socket, auxiliary   242, 255, 277
Socket, Jack   242, 277

292
 Alphabetical index

T Traction battery (Electric)   22, 26,

180–181, 231
Voice commands   265–268

Table of weights   226 Traction control (ASR)   101, 104

Table position   50
W
Traffic information (TA)   239
Table, retractable sliding   75–78 Traffic information (TMC)   270
Tables, aircraft   70 Trailer   103, 190 Wallbox (Electric)   182
Tables of engines   231 Trailer stability assist (TSA)   103 Warning and indicator lamps   12
Tables of fuses   217–219 Trajectory control systems   101 Warning lamp, driver''s seat belt
Table top, working   57 Triangle, warning   203 not fastened   107
Tailgate rear screen   45 Trip computer   24–25 Warning lamps   12
Tank, fuel   178–179 Trip distance recorder   23 Warning lamp, seat belts   107
Technical data   226, 231 Tyres   197, 236 Warnings and indicators   12
Telephone   243–246, 257–258, 279–281 Tyre under-inflation detection   152–153, Washing   155
Telephone, Bluetooth with voice 207, 212 Washing (advice)   180, 201–202
recognition   246 Weights   225–226, 231
Temperature, coolant   19 Welcome lighting   30
Textured Paint   201
U
Wheel, spare   153, 197, 208–209, 212
Thermal comfort consumption indicator Windows, rear   74
(Electric)   22 Under-inflation (detection)   152 Windscreen wipers   94–95
Thermal comfort equipment   22 Unlocking   29–33 Wiper blades (changing)   96
Third brake lamp   215 Unlocking from the inside   38–39 Wiper, rear   95
Time (setting)   28, 259, 283 Unlocking, selective   31–33 Wipers   94–95
TMC (Traffic info)   270 Unlocking the doors   38 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive   95
Tool box   204 Unlocking, total   31–33
Tools   205, 208 Updating the date   28, 260, 282
Topping-up AdBlue®   198 Updating the time   28, 259, 283
Top Rear Vision   174 USB   241, 254, 256, 273, 277
Total distance recorder   23
Touch screen   25–27, 86
Towbar   103, 190
Towed loads   225–226, 231 V
Towing another vehicle   223–224 Ventilation   79–80, 84–86
Towing eye   224 Video   278
Traction battery charge   183

293
 4DCONCEPT
Automobiles CITROËN declares, in accordance Groupe MAURY Imprimeur
with the provisions of the European legislation
(Directive 2000/53) relating to End-of-Life
Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by
this legislation and that recycled materials are 10-31-1282

used in the manufacture of the products that it

sells.

No part of this document may be reproduced

or translated without written permission from
Automobiles CITROËN.

Printed in the EU
08-20
ANG. 20K0C.0040

*20K0C.0040*